docThe Designer - Cabnetware eSupport Member Login
download 
Report Transcription
The Designer - Cabnetware eSupport Member Login
The Designer Version 8.0 Copyright 2005 PLANIT SOLUTIONS, INC. Planit Solutions, Inc. 3800 Palisades Drive Tuscaloosa, AL 35405 Office Fax Tech Support Website Email (205) 556-9199 (205) 666-4474 (866) 675-6551 www.planitsolutions.com [email protected] SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLANIT SOLUTIONS INC. (hereinafter "PLANIT SOLUTIONS") hereby grants to LICENSEE and LICENSEE hereby accepts a nontransferable and nonexclusive license to use the software, including all documentation and information relating thereto, any updates if provided hereunder and the encrypted authorization key (hereinafter collectively called "software"), as listed above. This License is granted subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. License - The Software licensed hereunder is the property of PLANIT SOLUTIONS and contains proprietary information of PLANIT SOLUTIONS. LICENSEE may use the Software only in connection with LICENSEE'S own operations and may not use it for third parties or for estimating the work of third parties. The Software can only be used on a single computer with the authorization key provided hereunder. LICENSEE may not duplicate or copy the authorization key. LICENSEE must keep possession of the authorization key and show it to PLANIT SOLUTIONS upon request at any time to ensure compliance with this Agreement. LICENSEE may physically transfer the Software from one computer to another provided that the Software is used on only one computer at a time. LICENSEE may not copy the Software except as permitted hereunder without the prior written consent of PLANIT SOLUTIONS; provided, however, that LICENSEE may make two copies of the diskette provided for emergency backup purposes. The backup copies must include the copyright and proprietary notices provided thereon. 2. License Fee - The license fee and all payments required of LICENSEE shall be detailed in an Invoice to be provided to LICENSEE separately. All payments required of LICENSEE shall be made at PLANIT SOLUTIONS’ principal place of business at 3800 Palisades Drive, Tuscaloosa, Alabama 35405. 3. Title, Source Code, Copyrights - No title to or ownership of the Software or any copyright therein is transferred hereby to LICENSEE. LICENSEE shall not receive any source code for any portion of the Software. LICENSEE shall not distribute or provide copies of the Software or any portion thereof, including the authorization key, to others to modify, adapt, translate, disassemble, reverse compile or create derivative works based on the Software. 4. Term - The License granted herein shall continue as long as LICENSEE retains the Software. LICENSEE may terminate this License by returning the Software and all copies thereof, including the authorization key, to PLANIT SOLUTIONS. PLANIT SOLUTIONS shall have the right to terminate this License if within ten (10) days after written notice from PLANIT SOLUTIONS of a breach of this License. LICENSEE fails to correct the matter and to comply with the terms hereof. LICENSEE agrees upon termination to return all copies of the Software, including the authorization key, and to certify in writing to PLANIT SOLUTIONS that LICENSEE has discontinued its use of the Software and has returned the Software and all copies thereof. 5. Confidentiality and Proprietary Rights - LICENSEE acknowledges that the Software is confidential and proprietary to PLANIT SOLUTIONS. LICENSEE agrees that it shall maintain the Software in confidence and shall not directly or indirectly disclose the Software to any third party or use the Software for its own benefit or for the benefit of others except as permitted hereunder. The internal dissemination of any information related to the Software by LICENSEE shall be limited to those employees of LICENSEE whose duties justify the need to know such information and then only on the basis of a clear understanding by those employees of their obligation to maintain the confidentiality of such information and restrict the use of such information. LICENSEE'S obligations hereunder shall continue until five (5) years after LICENSEE ceases use of the Software and returns the Software and all portions and copies thereof and provides PLANIT SOLUTIONS with certification that LICENSEE has discontinued its use of the Software and has returned the Software and all portions and copies thereof. LICENSEE'S obligations hereunder shall not extend to any portion of the Software which: a. LICENSEE can establish by written documentation was known to it prior to disclosure by PLANIT SOLUTIONS; b. is now or hereafter comes into the public domain through no fault of LICENSEE; or c. is disclosed to LICENSEE without restriction on disclosure by a third party who has the lawful right to make such disclosure to LICENSEE and who did not obtain such information directly or indirectly from PLANIT SOLUTIONS. 6. Survival of Obligation - LICENSEE'S obligations under Paragraph 5 shall survive any termination of this Agreement. 7. Warranties - PLANIT SOLUTIONS warrants that it is the owner of the Software, has the right to grant the License granted herein and that the Software will perform the functions set forth in the associated Users Manual for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of delivery. PLANIT Solutions’ sole obligation under this warranty shall be limited to use of its best efforts to correct any defects in the Software and supply LICENSEE with a corrected version of such Software as soon as practicable after LICENSEE has notified PLANIT SOLUTIONS of such defects. All notices required hereunder shall be in writing, addressed to PLANIT Solutions’ principal place of business and all duties of PLANIT SOLUTIONS with respect to this License, warranty, or any other duty arising out of or in connection with the sale of the Software will be performed by PLANIT SOLUTIONS at its principal place of business at 3800 Palisades Drive, Tuscaloosa, Alabama 35405. PLANIT SOLUTIONS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE LICENSED HEREUNDER. SPECIFICALLY AND WITHOUT LIMITATION PLANIT SOLUTIONS MAKES NO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. PLANIT SOLUTIONS ALSO MAKES NO WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO ANY RESULTS OBTAINED BY THE LICENSEE THROUGH USE OF THE SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT WILL PLANIT SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, ANY RESULTS OBTAINED BY USE, OR ANY INABILITY TO USE SUCH SOFTWARE, OR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY RELATING TO SUCH USE, EVEN IF PLANIT SOLUTIONS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITIES OF SUCH DAMAGES. 8. User Support Program - If LICENSEE accepts PLANIT Solutions’ User Support Program, fees for which will be invoiced to LICENSEE on a periodic basis separately, PLANIT SOLUTIONS will use its best efforts to correct any Software defect discovered by LICENSEE during the term of the User Support Program. In addition, all updates and modifications to the Software Version shall be made available to LICENSEE so long as such program is in effect. 9. Nonassignability - This Agreement and the Software licensed hereunder may not be assigned, sublicensed or otherwise transferred by LICENSEE without PLANIT Solutions’ prior written consent. 10. Applicable Law - This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Alabama. Any action brought under this Agreement shall be brought only in the State Courts of the State of Alabama located in Tuscaloosa County. 11. Entire Agreement - This Agreement constitutes the entire Agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and any modifications of this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be signed by a duly authorized representative of each party. Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement, please call or write: Planit Solutions Inc., 3800 Palisades Drive, Tuscaloosa, AL 35405, Tel: (205) 556-9199, Fax: (205) 556-7898 THE DESIGNER TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 INSTALLATION Before You Install............................................................................................................................... 1-1 Security Key .......................................................................................................................... 1-1 If you are already running a DOS version of Cabnetware .................................................... 1-1 Installing Cabnetware Programs........................................................................................................ 1-2 Installing Cabnetware Tutorials.......................................................................................................... 1-4 Installing Render Textures ................................................................................................................. 1-5 Network Installation............................................................................................................................ 1-6 Sharing of Program, Job and Parameter Files ..................................................................... 1-6 Separate Program Installation with Shared Job and Parameter Files.................................. 1-9 Examples of the Designer Version Program Paths .............................................................. 1-11 Starting Your Cabnetware Program................................................................................................... 1-12 Identifying Cabnetware Screen Components .................................................................................... 1-12 Customizing Window Sizes................................................................................................... 1-13 Cabnetware Terminology................................................................................................................... 1-13 Dialog Boxes ......................................................................................................................... 1-13 Dialog Box Options ............................................................................................................... 1-14 Selecting or Clearing Options with the Mouse...................................................................... 1-14 Selecting an Item in a Drop-down Box ................................................................................. 1-14 Selecting a Number in a Spin Box ........................................................................................ 1-14 Using the Keyboard .............................................................................................................. 1-14 Tab Dialog Boxes.................................................................................................................. 1-14 Selecting ............................................................................................................................... 1-14 Handles ................................................................................................................................. 1-15 Main Bar................................................................................................................................ 1-15 Menus ................................................................................................................................... 1-15 Pop Up Menus ...................................................................................................................... 1-15 Toolbars ................................................................................................................................ 1-16 Cabnetware Menus and Commands ................................................................................................. 1-17 Control Menu......................................................................................................................... 1-17 File Menu .............................................................................................................................. 1-17 View Menu ............................................................................................................................ 1-18 Walls Menu ........................................................................................................................... 1-18 Appliances Menu................................................................................................................... 1-19 Cabinets Menu ...................................................................................................................... 1-20 CAD Menu............................................................................................................................. 1-21 Modify Menu.......................................................................................................................... 1-21 Options Menu........................................................................................................................ 1-22 Window Menu ....................................................................................................................... 1-22 Help Menu............................................................................................................................. 1-22 Cabnetware Menu Bars and Toolbars ............................................................................................... 1-23 Main Menu Bar...................................................................................................................... 1-23 Multi-draw Menu Bar ............................................................................................................. 1-23 Walls Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 1-23 View Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 1-24 Graphic Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 1-24 Placement Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 1-24 Modify Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 1-24 Reports/Output Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 1-25 Appliance Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 1-25 Closet Toolbar....................................................................................................................... 1-25 Cabinet Toolbar..................................................................................................................... 1-26 CAD Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 1-27 Shortcut Keys..................................................................................................................................... 1-28 Moving Among Windows ...................................................................................................... 1-28 File Menu Shortcut Keys....................................................................................................... 1-28 Edit Menu Shortcut Keys ...................................................................................................... 1-28 View Menu Shortcut Keys..................................................................................................... 1-28 Modify Menu Shortcut Keys .................................................................................................. 1-28 CAD Menu Shortcut Keys ..................................................................................................... 1-28 Windows Menu Shortcut Keys .............................................................................................. 1-29 Help Menu Shortcut Keys ..................................................................................................... 1-29 On-Line Tutorial .................................................................................................................... 1-29 Chapter 2 SETUP Preferences........................................................................................................................................ 2-1 General Preferences .......................................................................................................................... 2-1 Path Preferences ............................................................................................................................... 2-2 Setting Path Preferences ...................................................................................................... 2-2 User Information Preferences ............................................................................................................ 2-3 Setting User Information Preferences................................................................................... 2-3 Editing User Information ....................................................................................................... 2-3 Scales and Dimension Preferences................................................................................................... 2-4 Setting Scale and Dimension Preferences ........................................................................... 2-4 Display Preferences ........................................................................................................................... 2-5 Setting Display Preferences.................................................................................................. 2-5 Multi-draw Preferences ...................................................................................................................... 2-7 Estimator Preferences ....................................................................................................................... 2-8 Render Preferences ........................................................................................................................... 2-9 Creating a New Manufacturer’s Catalog............................................................................................ 2-10 Creating a Cabinet Line ........................................................................................................ 2-10 Editing a Manufacturer’s Catalog....................................................................................................... 2-11 Editing Cabinet Lines ............................................................................................................ 2-11 Deleting a Manufacturer’s Catalog..................................................................................................... 2-12 Deleting Cabinet Lines.......................................................................................................... 2-12 Parameters......................................................................................................................................... 2-13 Creating Parameter Files ................................................................................................................... 2-13 Modifying Parameter Files ................................................................................................................. 2-14 Copying Parameter Files ................................................................................................................... 2-14 Deleting Parameter Files ................................................................................................................... 2-15 Printing Parameter Files .................................................................................................................... 2-15 Counter Top Parameters ................................................................................................................... 2-16 Layout Parameters............................................................................................................................. 2-18 Frame Line Parameters ........................................................................................................ 2-18 Additional Frameless Line Parameters................................................................................. 2-20 Cabinet Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 2-21 Uppers................................................................................................................................... 2-21 Bases .................................................................................................................................... 2-24 Worksheet for Typical Drawer Bank ..................................................................................... 2-27 Pantry Cabinets..................................................................................................................... 2-28 Split-Level Cabinets .............................................................................................................. 2-28 Closet Components .............................................................................................................. 2-28 Desk Sections ....................................................................................................................... 2-29 Finished Ends ....................................................................................................................... 2-29 Face Frames ......................................................................................................................... 2-30 Scribes .................................................................................................................................. 2-33 Additional Frameless Line Parameters................................................................................. 2-37 Finished Ends ....................................................................................................................... 2-37 Applied Ends ......................................................................................................................... 2-38 Face Frame Sizes ................................................................................................................. 2-38 Euro Face Frame Sizes ........................................................................................................ 2-39 Door, Drawer, and End Panel Parameters ........................................................................................ 2-41 Creating Doors ...................................................................................................................... 2-41 Alternate Door Style .............................................................................................................. 2-42 Creating Drawers .................................................................................................................. 2-46 Alternate Drawer Style .......................................................................................................... 2-47 Creating End Panels ............................................................................................................. 2-48 Door and Drawer Graphics ................................................................................................................ 2-51 Placing Cabinet Handle Markers .......................................................................................... 2-52 End Panel Graphics ........................................................................................................................... 2-53 Creating Appliance Files .................................................................................................................... 2-53 Modifying Appliance Files .................................................................................................................. 2-54 Copying Appliance Files .................................................................................................................... 2-54 Deleting Appliance Files .................................................................................................................... 2-54 Creating Graphics for Appliance Files ............................................................................................... 2-55 Printing Appliance Files ..................................................................................................................... 2-55 Pricing .............................................................................................................................................. 2-56 Profit/Overhead/Taxes ....................................................................................................................... 2-56 Markups/Discounts ............................................................................................................................ 2-56 Editing Markups and Discounts ............................................................................................ 2-57 Deleting Markups and Discounts .......................................................................................... 2-57 Price Prompts..................................................................................................................................... 2-58 Editing Price Prompts ........................................................................................................... 2-58 Deleting Price Prompts ......................................................................................................... 2-58 Text Prompts...................................................................................................................................... 2-59 Catalog Cabinet Pricing ..................................................................................................................... 2-59 Determining Catalog Cabinet Pricing Methods..................................................................... 2-59 Entering Catalog Cabinet Line Names ................................................................................. 2-60 Arranging Catalog Cabinets.................................................................................................. 2-60 Copying Line Names............................................................................................................. 2-61 Editing Catalog Cabinet Line Prices using the Price by Cabinet Method............................. 2-61 Editing Catalog Cabinet Line Prices using the Price by Cabinet and Door/Drawer Method ............... 2-62 Copying Cabinet Prices ........................................................................................................ 2-63 Setting Filters ........................................................................................................................ 2-63 Deleting Catalog Cabinets ................................................................................................................. 2-64 Custom Cabinet Pricing ..................................................................................................................... 2-64 Copying Line Names............................................................................................................. 2-65 Editing Custom Cabinet Pricing ............................................................................................ 2-65 Copying Cabinet Prices ........................................................................................................ 2-66 Manufacturer Accessories and Pricing .............................................................................................. 2-66 Arranging Manufacturer Accessories.................................................................................... 2-67 Creating Accessory Categories ............................................................................................ 2-67 Organizing Manufacturer Accessories Using Categories..................................................... 2-68 Copying Manufacturer Accessory Line Names .................................................................... 2-68 Entering Manufacturer Accessory Pricing............................................................................. 2-69 Copying Manufacturer Accessory Prices.............................................................................. 2-69 Setting Filters ........................................................................................................................ 2-70 Deleting Manufacturer Accessories ...................................................................................... 2-70 Generic Accessories and Pricing ....................................................................................................... 2-71 Arranging Generic Accessories ............................................................................................ 2-71 Creating Generic Accessory Categories............................................................................... 2-72 Organizing Generic Accessories Using Categories.............................................................. 2-72 Setting Filters ........................................................................................................................ 2-73 Deleting Generic Accessories............................................................................................... 2-73 Modifications and Pricing ................................................................................................................... 2-74 Arranging Modifications ........................................................................................................ 2-75 Creating Modification Categories.......................................................................................... 2-75 Organizing Modification Using Categories............................................................................ 2-76 Copying Modification Line Names ........................................................................................ 2-76 Entering Modification Pricing ................................................................................................ 2-77 Copying Modification Prices.................................................................................................. 2-77 Setting Filters ........................................................................................................................ 2-78 Deleting Modifications........................................................................................................... 2-78 Fillers and Pricing............................................................................................................................... 2-79 Copying Filler Line Names.................................................................................................... 2-79 Entering Filler Prices ............................................................................................................. 2-80 Copying Filler Prices ............................................................................................................. 2-80 Deleting Fillers ...................................................................................................................... 2-81 Proposal Wording............................................................................................................................... 2-82 Creating User Graphic Files............................................................................................................... 2-82 Modifying User Graphic Files............................................................................................................. 2-83 Copying User Graphic Files ............................................................................................................... 2-83 Deleting User Graphic Files ............................................................................................................... 2-83 Molding Graphics ............................................................................................................................... 2-84 Molding Profile Example ....................................................................................................... 2-85 Flooring Graphics............................................................................................................................... 2-86 Windows Graphics ............................................................................................................................. 2-87 Entrance Door Graphics .................................................................................................................... 2-87 Color Graphics ................................................................................................................................... 2-88 Changing the Custom Palette ............................................................................................... 2-88 Changing Printer Line Weights ............................................................................................. 2-88 Changing Wood Grain Colors ............................................................................................... 2-89 3D Object Graphics............................................................................................................................ 2-90 Changing a 3D Object’s Graphics ........................................................................................ 2-90 User-Created 3D Objects...................................................................................................... 2-90 Importing 3D Objects ............................................................................................................ 2-91 Pull and Handle Graphics .................................................................................................................. 2-92 Wallpaper Graphics ........................................................................................................................... 2-92 Scanning Wallpaper.............................................................................................................. 2-92 Importing Wallpaper .............................................................................................................. 2-92 Mechanical Symbol Graphics ............................................................................................................ 2-93 Creating Mechanical Symbols .............................................................................................. 2-93 Customer Information......................................................................................................................... 2-94 Editing Customers................................................................................................................. 2-94 Deleting Customers .............................................................................................................. 2-94 Render Lighting.................................................................................................................................. 2-95 Modifying Render Lighting .................................................................................................... 2-95 Copying Render Lighting ...................................................................................................... 2-95 Deleting Render Lighting ...................................................................................................... 2-96 Render Textures ................................................................................................................................ 2-97 Entering Render Texture Categories .................................................................................... 2-97 Editing Render Texture Categories ...................................................................................... 2-97 Deleting Render Texture Categories .................................................................................... 2-97 Entering Render Textures..................................................................................................... 2-98 Editing Textures .................................................................................................................... 2-98 Changing Texture Categories ............................................................................................... 2-98 Deleting Textures .................................................................................................................. 2-99 Password ........................................................................................................................................... 2-100 Creating Password Protection .............................................................................................. 2-100 Changing the Password........................................................................................................ 2-100 Removing Password Protection............................................................................................ 2-100 Chapter 3 FEATURES Starting a New Room Design............................................................................................................. 3-1 Starting a Quick Job.............................................................................................................. 3-1 Entering Room Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 3-2 Changing Room Defaults...................................................................................................... 3-2 Entering Job Information .................................................................................................................... 3-3 Opening a Job and Room File ........................................................................................................... 3-3 Closing a Design ................................................................................................................................ 3-3 Saving a Design ................................................................................................................................. 3-4 Updating Saved Room Designs............................................................................................ 3-4 Saving an Existing Room Design to a New Room or Job .................................................... 3-4 Saving a Room Design to a Different Location..................................................................... 3-4 Job Copy ............................................................................................................................................ 3-5 Saving Cabinets to a Catalog ............................................................................................................ 3-5 Saving a Group of Cabinets to a Catalog ............................................................................. 3-5 Exporting Graphic Files...................................................................................................................... 3-6 Exporting a BMP File ............................................................................................................ 3-6 Exporting a 2D DXF File ....................................................................................................... 3-6 Exporting a 3D DXF File ....................................................................................................... 3-6 Exporting a VRML File .......................................................................................................... 3-6 Exporting a Slide Show File .................................................................................................. 3-7 Printing a Design................................................................................................................................ 3-7 Printing the Current View ...................................................................................................... 3-7 Printing Floor Plans and Elevations ...................................................................................... 3-7 Printing in Color..................................................................................................................... 3-8 Printing to Fit ......................................................................................................................... 3-8 Printing to Scale .................................................................................................................... 3-8 Printing to Window ................................................................................................................ 3-8 Selecting Printers or Output Devices ................................................................................................. 3-9 Emailing Room Images ...................................................................................................................... 3-9 Emailing the Current View .................................................................................................... 3-9 Printing Floor Plans and Elevations ...................................................................................... 3-9 Backing Up Information...................................................................................................................... 3-10 Backing Program Data to a Local Drive................................................................................ 3-10 Backing Program Data to a Server ....................................................................................... 3-11 Using Auto Backup ............................................................................................................... 3-11 Systems Restore Files ....................................................................................................................... 3-12 Rolling Back Program Files................................................................................................... 3-14 Deleting Backup Files ........................................................................................................... 3-14 Deleting Files ..................................................................................................................................... 3-15 Deleting Jobs ........................................................................................................................ 3-15 Deleting Rooms..................................................................................................................... 3-15 Deleting Cabinets from a Catalog ......................................................................................... 3-15 Deleting Saved Graphics ...................................................................................................... 3-16 Deleting Saved CAD Text ..................................................................................................... 3-16 Job Packages..................................................................................................................................... 3-16 Creating a Job Package........................................................................................................ 3-16 Restoring a Job Package...................................................................................................... 3-16 Emailing a Job.................................................................................................................................... 3-17 Emailing Job Files ................................................................................................................. 3-17 Emailing Job and Parameters Files ...................................................................................... 3-18 Catalog Check.................................................................................................................................... 3-18 Exiting the Program............................................................................................................................ 3-18 Viewing a Floor Plan .......................................................................................................................... 3-19 Viewing an Elevation.......................................................................................................................... 3-19 Viewing an Elevation............................................................................................................. 3-19 Viewing Elevation to Elevation.............................................................................................. 3-19 Viewing a Cabinet .............................................................................................................................. 3-19 Viewing a Bird’s Eye View ................................................................................................................. 3-19 Rendering a View............................................................................................................................... 3-20 Viewing Counter Tops........................................................................................................................ 3-21 Viewing Counter Tops by Layers .......................................................................................... 3-21 Entering Counter Tops ....................................................................................................................... 3-21 Adding a Rectangle Counter Top ......................................................................................... 3-21 Adding a Round Counter Top ............................................................................................... 3-21 Adding a Polygon Counter Top............................................................................................. 3-22 Modifying Counter Tops ..................................................................................................................... 3-22 Changing Counter Top Types............................................................................................... 3-22 Changing Counter Top Render Textures.............................................................................. 3-23 Changing Counter Top Heights ............................................................................................ 3-23 Modifying Counter Top Edges .............................................................................................. 3-23 Modifying Counter Top Corners............................................................................................ 3-23 Adding End Splashes............................................................................................................ 3-24 Adding End Caps .................................................................................................................. 3-24 Adding Break Points ............................................................................................................. 3-24 Adding Perpendicular Construction Joints To Counter Tops ............................................... 3-25 Adding Construction Joints Using Break Points ................................................................... 3-26 Adding a Mason Miter Construction Joint ............................................................................. 3-28 Breaking Counter Tops ......................................................................................................... 3-29 Counter Top Pricing Preview & Overrides ......................................................................................... 3-30 Pricing Preview ..................................................................................................................... 3-30 Pricing Overrides................................................................................................................... 3-31 Sizing Counter Tops........................................................................................................................... 3-32 Moving Counter Tops......................................................................................................................... 3-32 Deleting Counter Tops ....................................................................................................................... 3-32 Viewing Saved Images....................................................................................................................... 3-33 Viewing Saved Render Images.......................................................................................................... 3-33 Cut .............................................................................................................................................. 3-33 Copy .............................................................................................................................................. 3-33 Paste .............................................................................................................................................. 3-34 Undo .............................................................................................................................................. 3-34 Regenerating a View.......................................................................................................................... 3-34 Zooming In a View ............................................................................................................................. 3-34 Zooming in a View with a Window ........................................................................................ 3-34 Zooming Out a View........................................................................................................................... 3-35 Real Zoom.......................................................................................................................................... 3-35 Zooming in ............................................................................................................................ 3-35 Zooming out .......................................................................................................................... 3-35 Rotate View........................................................................................................................................ 3-35 Pan View ............................................................................................................................................ 3-36 Moldings ............................................................................................................................................. 3-36 Picking Moldings for Upper Cabinets.................................................................................... 3-36 Picking Moldings for Placement on Cabinets ....................................................................... 3-37 Picking Moldings for Placement on Walls............................................................................. 3-37 Picking Moldings to Fill on Walls........................................................................................... 3-38 Modifying Moldings ............................................................................................................................ 3-38 Moving Moldings ................................................................................................................................ 3-38 Deleting Moldings............................................................................................................................... 3-39 Deleting Upper Cabinet Moldings ......................................................................................... 3-39 Deleting Cabinet and Wall Moldings..................................................................................... 3-39 Flooring .............................................................................................................................................. 3-39 Deleting Flooring ................................................................................................................... 3-39 Picking Colors .................................................................................................................................... 3-40 Picking Grain...................................................................................................................................... 3-40 3D Objects ......................................................................................................................................... 3-40 Modifying 3D Objects ............................................................................................................ 3-40 Moving 3D Objects................................................................................................................ 3-41 Deleting 3D Objects .............................................................................................................. 3-41 Pulls and Handles .............................................................................................................................. 3-41 Deleting Pulls and Handles................................................................................................... 3-41 Wallpaper ........................................................................................................................................... 3-42 Deleting Wallpaper................................................................................................................ 3-42 Pick Render Lighting .......................................................................................................................... 3-43 Modifying Render Lighting ................................................................................................................. 3-43 Moving Render Lighting ..................................................................................................................... 3-43 Delete Render Lighting ...................................................................................................................... 3-44 Pick Render Textures ........................................................................................................................ 3-44 Picking Material Textures for Room Rendering .................................................................... 3-44 Picking Appliance Textures for Rendering............................................................................ 3-44 Picking Appliance Front Textures for Room Rendering ....................................................... 3-45 Display Options .................................................................................................................................. 3-46 Counter Top Display Options................................................................................................ 3-46 Floating Toolbars ............................................................................................................................... 3-46 Displaying Floating Toolbars................................................................................................. 3-46 Closing Floating Toolbars ..................................................................................................... 3-46 Moving Floating Toolbars...................................................................................................... 3-46 Resizable Toolbars ............................................................................................................... 3-47 Docking Toolbars .................................................................................................................. 3-47 Creating Custom Toolbars .................................................................................................... 3-47 Displaying Grids ................................................................................................................................. 3-49 Removing a Grid ................................................................................................................... 3-49 Changing the Grids Origin .................................................................................................... 3-49 Entering Walls .................................................................................................................................... 3-50 Entering Exterior Walls ......................................................................................................... 3-50 Entering Interior Walls........................................................................................................... 3-50 Entering Island Walls ............................................................................................................ 3-50 Entering Peninsula Walls ...................................................................................................... 3-51 Entering Free Form Walls ..................................................................................................... 3-51 Angle Walls ........................................................................................................................................ 3-53 Wall Layout Method .............................................................................................................. 3-53 Angle Command Method ...................................................................................................... 3-53 Angle Calculator Method....................................................................................................... 3-53 Radius Walls ...................................................................................................................................... 3-54 Angle/Radius Method............................................................................................................ 3-54 Cord Method ......................................................................................................................... 3-54 Modifying Walls .................................................................................................................................. 3-55 Sizing Walls........................................................................................................................... 3-55 Moving Walls......................................................................................................................... 3-55 Deleting Walls ....................................................................................................................... 3-55 Entering Entrance Doors.................................................................................................................... 3-56 Entering Entrance Doors in Succession ............................................................................... 3-56 Entering Entrance Doors into Walls...................................................................................... 3-56 Modifying Entrance Doors.................................................................................................................. 3-57 Sizing Doors.......................................................................................................................... 3-57 Moving Doors ........................................................................................................................ 3-57 Deleting Doors ...................................................................................................................... 3-57 Entering Windows .............................................................................................................................. 3-58 Entering Windows in Succession.......................................................................................... 3-58 Entering Windows into Walls ................................................................................................ 3-58 Modifying Windows ............................................................................................................................ 3-59 Sizing Windows..................................................................................................................... 3-59 Moving Windows ................................................................................................................... 3-59 Deleting Windows ................................................................................................................. 3-59 Wall Preferences................................................................................................................................ 3-60 Automatic Wall Snapping ................................................................................................................... 3-60 Wall Snapping .................................................................................................................................... 3-60 Entering Appliances ........................................................................................................................... 3-61 Placing Appliances from a Catalog ....................................................................................... 3-61 Bumping Appliances to the Right from a Catalog ................................................................. 3-61 Bumping Appliances to the Left from a Catalog ................................................................... 3-61 Entering Custom Appliances................................................................................................. 3-62 Entering Appliances with a Finished Back............................................................................ 3-62 Entering Cabinet Catalog Appliances ................................................................................... 3-62 Modifying Appliances ......................................................................................................................... 3-63 Moving Appliances ................................................................................................................ 3-63 Deleting Appliances .............................................................................................................. 3-63 Appliance Graphics ............................................................................................................................ 3-63 Entering Custom Cabinets ................................................................................................................. 3-64 Placing Custom Cabinets...................................................................................................... 3-64 Bumping Custom Cabinets to the Right................................................................................ 3-64 Bumping Custom Cabinets to the Left .................................................................................. 3-64 Filling Custom Cabinets ........................................................................................................ 3-65 Entering Catalog Cabinets ................................................................................................................. 3-65 Placing Cabinets from the Catalog ....................................................................................... 3-65 Bumping Catalog Cabinets to the Right................................................................................ 3-65 Bumping Catalog Cabinets to the Left .................................................................................. 3-66 Filling Cabinets from the Catalog.......................................................................................... 3-66 Entering Quick Job Cabinets ............................................................................................................. 3-67 Entering Custom Cabinets .................................................................................................... 3-67 Entering Catalog Cabinets .................................................................................................... 3-67 Entering Base Cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 3-67 Placing Custom Base Cabinets ............................................................................................ 3-67 Bumping Custom Base Cabinets .......................................................................................... 3-68 Filling Custom Base Cabinets............................................................................................... 3-68 Placing Base Cabinets from the Catalog .............................................................................. 3-68 Bumping Base Cabinets from the Catalog............................................................................ 3-69 Filling Base Cabinets from the Catalog ................................................................................ 3-69 Entering Upper Cabinets.................................................................................................................... 3-70 Placing Custom Upper Cabinets........................................................................................... 3-70 Bumping Custom Upper Cabinets ........................................................................................ 3-70 Filling Custom Upper Cabinets ............................................................................................. 3-70 Placing Upper Cabinets from the Catalog ............................................................................ 3-71 Bumping Upper Cabinets from the Catalog .......................................................................... 3-71 Filling Upper Cabinets from the Catalog............................................................................... 3-72 Entering Pantry Cabinets ................................................................................................................... 3-72 Placing Custom Pantry Cabinets .......................................................................................... 3-72 Bumping Custom Pantry Cabinets........................................................................................ 3-73 Filling Custom Pantry Cabinets............................................................................................. 3-73 Placing Pantry Cabinets from the Catalog............................................................................ 3-73 Bumping Pantry Cabinets from the Catalog ......................................................................... 3-74 Filling Pantry Cabinets from the Catalog .............................................................................. 3-74 Entering Special Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 3-75 Placing Custom Special Cabinets......................................................................................... 3-75 Bumping Custom Special Cabinets ...................................................................................... 3-75 Filling Custom Special Cabinets ........................................................................................... 3-76 Placing Special Cabinets from the Catalog .......................................................................... 3-76 Bumping Special Cabinets from the Catalog ........................................................................ 3-77 Entering Fillers ................................................................................................................................... 3-77 Placing Base or Upper Fillers ............................................................................................... 3-77 Bumping Base or Upper Filers.............................................................................................. 3-78 Filling Base or Upper Fillers.................................................................................................. 3-78 Placing Special Fillers........................................................................................................... 3-78 Bumping Special Fillers ........................................................................................................ 3-79 Filling Special Fillers ............................................................................................................. 3-79 Placing Corner Fillers............................................................................................................ 3-79 Diagonal Corner Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 3-80 Placing Custom Diagonal Corner Cabinets .......................................................................... 3-80 Placing Diagonal Corner Cabinets from the Catalog............................................................ 3-80 Entering End Cabinets ....................................................................................................................... 3-81 Placing Base End Cabinets .................................................................................................. 3-81 Bumping Base End Cabinets ................................................................................................ 3-81 Placing Upper End Cabinets................................................................................................. 3-81 Bumping Upper End Cabinets .............................................................................................. 3-81 Placing Special End Cabinets............................................................................................... 3-81 Bumping Special End Cabinets ............................................................................................ 3-81 Entering Lazy Susan Cabinets........................................................................................................... 3-82 Placing Custom Lazy Susan Cabinets.................................................................................. 3-82 Placing Lazy Susan Cabinets from the Catalog ................................................................... 3-82 Entering L-Shape Cabinets................................................................................................................ 3-82 Placing Custom L-Shape Cabinets....................................................................................... 3-82 Placing L-Shape Cabinets from the Catalog......................................................................... 3-83 Entering Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets ........................................................................................... 3-83 Placing Custom Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets .................................................................. 3-83 Placing Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets from the Catalog.................................................... 3-83 Entering Split-Level Cabinets............................................................................................................. 3-84 Placing Custom Split-Level Cabinets.................................................................................... 3-84 Bumping Custom Split-Level Cabinets ................................................................................. 3-84 Filling Custom Split-Level Cabinets ...................................................................................... 3-84 Placing Split-Level Cabinets from the Catalog ..................................................................... 3-85 Bumping Split-Level Cabinets from the Catalog ................................................................... 3-85 Filling Split-Level Cabinets from the Catalog........................................................................ 3-86 Entering Wainscot Paneling............................................................................................................... 3-86 Placing Base or Upper Wainscot Panels .............................................................................. 3-87 Filling Base or Upper Wainscot Panels ................................................................................ 3-87 Placing Special Wainscot Paneling ...................................................................................... 3-87 Filling Special Wainscot Paneling ......................................................................................... 3-87 Entering Closet Vertical Panels ......................................................................................................... 3-88 Placing Custom Closet Vertical Panels ................................................................................ 3-88 Placing Closet Vertical Panels from the Catalog .................................................................. 3-88 Entering Closet Shelves..................................................................................................................... 3-89 Placing Custom Closet Shelves............................................................................................ 3-89 Bumping Custom Closet Shelves ......................................................................................... 3-89 Filling Custom Closet Shelves .............................................................................................. 3-90 Placing Closet Shelves from the Catalog ............................................................................. 3-90 Bumping Closet Shelves from the Catalog ........................................................................... 3-91 Entering Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves ......................................................................................... 3-91 Placing Custom Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves ................................................................ 3-91 Placing Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves from the Catalog .................................................. 3-92 Entering Closet L-shape Corner Shelves .......................................................................................... 3-92 Placing Custom Closet L-shape Corner Shelves ................................................................. 3-92 Placing Closet L-shape Corner Shelves from the Catalog ................................................... 3-92 Entering Closet Units ......................................................................................................................... 3-93 Placing Custom Closet Units ................................................................................................ 3-93 Bumping Custom Closet Units .............................................................................................. 3-93 Filling Custom Closet Units................................................................................................... 3-94 Placing Closet Units from the Catalog .................................................................................. 3-94 Bumping Closet Units from the Catalog................................................................................ 3-95 Entering Closet Doors ........................................................................................................................ 3-95 Filling Custom Closet Doors ................................................................................................. 3-95 Placing Custom Closet Doors ............................................................................................... 3-96 Placing Closet Doors from the Catalog................................................................................. 3-96 Entering Closet Drawers .................................................................................................................... 3-97 Filling Custom Closet Drawers.............................................................................................. 3-97 Placing Custom Closet Drawers ........................................................................................... 3-97 Placing Closet Drawers from the Catalog............................................................................. 3-98 Entering Closet Rods ......................................................................................................................... 3-98 Placing Custom Closet Rods ................................................................................................ 3-98 Bumping Custom Closet Rods.............................................................................................. 3-99 Filling Custom Closet Rods................................................................................................... 3-99 Placing Closet Rods from the Catalog.................................................................................. 3-99 Bumping Closet Rods from the Catalog ............................................................................... 3-100 Face Frame Only Cabinet.................................................................................................................. 3-100 Placing Face Frame Only (Frame Only) ............................................................................... 3-100 Valances ............................................................................................................................................ 3-101 Placing Custom Valances ..................................................................................................... 3-101 Bumping Custom Valances................................................................................................... 3-101 Filling Custom Valances ....................................................................................................... 3-102 Placing Valances from the Catalog....................................................................................... 3-102 Bumping Valances from the Catalog .................................................................................... 3-103 Entering Island Cabinets.................................................................................................................... 3-104 Placing Island Cabinets ........................................................................................................ 3-104 Filling Island Cabinets........................................................................................................... 3-104 Placing Island Cabinets from the Catalog............................................................................. 3-104 Filling Island Cabinets from the Catalog ............................................................................... 3-105 Entering Peninsula Cabinets.............................................................................................................. 3-105 Placing Peninsula Cabinets .................................................................................................. 3-105 Filling Peninsula Cabinets..................................................................................................... 3-105 Placing Peninsula Cabinets from the Catalog ...................................................................... 3-106 Filling Peninsula Cabinets from the Catalog......................................................................... 3-106 Entering Rotated Cabinets................................................................................................................. 3-107 Entering Angle Wall Cabinets ............................................................................................................ 3-107 Deleting Cabinets............................................................................................................................... 3-107 Cabinet Graphics ............................................................................................................................... 3-108 Entering Lines .................................................................................................................................... 3-109 Modifying Lines .................................................................................................................................. 3-109 Entering Parallel Lines ....................................................................................................................... 3-109 Entering Polylines .............................................................................................................................. 3-110 Entering Squares ............................................................................................................................... 3-111 Entering Rectangles........................................................................................................................... 3-111 Entering Polygons .............................................................................................................................. 3-112 Drawing Hatched Filled Polygon........................................................................................... 3-112 Entering Circles.................................................................................................................................. 3-113 Entering Curves ................................................................................................................................. 3-113 Drawing Arcs......................................................................................................................... 3-113 Drawing Curves..................................................................................................................... 3-113 Drawing S Curves ................................................................................................................. 3-114 Modifying Curves ............................................................................................................................... 3-114 Reversing Curves ................................................................................................................. 3-114 Shaping Curves..................................................................................................................... 3-114 Entering Text...................................................................................................................................... 3-115 Modifying Text.................................................................................................................................... 3-115 Moving Text........................................................................................................................... 3-115 Sizing Text ............................................................................................................................ 3-116 Deleting Text ......................................................................................................................... 3-116 Saving Text ........................................................................................................................................ 3-116 Retrieving Text ................................................................................................................................... 3-116 Erasing CAD ...................................................................................................................................... 3-117 Erasing CAD Lines................................................................................................................ 3-117 Erasing Any Lines ................................................................................................................. 3-117 Selecting CAD Lines to Delete.............................................................................................. 3-117 Entering Callouts................................................................................................................................ 3-118 Entering Dimensions .......................................................................................................................... 3-118 Modifying Dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 3-118 Deleting Dimensions .......................................................................................................................... 3-119 Entering Mechanical Symbols............................................................................................................ 3-119 Wiring Mechanical Symbols............................................................................................................... 3-119 Modifying Mechanical Symbols.......................................................................................................... 3-120 Moving Mechanical Symbols ................................................................................................ 3-120 Deleting Mechanical Symbols............................................................................................... 3-120 DXF Importing .................................................................................................................................... 3-120 CAD Preferences ............................................................................................................................... 3-120 Cursor Control.................................................................................................................................... 3-121 Origin .............................................................................................................................................. 3-121 Setting an Origin ................................................................................................................... 3-121 Unsetting an Origin ............................................................................................................... 3-121 Snapping ............................................................................................................................................ 3-122 Manual Snap ......................................................................................................................... 3-122 Nearest Snap Mode .............................................................................................................. 3-122 Endpoint Snap Mode ............................................................................................................ 3-123 Midpoint Snap Mode ............................................................................................................. 3-123 Intersection Snap Mode ........................................................................................................ 3-124 Modifying Cabinets............................................................................................................................. 3-125 Sizing Cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 3-125 Moving Cabinets ................................................................................................................... 3-125 Adding Cabinets.................................................................................................................... 3-126 Deleting Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 3-126 Modifying Quick Job Cabinets ........................................................................................................... 3-126 Modifying from the List .......................................................................................................... 3-126 Modifying from a Cabinet View ............................................................................................. 3-127 Deleting Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 3-127 Modifying Cabinet Sections ............................................................................................................... 3-127 Adding Vertical Cabinet Sections.......................................................................................... 3-127 Adding Horizontal Cabinet Sections ..................................................................................... 3-128 Deleting Cabinet Sections..................................................................................................... 3-128 Modifying Quick Job Sections............................................................................................................ 3-128 Modifying Section Ends and Backs.................................................................................................... 3-128 Creating Section Ends .......................................................................................................... 3-128 Creating Section Backs......................................................................................................... 3-129 Modifying Section Ends and Backs ...................................................................................... 3-129 Modifying Paneled Ends and Backs .................................................................................................. 3-129 Creating Paneled Ends ......................................................................................................... 3-129 Creating Paneled Backs ....................................................................................................... 3-129 Modifying Paneled Ends and Backs ..................................................................................... 3-130 Adding Additional Vertical Panels ......................................................................................... 3-130 Adding Additional Horizontal Panels..................................................................................... 3-130 Modifying Wainscot Paneling............................................................................................................. 3-130 Sizing Wainscot Paneling ..................................................................................................... 3-131 Moving Wainscot Paneling.................................................................................................... 3-131 Deleting Wainscot Paneling .................................................................................................. 3-131 Modifying Wainscot Sub Panels ........................................................................................................ 3-132 Adding Vertical Wainscot Sub Panels .................................................................................. 3-132 Adding Horizontal Wainscot Sub Panels .............................................................................. 3-132 Deleting Wainscot Sub Panels.............................................................................................. 3-132 Entering Partitions and Dividers......................................................................................................... 3-133 Adding Partitions ................................................................................................................... 3-133 Adding Dividers ..................................................................................................................... 3-133 Adding Shelves ..................................................................................................................... 3-133 Adding Pull-outs .................................................................................................................... 3-133 Modifying Partitions and Dividers....................................................................................................... 3-134 Moving Partitions and Dividers ............................................................................................. 3-134 Deleting Partitions and Dividers............................................................................................ 3-134 Cabinet Breaking................................................................................................................................ 3-135 Cabinet Breaking at Mullion .................................................................................................. 3-135 Cabinet Stretching.............................................................................................................................. 3-135 Stretching Cabinets Using the Mouse .................................................................................. 3-135 Stretching Cabinets Using Edit Boxes .................................................................................. 3-136 Cabinet Tilt Section ............................................................................................................................ 3-136 Accessories........................................................................................................................................ 3-137 Entering Cabinet Accessories............................................................................................... 3-137 Entering Room Accessories.................................................................................................. 3-137 Entering Modification Charges.............................................................................................. 3-137 Editing Accessories and Modification Charges .................................................................... 3-138 Deleting Accessories and Modification Charges .................................................................. 3-138 Modifying Cabinet Names.................................................................................................................. 3-138 Moving Cabinet Names...................................................................................................................... 3-138 Proposals ........................................................................................................................................... 3-139 Printing Proposals ................................................................................................................. 3-139 Viewing Proposals ................................................................................................................ 3-139 Sending Proposals to File ..................................................................................................... 3-140 Quotes .............................................................................................................................................. 3-140 Printing Quotes ..................................................................................................................... 3-140 Viewing Quotes ..................................................................................................................... 3-141 Sending Quotes to File ......................................................................................................... 3-141 Order Forms....................................................................................................................................... 3-142 Printing Order Forms ............................................................................................................ 3-142 Viewing Order Forms ............................................................................................................ 3-142 Sending Order Forms to File................................................................................................. 3-143 Multi-draw........................................................................................................................................... 3-144 Sending Views to Multi-draw................................................................................................. 3-144 Viewing Multi-draw Pages..................................................................................................... 3-144 Viewing from Page to Page .................................................................................................. 3-145 Sizing Multi-draw Views ........................................................................................................ 3-145 Scaling Multi-draw Views ...................................................................................................... 3-145 Moving Multi-draw Views ...................................................................................................... 3-145 Moving Multi-draw Views to Another Page ........................................................................... 3-146 Deleting Multi-draw Views..................................................................................................... 3-146 Deleting Multi-draw Pages .................................................................................................... 3-146 Maximizing Multi-draw Views................................................................................................ 3-146 Minimizing Multi-draw Views................................................................................................. 3-146 Breaking Multi-draw Views.................................................................................................... 3-147 Removing a Break from a Multi-draw View........................................................................... 3-147 Picking Door/Drawer Details ................................................................................................. 3-147 Picking Molding Details......................................................................................................... 3-147 Entering a Multi-draw Title Block .......................................................................................... 3-148 Closing Multi-draw ................................................................................................................ 3-148 Walk Thrus ......................................................................................................................................... 3-149 Creating a Walk Thru ............................................................................................................ 3-149 Viewing a Walk Thru ............................................................................................................. 3-150 Viewing a Slide Show......................................................................................................................... 3-150 Metric/Inch Layout.............................................................................................................................. 3-151 Metric Layout......................................................................................................................... 3-151 Inch Layout............................................................................................................................ 3-151 Electronic Tape Measure ................................................................................................................... 3-151 Tiling Windows ................................................................................................................................... 3-151 Cascading Windows .......................................................................................................................... 3-151 Arranging Icons .................................................................................................................................. 3-152 Opening New Windows...................................................................................................................... 3-152 Minimizing All Windows ..................................................................................................................... 3-152 Switching to a Different Open Window .............................................................................................. 3-152 Fit Views to Windows ......................................................................................................................... 3-152 Online Help ........................................................................................................................................ 3-153 Chapter 4 TUTORIAL Welcome to the Designer Tutorial...................................................................................................... 4-1 Loading the Sample Catalog.............................................................................................................. 4-1 Starting a New Room ......................................................................................................................... 4-2 Creating Exterior Walls ...................................................................................................................... 4-2 Adding Windows ................................................................................................................................ 4-3 Adding Doors ..................................................................................................................................... 4-3 Creating Peninsula Walls................................................................................................................... 4-4 Moving Peninsula Walls ..................................................................................................................... 4-5 Entering Cooktop Cabinets ................................................................................................................ 4-5 Entering Appliances ........................................................................................................................... 4-6 Entering a Refrigerator.......................................................................................................... 4-6 Entering a Dishwasher.......................................................................................................... 4-6 Entering a Hood .................................................................................................................... 4-6 Entering Rotated Sink Cabinets......................................................................................................... 4-7 Entering Peninsula Cabinets.............................................................................................................. 4-8 Entering Pantry/Special Cabinets ...................................................................................................... 4-9 Fast-Filling Base Cabinets ................................................................................................................. 4-10 Entering Base Fillers .......................................................................................................................... 4-10 Placing Upper Cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 4-11 Filling Upper Cabinets........................................................................................................................ 4-13 Saving a Room................................................................................................................................... 4-14 Deleting Cabinets............................................................................................................................... 4-14 Placing Custom Cabinets................................................................................................................... 4-14 Filling Custom Cabinets ..................................................................................................................... 4-15 Modifying Cabinets............................................................................................................................. 4-15 Modifying Cabinet Sections ............................................................................................................... 4-16 Adding Horizontal Sections................................................................................................................ 4-17 Modifying Section Heights and Adding Roll-outs............................................................................... 4-17 Modifying Section Heights .................................................................................................... 4-17 Adding Roll-outs.................................................................................................................... 4-17 Modifying Base Cabinets to Desks .................................................................................................... 4-17 Adding Horizontal Sections and Preparing for Pigeon Holes ............................................................ 4-18 Adding Vertical Dividers as Pigeon Holes ......................................................................................... 4-19 Adding Valances ................................................................................................................................ 4-19 Adding Decorations to a Cabinet ....................................................................................................... 4-20 Viewing and Modifying Counters ....................................................................................................... 4-21 Viewing Counter Tops........................................................................................................... 4-21 Viewing Counter Tops by Layers .......................................................................................... 4-21 Modifying Counter Tops........................................................................................................ 4-22 Steps for Modifying Countertops........................................................................................... 4-22 Selecting Molding, Flooring, and Wallpaper ...................................................................................... 4-23 Selecting Molding.................................................................................................................. 4-23 Selecting Flooring ................................................................................................................. 4-23 Selecting Wallpaper .............................................................................................................. 4-23 Selecting 3D Objects.......................................................................................................................... 4-24 Seeing Your Designs From Different Viewpoints............................................................................... 4-25 Floor Plan View ..................................................................................................................... 4-25 Elevation View....................................................................................................................... 4-25 Perspective View................................................................................................................... 4-25 Selecting a Perspective View................................................................................................ 4-25 Bird’s Eye View ..................................................................................................................... 4-27 Selecting a Bird’s Eye View .................................................................................................. 4-27 Render View.......................................................................................................................... 4-28 Selecting a Render View....................................................................................................... 4-28 Cabinet View ......................................................................................................................... 4-30 Counter Tops View ............................................................................................................... 4-31 Introduction to Rendering................................................................................................................... 4-32 Opening the Tutorial Kitchen ............................................................................................................. 4-32 Creating a Scenic Backdrop .............................................................................................................. 4-32 Making Windows Transparent ........................................................................................................... 4-33 Assigning Textures for Rendering...................................................................................................... 4-33 What are Textures? .............................................................................................................. 4-33 Setting Job Render Textures ................................................................................................ 4-34 Setting Wood Grain Textures................................................................................................ 4-34 Setting Ceiling Textures........................................................................................................ 4-34 Setting Counter Top Textures............................................................................................... 4-34 Setting Floor Textures........................................................................................................... 4-34 Setting Walls Textures .......................................................................................................... 4-34 Assigning Appliance Textures............................................................................................................ 4-35 Setting Appliance Textures ................................................................................................... 4-35 Creating a Light Source ..................................................................................................................... 4-36 Steps to Creating Light Sources ........................................................................................... 4-36 Placing a “Point” Light Source ........................................................................................................... 4-37 Opening the Tutorial Kitchen ................................................................................................ 4-37 Steps to Placing Lighting Sources ........................................................................................ 4-37 Placing a “Spot” Light Source ............................................................................................................ 4-38 Steps to Placing a Spot Light................................................................................................ 4-38 Rendering the View............................................................................................................................ 4-38 The Initial Rendering ............................................................................................................. 4-38 Modifying Lighting Sources................................................................................................................ 4-39 Steps to Modifying Lighting Sources .................................................................................... 4-39 Rendering with Textures & Smooth Lines ......................................................................................... 4-39 Rendering with Textures ....................................................................................................... 4-39 Rendering without “Jaggies” ................................................................................................. 4-39 Rendering with the Wireframe View................................................................................................... 4-40 Rendering a Wireframe View ................................................................................................ 4-40 Let’s Render a Wireframe View ............................................................................................ 4-40 Printing a Rendered View .................................................................................................................. 4-41 Render the Room Again ....................................................................................................... 4-41 Printing the Finished View .................................................................................................... 4-41 Chapter 5 CABINET CATALOGS Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 5-1 Loading a Manufacturer’s Catalog ..................................................................................................... 5-1 Manufacturer Setup............................................................................................................................ 5-2 Entering a New Manufacturer ............................................................................................... 5-2 Creating a Cabinet Line ........................................................................................................ 5-3 Creating a Counter Top Parameter File................................................................................ 5-3 Creating Layout Parameter Files .......................................................................................... 5-4 Creating a Cabinet Parameter File ....................................................................................... 5-4 Creating Door Styles ............................................................................................................. 5-5 Designing and Saving Cabinets to a Catalog .................................................................................... 5-6 Cabinet Organization ............................................................................................................ 5-6 Opening a Room ................................................................................................................... 5-7 Entering an Exterior Wall ...................................................................................................... 5-8 Designing Upper Cabinets .................................................................................................... 5-9 Modifying Upper Cabinets..................................................................................................... 5-11 Saving a Cabinet to the Catalog ........................................................................................... 5-11 Saving a Group of Cabinets to a Catalog ............................................................................. 5-12 Changing Upper Cabinet Heights ......................................................................................... 5-12 Designing and Saving Base Cabinets .................................................................................. 5-13 Modifying Base Cabinets ...................................................................................................... 5-13 Designing and Saving Special Cabinets............................................................................... 5-14 Modifying Special Cabinets................................................................................................... 5-14 Designing And Saving Corner Cabinets ............................................................................... 5-15 Designing and Saving Double-Entry Island and Peninsula Cabinets................................... 5-15 Designing and Saving Fillers ................................................................................................ 5-16 Designing and Saving Split-Level Cabinets.......................................................................... 5-16 Designing and Saving Appliance Cabinets........................................................................... 5-17 Designing and Saving Return Cabinets................................................................................ 5-18 Designing and Saving Special End Cabinets ....................................................................... 5-18 Catalog Pricing Setup ........................................................................................................... 5-19 Entering Profit, Overhead, and Tax Percentages ................................................................. 5-20 Markups/Discounts ............................................................................................................... 5-21 Price Prompts........................................................................................................................ 5-22 Text Prompts......................................................................................................................... 5-23 Catalog Cabinet Line Names ................................................................................................ 5-24 Catalog Cabinet Pricing ........................................................................................................ 5-25 Entering Manufacturer Accessories...................................................................................... 5-26 Creating Accessory Categories ............................................................................................ 5-26 Organizing Manufacturer Accessories Using Categories..................................................... 5-27 Entering Manufacturer Accessory Pricing............................................................................. 5-27 Entering Modifications........................................................................................................... 5-28 Creating Modification Categories.......................................................................................... 5-29 Organizing Modifications using Categories .......................................................................... 5-29 Entering Modification Pricing ................................................................................................ 5-30 Entering Filler Sizes .............................................................................................................. 5-30 Entering Filler Prices ............................................................................................................. 5-31 Proposal Wording ................................................................................................................. 5-31 Backing up a Cabinet Catalog ........................................................................................................... 5-32 Chapter 6 APPENDIX Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 6-1 Program .INI File ................................................................................................................................ 6-8 Microsoft Access Database ............................................................................................................... 6-14 Common Questions ........................................................................................................................... 6-16 Why am I losing faces on my perspectives?......................................................................... 6-16 Why do I get General Protection Fault errors? ..................................................................... 6-16 Why is my mouse not working under Windows? .................................................................. 6-17 Why is my printer not printing? ............................................................................................. 6-17 Why is the printer only printing part of a page? .................................................................... 6-18 Why is the printer printing garbage?..................................................................................... 6-18 Why do I get Out of Memory messages? ............................................................................. 6-18 Why does my monitor flicker when I run Windows? ............................................................. 6-18 Why do my colors look strange?........................................................................................... 6-19 Troubleshooting Techniques.............................................................................................................. 6-20 Can you duplicate the problem? ........................................................................................... 6-20 Is the problem system specific?............................................................................................ 6-20 Is the problem file specific?................................................................................................... 6-20 Is the problem software specific? ......................................................................................... 6-21 Memory Problems ................................................................................................................. 6-21 Temporary Files .................................................................................................................... 6-21 Disabling TSRs and other Memory-Resident Programs....................................................... 6-21 Improving System Performance......................................................................................................... 6-22 Support Services................................................................................................................................ 6-23 Technical Support ................................................................................................................. 6-23 Before You Call ..................................................................................................................... 6-23 Fax Support........................................................................................................................... 6-23 Email Support........................................................................................................................ 6-24 Website Support.................................................................................................................... 6-24 Local Dealer Support ............................................................................................................ 6-24 Customer Service Support.................................................................................................... 6-24 Wish List............................................................................................................................................. 6-24 Worksheet for a Typical Drawer Bank ............................................................................................... 6-25 Preference and Parameter Worksheets ............................................................................................ 6-26 Preferences........................................................................................................................... 6-26 Counter Top Parameters ...................................................................................................... 6-29 Frame Layout Parameters .................................................................................................... 6-30 Frameless Layout Parameters.............................................................................................. 6-31 Frame Cabinet Parameters................................................................................................... 6-32 Frameless Cabinet Parameters ............................................................................................ 6-36 Door/Drawer/Parameters ...................................................................................................... 6-40 Appliance Parameters........................................................................................................... 6-42 Before You Install Before you install the Cabnetworks program, review the following to ensure the installation is successful. Security Key Your software security key comes in either a parallel or USB model. If a parallel port security key is being used, make sure that the security key is installed on the parallel port at the rear of the computer. The printer cable should be plugged into the parallel security key and the printer turned on before starting the software. The parallel port security key can be plugged into LPT1 or LPT2 on the computer. It should not be used in conjunction with any other security key. If a USB security key is being used, do not install it into a USB port until after you install the software. After the software is installed, the USB security key can be plugged into and USB port on your computer. Microsoft Windows Color and Resolution Settings Because of the demanding graphics capability of this program, it is recommended that you increase your Windows color and resolution settings to enjoy the full benefit of your software. 1. Select the Setting command from the Start button. 2. Select the Control Panel command from the Settings menu. 3. Double-click the Display icon. 4. Click the Settings tab. 5. Change the Color Palette option to a setting that is greater than 256-colors. The greater the color depth the better. 6. Change the Desktop Area option to a resolution setting of 1024 X 768 or better. 7. Select the OK button. The total number of colors and the quality of screen resolution that a computer can display is controlled by the amount of memory on the video card. If you find that the color and resolution selection is limited, you might want to increase the memory on the computer’s video card or purchase a better quality card. 1-1 Installing Cabnetware Programs The CD that makes up the Cabnetware Programs CD contains files for all Cabnetware programs. These files must be installed using the Setup program. Your Security Key controls access to the programs that you have purchased and are authorized to use. 1. Start Windows 98TM, Windows 2000TM, Windows XPTM, or Windows NTTM. 2. Insert your Cabnetware CD into the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 3. After closing your CD drive, wait a couple of minutes and your software should begin the installation automatically. 4. If the installation doesn’t begin automatically, select the Run command from the Start button. 5. In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or whatever drive letter is assigned to the CD-ROM drive). 6. Click on the OK button. 7. Follow the instructions on the Setup Wizard and select the Next button for each dialog screen. 8. The following dialog appears in the Setup Wizard: Warning: It is recommended that you use the default directory C:\PLANIT to install your new Windows program, unless a directory by that name is being used by another software program. 9. Verify the install drive and directory, or select a new drive and directory with the It is recommended that you use the default directory. 10. Select the Next button. 11. The following dialog will appear in the Installation Wizard: 1-2 button. 12. Scroll up and down the Component list and deselect the programs that you do not want installed or you have not purchased. 13. Select the Next button and continue to follow the instructions on the Installation Wizard until the installation is complete. 14. When the installation is complete, restart Windows. 1-3 Installing Cabnetware Tutorials A separate disk has been supplied with online tutorials for each of the Cabnetware programs. 15. Make sure the program has been installed on your computer and the program key is attached to your computer. 16. Start Windows 98TM, Windows 2000TM, Windows XPTM, or Windows NTTM. 17. Insert the Cabnetware Tutorials into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. 18. The installation should begin automatically. If the disk starts automatically, go to step 7. If it doesn’t, select the Run command from the Start button. 19. In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or the drive letter that is assigned to the CD-ROM drive on your computer). 20. Click on the OK button. 21. Follow the instructions on the Setup Wizard. 22. The following dialog appears in the Setup Wizard: 23. Deselect any program tutorials you think you will not need, as Cabnetware’s Tutorials use a large area of your hard drive. 24. Select the Next button and continue following the instructions on the Setup Wizard. 25. When the installation is complete, restart Windows. 1-4 Installing Render Textures A separate disk has been supplied with a collection of material textures for the photo-rendering features of the program. These materials samples include: Arborite® Avonite® Corian® Formica® Fountainhead® Nevamar® Pionite® Safas® Tarkett® Wilsonart® 1. Make sure the program has been installed on your computer and the program key is attached to your computer. 2. Start Windows 98TM, Windows 2000TM, Windows XPTM, or Windows NTTM. 3. Insert the Cabnetware Render Textures CD into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. 4. Select the Run command from the Start button. 5. In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or the drive letter that is assigned to the CD-ROM drive on your computer). 6. Click on the OK button. 7. Follow the instructions on the Setup Wizard. 8. Select a Custom install when prompted. 9. The following dialog appears in the Setup Wizard: 26. Deselect any textures you think you will not need, as Cabnetware’s Render Textures uses a large area of your hard drive. 27. Select the Next button and continue following the instructions on the Setup Wizard. 28. When the installation is complete, restart Windows. 1-5 Network Installation Network installation allows for the sharing of the program files, parameter files, and job files by more than one person on the network. Individual program keys must be located on each user’s workstations to access the program or a single network key with the required number of program licenses. To inquire about additional or network key prices and policies, you may call Cabnetware directly at (530) 666-6647. Installation of the program must be carried out by the network Supervisor or by a user who has the same access rights as a Supervisor and has knowledge of the network functions and configurations. The CD that makes up the Cabnetware programs contains compressed files. It must be installed using the Setup program. The following are the two methods of installing the program to a network: Sharing of Program, Job and Parameter Files This installation allows users on the network to access and run common program files and shared job and parameter files. All program files, job files, and parameter files are located on one network drive for common access. This installation is not recommended if you have a slow network server, or there are many users accessing the program at one time. Step #1 Install the program on the network. 1. Working from the file server or one of the network workstations, log on to the server using the Supervisor access rights. 2. Start Windows 98TM, Windows 2000TM, Windows XPTM, or Windows NTTM. 3. Insert your Cabnetware CD into the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 4. Select the Run command from the Start button. 5. In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or the drive letter that is assigned to the CD-ROM drive on your computer). 6. If the installation doesn’t begin automatically, select the Run command from the Start button. 7. In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or whatever drive letter is assigned to the CD-ROM drive). 8. Click on the OK button. 9. Follow the instructions on the Setup Wizard and select the Next button for each dialog screen. 10. The following dialog appears in the Setup Wizard: 1-6 11. Change the drive with the button to install on the desired network drive. 12. Select the Next button. 13. The following dialog will appear in the Installation Wizard: 14. Scroll up and down the Component list and deselect the programs that you do not want installed or you have not purchased. 15. Select the Next button and continue to follow the instructions on the Installation Wizard until the installation is complete. 16. When the installation is complete, restart Windows. 1-7 Step #2 Enter passwords to protect access to parameter and data settings by all users other than the network supervisor. 1. Start your Cabnetware program by double-clicking on the program icon. The main program window now appears on your screen. 2. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 3. Select the Password command from the Setup menu. 4. Select all check boxes for password protection. 5. Select the Password button. 6. Enter a password. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Verify the password by re-typing it. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Exit your Cabnetware program. Step #3 Create unique program .INI files for each user of the software. 1. From the DOS prompt, change to the network drive that contains the installed Cabnetware program. 2. Change directory to the CABWARE program directory (i.e.; CD\CABWARE). 3. Copy the DESIGN.INI file to new .INI files containing each user’s name (i.e.; COPY DESIGN.INI JAMES.INI). Continue this process for each user. A unique INI file must be created for each user. Step #4 Setting up the program icons on each user’s workstation. 1. Start Windows. 2. Press the Right mouse button on the Desktop. 3. Select the New command and the Shortcut command from the Pop Up menu. 4. Enter the program’s execution file name and the user’s unique INI file name in the Command Line field. (i.e.; F:\CABWARE\DESIGN.EXE JAMES.INI) 5. Select the Next button. 6. Enter “Cabnetware Designer Version” in the Select a name for the shortcut field. 7. Select the Finish button. At this stage, network installation is complete, and all computers connected to the network with a program security key can use the software. 1-8 Separate Program Installation with Shared Job and Parameter Files This is the recommended network installation for quick program performance on slower networks. The program files are installed and run on each user’s computer with job and data files being located on a network drive for sharing purposes. Step #1 Install the program on each network workstation. 1. Start Windows 98TM, Windows 2000TM, Windows XPTM, or Windows NTTM. 2. Insert your Cabnetware Programs CD into the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 3. Select the Run command from the Start button. 4. If the installation doesn’t begin automatically, select the Run command from the Start button. 5. In the Run dialog, type the following: D:\SETUP (or whatever drive letter is assigned to the CD-ROM drive). 6. Click on the OK button. 7. Follow the instructions on the Setup Wizard and select the Next button for each dialog screen. 8. The following dialog appears in the Setup Wizard: Warning: It is recommended that you use the default directory C:\PLANIT to install your new Windows program, unless a directory by that name is being used by another software program. 9. Verify the install drive and directory, or select a new drive and directory with the It is recommended that you use the default directory. 10. Select the Next button. 11. The following dialog will appear in the Installation Wizard: 1-9 button. 12. Scroll up and down the Component list and deselect the programs that you do not want installed or you have not purchased. 13. Select the Next button and continue to follow the instructions on the Installation Wizard until the installation is complete. 14. When the installation is complete, restart Windows. 15. Continue this install process for each user’s workstation. Step #2 Create a directory on a network drive to store shared job and parameter files. 1. Working from one of the network workstations, log onto the file server using Supervisor access rights. 2. Change to a shared network drive. 3. Create a CABWARE directory on the network drive (i.e.; MD CABWARE). 4. Change the directory to the CABWARE directory (i.e.; CD CABWARE). 5. Create a DESIGN directory within the CABWARE directory (i.e.; MD DESIGN). 6. Change the directory to the DESIGN directory (i.e.; CD DESIGN). 7. Create a JOBS directory within the CABWARE\DESIGN directory (i.e.; MD JOBS). 8. Create a PARMS directory within the CABWARE\DESIGN directory (i.e.; MD PARMS). 9. Create a LIBRARY directory within the CABWARE\DESIGN directory (i.e.; MD LIBRARY). 10. Create an APPL directory within the CABWARE\DESIGN directory (i.e.; MD APPL). 11. Copy a complete set of job files, parameter files, library files, and appliance files to the newly created network directories. 1-10 Step #3 Set program paths to access the shared data and parameters on each user’s workstation. 1. Start your Cabnetware program by double clicking on the program icon. The main program window now appears on your screen. 2. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 3. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu. 4. Select the Path tab from the Preferences dialog. 5. Select the Parameters button and change the path to your shared network parameter directory. 6. Select the Appliances button and change the path to your shared network appliance directory. 7. Select the Catalog button and change the path to your shared network catalog directory. 8. Select the Jobs button and change the path to your shared network jobs directory. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Exit the Cabnetware program. 11. Continue this process on each user’s workstation. Examples of the Designer Version Program Paths Parameters = F:\Cabware\Design\Parms Appliances = F:\Cabware\Design\Appl Catalogs = F:\Cabware\Design Jobs = F:\Cabware\Design\Jobs Step #4 Enter passwords on each user’s workstation to protect access to shared parameter and data file settings by all users other than the network supervisor. 1. Start your Cabnetware program by double clicking on the program icon. The main program window now appears on your screen. 2. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 3. Select the Password command from the Setup menu. 4. Select all check boxes for password protection. 5. Select the Password button. 6. Enter a password. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Verify the password by re-typing it. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Exit your Cabnetware program. 11. Continue this password protection process for each network workstation. At this stage, network installation is complete. All computers connected to the network with a program security key can now use the software. 1-11 Starting Your Cabnetware Program After installing your Cabnetware program, the Setup program creates a Cabnetware icon on your Windows desktop in a Cabnetware folder. To start your Cabnetware program, double-click on the Cabnetware folder and then again double-click on the program icon. The main program window now appears on your screen. Identifying Cabnetware Screen Components This section allows you to familiarize yourself with the main Cabnetware screen. Control Menu Box Main Title Bar Main Menu Main Toolbar Cabinet Toolbar Wall Toolbar View Toolbar Work Area CAD Toolbar Closet Toolbar Appliance Toolbar Status Bar 1-12 Customizing Window Sizes You can change the layout and display of your Cabnetware program window with a few simple techniques. • Click on the Restore button • Resize the window by dragging its borders. • Resize the window by dragging its corners. • Click on the Maximize button • Select the New Window command from the Window menu to open a new window. • Select the Tile or Cascade command from the Window menu to arrange multiple windows. • Select the Minimize All command from the Window menu to minimize all views to icons. to reduce the size, or minimize the window. to maximize the window. Cabnetware Terminology As you use your Cabnetware On-line Help and your documentation, you will be instructed to perform various actions. To assure effective communication, it is essential that we speak the same language and refer to certain items with the same name. Don’t feel that you need to memorize each of these terms. Most of the terms are standard Window conventions of which you may be already familiar. Dialog Boxes Whenever you add, edit, configure or customize an object in Cabnetware, you will be presented with a window called a “dialog box”. A dialog box displays the options available for the function you are trying to perform. Dialog boxes make use of various types of buttons, check boxes, lists and edit boxes to make selecting options as easy as possible. Dialog box for setting mouse cursor control for CAD 1-13 Dialog Box Options Selecting or Clearing Options with the Mouse • Point to the option button, check box, or list item, and then click the left mouse button. Selecting an Item in a Drop-down Box • Click on the down arrow to display the list, and then click on an item. Selecting a Number in a Spin Box • Click the up or down arrows to the right of the spin box until the correct number appears in the box. Using the Keyboard • Press the Tab key until the desired option is highlighted. • • Press the Spacebar to set or clear a check box. Select a radio button by pressing the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key until the desired option is selected. Tab Dialog Boxes To allow for more options on a dialog box without making a dialog box bigger, “Tabs” are added. Clicking on a tab with the mouse pointer displays options related to that tab label. Selecting Whenever you click on an object or item, you have selected it. A hatched box being drawn around the item identifies a selected item. Selecting an item allows you to edit, move or delete that item. 1-14 Handles Selecting some items will draw up to eight little squares on the select box. These little squares are called “Handles”. Handles appear on any item that the program allows you to size. You can grab any one of these handles with the mouse pointer and drag them in and out to change the size and shape of an item. Main Bar The Main Menu Bar is located at the top of Cabnetware’s Main Window. This bar allows access to dropdown menus, each containing a list of program commands. Clicking on any name (File, View, Walls, Appliances, Cabinets, CAD, Modify, Options, Window, and Help) opens the drop-down menu with their associated commands. Menus A menu is a list of program commands organized under one menu heading. The following is a list of wall layout commands found under the Wall menu. Pop Up Menus The most important thing you need to remember in Cabnetware is to use the right button on your mouse. Almost every command you need for a selected item is just a simple right-click away. 1-15 A single right-click on a selected item will display a Pop-Up menu with all the commands you need to modify that item. Try right-clicking after selecting some of the items in your design. You will soon discover that selecting a command from the Pop-Up menu is much quicker than selecting a menu from the Main menu and then selecting a command. Toolbars Toolbars provide a set of command icons for the most commonly used functions in the program. There are two types of toolbars in the program. The Main toolbar is located just under the menu bar. The Main toolbar contains command icons that are related to the current window. Floating toolbars are ones that you can display and move to any location on the screen. The following is the Wall toolbar. It is a Floating toolbar. 1-16 Cabnetware Menus and Commands Control Menu Restore: Returns the active window to its former size and location. Move: Allows use of the keyboard to move the active window. Size: Allows use of the keyboard to resize the active window. Minimize: Shrinks the active window to an icon. Maximize: Enlarges the active window to fill the screen. Close: Closes the active window. Next: Goes to the next window on a multiple window screen. File Menu New Room: Clears the current window, allowing the creation of a new room. Open Room: Recalls an existing room. Close Room: Closes the current room. Save Room: Saves the current room. Save Room As: Saves the current room under a new name. Also used to save a room to a different directory. Save Cabinet to Catalog: Saves a selected cabinet to a catalog. Export: Saves the current view to a BMP, DXF, VRML, or Slide Show format. Print: Prints the current view according to the options specified. Printer Setup: Select printer and printer options. Email Room Images: Emails the current view. Setup: Displays the program setup options. Utilities: Displays the programs backup and restore options. Exit: Ends the current session and exits the program. 1-17 View Menu Floor Plan: Displays a floor plan view in the current window. Elevation: Displays an elevation view in the current window. Cabinet: Displays a cabinet view in the current window. Birdseye: Displays a birdseye or overhead view in the current window. Render: Displays a 3D rendered view of the room. Cross Section: Displays a cross section view of a selected cabinet opening. Multi-Cross Section: Displays a cross section view of an entire cabinet. Wall Cross Section: Displays a cross section view of all wall cabinet and molding items on a wall. Counter Tops: Displays a counter top view in the current window. Toe Kicks: Displays the toe kick platform layout. Saved Bitmaps: Displays a list of saved BMP images to pick and display on the screen. Saved Renders: Displays a list of saved rendered images to pick and display on the screen Cut: Copies the selected cabinet into memory and deletes it from the view. Copy: Copies the selected cabinet into memory. Paste: Pastes the cabinet that was saved to memory using the Cut or Copy command on a wall. Undo: Restores a design back to its original condition before the previous modification. Regenerate: Redraws the current view causing the computer to refresh the screen. Zoom In: Magnifies the view of the currently active window. Use this option to see a view in greater detail. Zoom Out: Zooms out the current view. Pan: Moves the drawing in any direction on the screen. Pick User Graphics: Displays a list of user created graphics to pick from. Display Options: Temporarily turns on or off different aspects of your room design. Grids: Turns on or off a grid pattern on the current view. Toolbars: Turns on or off selected toolbars. Walls Menu Exterior: Begins a starting location for one or a group of connecting exterior walls. Interior: Begins an interior wall that attaches to existing exterior walls. Peninsula/Island: Begins an invisible wall off of an existing wall for placing peninsula cabinets, or begins an invisible wall in the middle of a room for placing island cabinets. Free Form Cabinets Begins a wall for a group of connecting walls to define the outside perimeter of cabinets to be filled or placed on a freestanding island. Angle: Begins a wall segment with a special wall angle. Radius: Extends a radius wall from a previous wall at a selected radius and angle. Windows: Enters a custom window or a window from user-graphics. Doors: Enters a custom door size or a door from user-graphics. Preferences: Displays the default wall layout settings for wall style, wall height, and wall thickness. Show Wall: Restores all walls that have been hidden. 1-18 Appliances Menu Refrigerator: Displays a list of refrigerators saved to your appliance catalog. Refrigerator Cabinet: Displays a list of boxed-in refrigerator cabinet saved to your appliance catalog. Undercounter Refrigerator: Displays a list of under counter refrigerators saved to your appliance catalog. Wall Oven Cabinet: Displays a list of wall oven cabinets saved to your appliance catalog. Undercounter Oven: Displays a list of undercounter ovens saved to your appliance catalog. Free Standing Range: Displays a list of freestanding ranges saved to your appliance catalog. Drop-in Range: Displays a list of drop-in ranges saved to your appliance catalog. Cooktop: Displays a list of cooktops saved to your appliance catalog. Hood: Displays a list of hoods saved to your appliance catalog. Microwave Hood: Displays a list of microwave hoods saved to your appliance catalog. Sink: Displays a list of sinks saved to your appliance catalog. Dishwasher: Displays a list of dishwashers saved to your appliance catalog. Compactor: Displays a list of compactors saved to your appliance catalog. Washer: Displays a list of clothes washers saved to your appliance catalog. Dryer: Displays a list of clothes dryers saved to your appliance catalog. Place: Turns on the ability to place an appliance on the wall at any location. Bump Right: Turns on the ability to bump appliances to the right into other cabinets and objects. Bump Left: Turns on the ability to bump appliances to the left into other cabinets and objects. Rotate: Turns on the ability to rotate an appliance into the corner of a room at any angle. 1-19 Cabinets Menu Base: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog base cabinets. Upper: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog upper cabinets. Pantry: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog pantry cabinets. Special: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog special cabinets. Fillers: For selecting and placing fillers. Corner: For selecting and placing custom, modular or catalog corner cabinets. End: For selecting and placing upper, base and special end cabinets. Split Level: For selecting and placing of custom, modular or catalog split level cabinets. Wainscot Paneling: For selecting and placing wainscot paneling. Closet Components: For selecting and placing closet component parts. Face Frames: For selecting and placing face frame only cabinets. Room Valance: For selecting and placing room valances. Catalog Search: Select this option to search for a cabinet in the catalog. Catalog: Selecting this option turns on and off the ability to pull cabinets from your catalog. Finished Back: Selecting this option turns on and off the ability to design a cabinet with a finished back. Modular: Selecting this option turns on and off the ability to design cabinets as modules. Max Fill Width: Selects the maximum size cabinets that you want to fast fill from your library. Fast Fill: Turns on the ability to have the program auto-design a wall by fast filling a selected cabinet type. Fill Right: Turns on the ability to have the program auto-design a wall by fast filling a selected cabinet type to the right of a select wall location. Fill Left: Turns on the ability to have the program auto-design a wall by fast filling a selected cabinet type to the left of a select wall location. Place: Turns on the ability to place a cabinet on the wall at any location. Bump Right: Turns on the ability to bump cabinets to the right into other cabinets and objects. Bump Left: Turns on the ability to bump cabinets to the left into other cabinets and objects. Rotate: Turns on the ability to rotate a cabinet into the corner of a room at any angle. 1-20 CAD Menu Line: Draws a straight line. Parallel Lines: Draws a series of lines that are parallel to each other. Polyline: Draws a series of straight lines connected in sequence. Square: Draws a box with equal sides. Rectangle: Draws a rectangular box of any size. Polygon: Draws a series of straight lines connected in sequence that ends at the beginning of the first line. Circle: Draws a circle. Curves: Draws arcs, curves, and S-curves. Text: Allows user to enter text, such as comments and notes on the view. Erase: Erases CAD from a view. Callouts: Draws a view marker on a design. Dimensions: Adds, Deletes and Edits dimensions on a view. Mechanical: Picks and places architectural mechanical symbols from a catalog. DXF Import: Picks and places DXF objects on a view. Preferences: Determines the default settings for CAD. Cursor Control: CAD control options. Origin: Picks a point of origin for mouse readouts. Modify Menu Cabinet: Displays the cabinet modify options for the selected cabinet. Section: Displays the section modify options for the selected cabinet section. Partitions/Dividers: Displays the partition and divider options for sub-dividing a cabinet section with partitions and dividers. Moldings: Puts the program in a special mode to modify moldings in elevations. Cabinet Breaking: Breaks the length of a long cabinet into smaller cabinets. Cabinet Stretch: Stretches the shape of a cabinet into different shapes and configurations. Cabinet Notes: Adds comments or notes to a cabinet. Tilt Section: Tilts the top section of a cabinet back. Bowed Front Section: Bows the front of a single cabinet section. Added Doors: Allows additional doors to be added to a job cutlist. Cabinet Cutlist: Displays a list of parts and materials for modifying the cutlist on a selected cabinet. Job Cutlist: Displays a list of parts and materials for modifying the cutlist on all cabinet parts for the job. Job Information: Inputs information for the job. Room Defaults: Displays the current parameter defaults and allows information to be input for the room. Cabinet Name: Changes the name of a cabinet. Move Cabinet Name: Moves the location of a cabinet name on floor plan. Accessories: Picks and reviews accessories for a cabinet or room. 1-21 Options Menu Cutlist: Defines and prints a master, batched, or individual cutting list. Proposal: Defines and prints a contract. Change Order: Defines and prints a change order contract. Bid Report: Prints a bid report showing cost breakdowns. Job Cost Report: Prints a job costing report showing a comparison of actual labor and material with estimated labor and material. Multi-Draw: Displays multi-draw screen for creating a blue print type drawing. Walk Thru: Creates and displays a video walk thru of a room. Slide Show: Displays a slide show of saved job images. Output to Enterprise: Exports job information to Enterprise. Screen to Machine: Sends all parts directly to the Planit Solutions CNC Center. CNC Center: Defines and creates machining operations for cabinet parts. Panel Optimization: Defines and prints a material optimization report. WoodWizard: Started the WoodWizard program. Labels: Prints cabinet and part labels. Metric: Displays dimensions in metric. Tape Measure: Selects the electronic tape measure. Window Menu Cascade: Arranges all open windows in layers so each title bar is visible. Tile: Arranges all open windows so that all of them are visible on your desktop. Arrange Icons: Arranges all minimized window icons across the bottom of your desktop. New Window: Adds another view window on top of the open window. Minimize All: Closes all open windows to minimized icons. Fit Views to Windows: Redraws each view to fit the current window, as it is re-sized. Help Menu Contents and Index: Displays the Cabnetware Help Contents and an index of all help subjects. Tutorial: Displays an on-line tutorial. How to Use Help: Displays step by step instructions for using Cabnetware Help. Quick Startup: Displays the Quick Startup dialog when loading the program. About Cabnetware: Displays the current program version and information about the program and the amount of free disk space available on your system. 1-22 Cabnetware Menu Bars and Toolbars Screen to Machine Main Menu Bar Copy Cursor Select Snapshot View Save New Room Restore Vertical Sections Pan Tape Measure Wall Right Paste Print Cut Wall Left Zoom-in Open Room Undo Last Zoomout Zoom-In and out Horizontal Sections Live View Multi-draw Menu Bar Cursor Select Copy Restor e Paste Print New Wall Right Zoom-in Open Cut Page Up/Page Down Zoom-out Save Undo Wall Left Pan Close Multi-draw Tape Measure Walls Toolbar Exterior Wall Interior Wall Radius Wall Peninsula/Island Wall Window Free Form Wall Show Walls Doors 1-23 View Toolbar Floor Plan Elevation Rendering Multi-draw Counter Top Birds Eye Cabinet Graphic Toolbar Room Textures Grid Options Door Pulls/Handles Drawer Pulls/Handles Placement Toolbar Fast Fill Fill Right Fill Left Place Bump Right Bump Left Finished Back Catalog Cabinets Modular Cabinets Modify Toolbar Cabinet Note Break Cabinet Cabinet Name Stretch Cabinet Cabinet Accessories Move Cabinet Name Room Defaults 1-24 Reports/Output Toolbar Quote Proposal t Job Cost Report Order Form Appliance Toolbar Refrigerator Cabinet Refrigerator Wall Oven Undercounter Refrigerator Undercounter Oven Free Standing Range Drop-in Range Cooktop Hood Microwave Hood Sink Dishwasher Compactor Washer Dryer Closet Toolbar Vertical Panel Shelf Diagonal Corner Shelf L-Shape Corner Shelf Closet Unit Closet Door Closet Drawer Closet Rod 1-25 Cabinet Toolbar Base Upper Pantry Special Diagonal Corner Base Diagonal Corner Upper Diagonal Corner Special Lazy Susan Base Lazy Susan Upper Lazy Susan Special Upper Filler Base Filler Corner Base Filler Special Filler Corner Upper Filler Corner Special Filler Base Face Frame Only Upper Face Frame Only Base End Cabinet Special Face Frame Only Special End Cabinet Upper End Cabinet Base Wainscot Upper Wainscot Valances Special Wainscot 1-26 CAD Toolbar Solid Line Dashed Line Center Line Pointer Line Solid Parallel Line Dashed Parallel Line Center Parallel Line Pointer Parallel Line Arc Curve S-Curve Solid Polyline Dashed Polyline Center Polyline Pointer Polyline Solid Polygon Box Filled Polygon Filled Box Dashed Box Dashed Rectangle Rectangle Circle Filled Rectangle Text Dashed Circle Dimension Retrieve Text Call outs Mechanical Symbols Preferences Erase 1-27 Shortcut Keys Use the following shortcut keys to access windows and menu commands. Moving among windows To Go to next window Go to previous window Make menu bar active Cancel a menu Press Ctrl + F6 Ctrl + Shift + F6 F10 Esc File menu shortcut keys To New Open Close Save Print Exit Press Ctrl + N Ctrl + O Ctrl + W Ctrl + S Ctrl + P Alt + F4 Edit menu shortcut keys To Copy Cut Paste Delete Press Ctrl + C Ctrl + X Ctrl + V Del View menu shortcut keys To Floor Plan Elevation Perspective Birds Eye Pan Regenerate Select View in New Window Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Window Press Alt + Ctrl + F Alt + Ctrl + E Alt + Ctrl + P Alt + Ctrl + B Alt + P Ctrl + R Shift + Pick View Ctrl + Z Alt + Z Ctrl + W Modify menu shortcut keys To Cabinet Drag Cabinet Sizing Cabinet Modify Press Single Click Single Click Double Click CAD menu shortcut keys To Snap Press “S” Key 1-28 Windows menu shortcut keys To Tile Cascade Open New Window Open New Window with a View Press Shift + F4 Shift + F5 Shift + F6 Shift + View Help menu shortcut keys To Contents Press F1 On-line Tutorial Cabnetware has created an extensive on-line help system to assist you in learning the program. Running the on-line tutorial will give you a quick start towards mastering your Cabnetware program. The on-line tutorial can be accessed while running the program by following these steps: 1. Select the Contents command from the Help menu. 2. Select the Tutorial option from Help’s Table of Contents. 1-29 Chapter 2 Setup Preferences Preferences allow the user to identify default settings for the way the program operates. A user can accept the default settings supplied with the program or customize them as needed. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Preferences. General Preferences General preferences are default settings for the way the program functions. Setting General Preferences 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu. 3. Select the General tab from the Preferences dialog. Fractions Select this option if cabinet dimensions are to be displayed and printed in fractions. Decimals Select this option if cabinet dimensions are to be displayed and printed in decimals. Round to Nearest Select the smallest fraction or decimal to which the program is to round off all dimensions. Parameters Select whether parameters will be entered in inches or millimeters. Appliances Select whether the appliances will be entered in inches or millimeters. Room Design Select whether a room design will be laid out in inches or millimeters. Undo Changes Determines the number of changes done to a design before an undo file is saved. Undo files are for the Undo and Auto-backup features of the program. Enter up to twenty design changes before an undo file is created. Undo Levels An undo level consists of a given number of undo files. Enter up to ten undo levels. 2-1 Path Preferences Path preferences are default path settings the program uses to find and save files. It is probably wise to leave these preferences as the program has set them, unless you have valid reasons to change them. Setting Path Preferences 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Preferences. 3. From the Preferences dialog select the Path tab. Parameters Button This button changes the path the program uses to find and save parameters. 3D Objects Button Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save 3D objects. Appliance Button Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save appliances to the appliance catalog. Cabinet Catalog Button Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save cabinets to the cabinet catalog. Jobs Button Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save job files. User Graphics Button Select this button to change the path the program uses to find and save user-created graphics. Textures Button This button changes the path the program uses to find and save render textures. 2-2 User Information Preferences User Information preferences describe your company information as it will appear on all printed documents. Setting User Information Preferences 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Preferences. 3. From the Preferences dialog select the User Info tab. Contact Enter the name of the person to be contacted, as it is to appear on printed reports. Company Name Enter the name of the company, as it is to appear on printed reports. Address Enter the address of the company, as it is to appear on printed reports. Phone (Voice) Enter the phone number of the company, as it is to appear on printed reports. Phone (FAX) Enter the fax number, as it is to appear on printed reports. Phone (Cellular) Enter a cellular phone number, as it is to appear on printed reports. Phone (Home) Enter a home phone number, as it is to appear on printed reports. Editing User Information 1. Enter the appropriate information in each of the fields. 2. Select the OK button. 2-3 Scales and Dimension Preferences Scales and Dimension preferences identify the default drawing scales and dimensions used by the program when outputting views. Setting Scale and Dimension Preferences 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Preferences. 3. From the Preferences dialog select the Scales/Dimensions tab. Floor Plan/Elevations Button Select this button to change the default scale for all floor plans and elevations. Detail Button Select this button to change the default scale for all details. Cross Sections Button Select this button to change the default scale for all cross sections. Metric Displays the selected scales as a ratio. Font Button Select this button to change the default font used for dimensions. Height Enter the height of dimensions for all drawings as they are to be printed. If it is preferred that all dimensions are printed at a height of 1/8", enter ".125". Spacing Enter the amount of space that appears between dimensions when a drawing is printed. Entering "1" will space dimensions one character height away from each other. The character height is determined by the Dimension Height. A range of "1.5" to "2" is a good value for this option. Pointer Select the style of dimension pointer, as it is to appear on all dimension lines. 2-4 Display Preferences Display Preferences control the default settings for the type of information displayed in a room design. These options can also be controlled on a room-by-room basis from the Display command on the View menu. Setting Display Preferences 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Preferences. 3. From the Preferences dialog select the Display tab. All Dimensions Select this option to display all dimensions. Section Width Dimensions Select this option to display the width of all cabinet section openings. Section Height Dimensions Select this option to display the height of all cabinet section openings. Appliance Center Lines Select this option to display appliance centerline dimensions. Filler Dimensions Select this option to display the width of all fillers. Door and Window Casing Select this option to include door and windows casing as part of the dimension width for doors and windows on both floorplan and elevation views. Floorplan Cabinet Width Select this option to display cabinet widths on a floorplan view. Stile Dimensions Select this option to display all stile and mullion widths. Work Triangle Determines if a work triangle dimensions will be displayed on floor plans. Counter Tops Select this option to display counter tops as solid lines and base cabinets as dashed lines on the floor plan view. 3D Objects Select this option to display 3D objects in a room design. CAD Text Select this option to display CAD text in a room design. Lighting Symbols Select this option to display render lighting locations on the floor plan view. 2-5 Camera Symbol Select this option to display the camera location used for viewing a rendered or perspective view. Mechanical Symbols Select this option to display mechanical symbols in a room design. CAD Line Weight Select This Option to display CAD line widths. Cabinet Information Select this option to display cabinet numbers, partition locations, and finished end types. Cabinet Shelves Select this option to display cabinet shelves on elevation views. Elevation Fill Select this option to display filled color on cabinets and appliances in elevations. Wood Grain Select this option to display wood grain on cabinets. Door Designs Select this option to display door graphics. Door Overlaps Select this option to display the door overlaps on cabinets. Door Hinging (Floor Plan) Select this option to display cabinet door hinging on floor plan views. Door Hinging (Elevation) This option displays architectural door hinging lines on elevational views when door designs are turned off. Cabinet Long Names This option displays the manufacturer’s line name for a cabinet. If this option is not selected, the program will display the cabinet’s generic name as saved to the cabinet catalog. No Report Select this option to remove all reports from floor plan and elevation views. Installation Reports Select this option to display an installation report on floor plan and elevation views. Cabinet Reports Select this option to display a cabinet report on floor plan and elevation views. Tip: Remember to remove the check mark in front of information not to be printed. 2-6 Multi-draw Preferences Multi-draw preferences identify the default scales, dimensions and the page size used by multidraw. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu. 3. Select the Multi-draw tab from the Preferences dialog. Floor Plan/Elevations Button Select this button to change the default scale for all floor plans and elevations in multi-draw. Detail Button Select this button to change the default scale for all details in multi-draw. Cross Sections Button Select this button to change the default scale for all cross sections in multi-draw. Metric Displays the selected scales as a ratio. Font Select this button to change the default font used for dimensions in multi-draw. Height Enter the height of dimensions for all drawings as they are to be printed from multi-draw. If it is preferred that all dimensions are printed at a height of 1/8", enter ".125". Spacing Enter the amount of space that appears between dimensions when a drawing is printed from multi-draw. Entering "1" will space dimensions one character height away from each other. The character height is determined by the Dimension Height. A range of "1.5" to "2" is a good value for this option. Pointer Select the style of dimension pointer, as it is to appear on all dimension lines in multi-draw. 2-7 Estimator Preferences Estimator preferences control the default settings for the format and the type of information the program uses to print proposals, quotes and order forms. Estimate Wording Selecting this option displays the .txt (text) files wording to be used in estimate printouts. Date Selecting this option displays the current date on all printouts. Company Information Selecting this option displays your company information on all printouts. Customer Information Selecting this option displays customer information on all printouts. Contractor Information Selecting this option displays contractor information on all printouts. Architect/Designer Information Selecting this option displays architect or designer information on all printouts. Ship to Selecting this option displays information regarding where items are to be shipped. Room Information Selecting this option displays all room-related information on all printouts. Terms Selecting this option displays the terms’ wording to be used on estimate printouts. Metric If this option is selected, pricing will be based upon square meters as opposed to lineal feet. by Room Select this option if an order form is to be printed by rooms. by Door Style Select this option if an order form is to be printed using like door styles. Itemized Prices Select this option to display itemized pricing on estimate printouts. Tax 1, 2 and 3 Select the appropriate taxes that apply in your area. Room Totals Selecting this option displays pricing totals for each room on estimate printouts. Grand Totals Selecting this option displays grand total pricing information on all estimate printouts. 2-8 Render Preferences Rendering preferences control the default setting for the way a room design is displayed in a rendered view. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Preferences command from the Setup menu. 3. Select the Rendering tab from the Preferences dialog. Smooth Select this option as a fast speed setting used to remove jagged lines from a rendered view with good results. Smoother Select this option as a medium speed setting used to remove jagged lines from a rendered view with better results. Smoothest Select this option as the slowest speed setting used to remove jagged lines from a rendered view with the best results. Room Textures Select this button to choose default textures used for all room and cabinet items while rendering. Appliance Textures Select this button to choose default textures used for all appliances while rendering. Cross Section Textures Select this button to choose default textures used for all cabinet parts while rendering a cross section view. Render Detail Controls the amount of detail given while rendering a design. The better the detail the slower the render. Background Color Select the background screen color to be used in a rendered view. Show Screen Draws Select this option if you want to watch a rendered view draw on the screen as it is processed by the computer. This option will slow down the rendering process. The better the results you want in rendering a room and cabinet design, the longer the program will take to calculate and display the view. 2-9 Creating a New Manufacturer’s Catalog Before the Cabnetware program can be used for cabinet design, you must first create a new manufacturer’s catalog. You will input a manufacturer’s name, the manufacturer’s cabinet lines and parameter files for each cabinet line. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select the Manufacturer option button. 4. Select the New button. 5. In the Manufacturer Name text box, enter the name of the new manufacturer. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Select the Done button. Creating a Cabinet Line 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer’s name from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select the Cabinet Line option button. 5. Select the New button. 6. Enter the name of the new cabinet line in the Line Name text box. 7. Select either the Frameless Line (Euro) or Frame Line option button. 8. Select the OK button. 9. Select the Done button. 10. Continue this process for each cabinet line for the selected manufacturer. 2-10 Editing a Manufacturer’s Catalog The name of a manufacturer and the manufacturer’s lines can be changed. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select the Manufacturer option button. 4. Select the Edit button. 5. In the Line Name text box, enter the new manufacturer’s name over the existing name. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Select the Done button. Editing Cabinet Lines 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer’s name from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. In the Line Name text box, enter the cabinet line name over the existing name. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Select the Done button. 2-11 Deleting a Manufacturer’s Catalog A manufacturer and manufacturer’s line can be deleted. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select the Manufacturer you wish to delete from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select the Delete button. 5. Select the Done button. Deleting Cabinet Lines 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer’s name from the Manufacturer list box 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the Delete button. 6. Select the Done button. Warning: Deleting a manufacturer will delete all lines, door styles, pricing and parameters for that manufacturer. Deleting a manufacturer’s line will delete all door styles, pricing, and parameters for that line. 2-12 Parameters Parameters are variables whose values determine the way cabinets will be designed for each manufacturer. The parameters specified when a cabinet is designed include information about overall cabinet sizes, toe kick heights, face frame widths, door and drawer overlaps, etc. Each manufacturer’s catalog loaded into the program has its own set of parameters. It is important to be thorough and not skip any parameter questions because it is thought they don't apply, or their meaning is not understood. The Cabnetware program looks at each parameter during the operation of the program. If there is a value that has not been entered correctly or has been omitted, an error will be produced at some point in the operation of the program. More simply put, if the parameters are not entered completely and correctly, the screen designs will never be correct. The majority of technical support calls that come in to Cabnetware are a result of parameters being set incorrectly. The Cabnetware program disks include a Sample catalog and parameter files. These files may be edited to create new files. The edited files can be renamed to any appropriate name chosen, or leave them as they are currently named. The SAMPLE files furnished with the program are only meant to be examples, and will not necessarily depict the way you design cabinets. These files are to be used as templates to customize the user's parameters. Creating Parameter Files New parameter files can be created to identify different counter top types, layout methods and door styles for each manufacturer’s catalog. Since counter top and cabinet parameters only have one set of parameters, you cannot create new parameter files. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the New button. 6. Enter the name of the new parameter file in the Line Name text box. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Select the appropriate option button in front of a parameter type (i.e., Counter Tops, Layout, Cabinet or Door Style). 9. Select the Edit button. 10. Answer all parameter questions in the new parameter file dialog box. 11. Select the OK button. 12. Select the Done button. 2-13 Modifying Parameter Files The values in the parameter files can be modified for each manufacturer’s catalog. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the appropriate option button in front of a parameter type (i.e., Counter Tops, Layout, Cabinet, etc.). 6. If the parameter type has a list box next to the selected option button, choose a parameter file. 7. Select the Edit button. 8. Edit the parameter questions in the parameter file dialog box. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Select the Done button. Copying Parameter Files The best way to create a new Counter Top, Layout, or Door/Drawer parameter file is to use an existing parameter file as a template. By using an existing parameter as a template for the new file, only the information that is different in the new file needs to be edited. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the appropriate option button in front of a parameter type (i.e., Counter Tops, Layout, or Door/Drawer). 6. Pull down the list box next to the selected option button and choose the parameter file to copy. 7. Select the Copy button. 8. Enter the name of the new parameter file in the Name text box. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Follow the steps for Modifying Parameter Files to modify the new parameter file. 11. Select the Done button. 2-14 Deleting Parameter Files When a parameter file is no longer needed, it can be deleted. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the appropriate option button in front of a parameter type (i.e., Counter Tops, Layout, Door/Drawer). 6. Pull down the list box to the right of the selected option button and choose a parameter file. 7. Select the Delete button. 8. Select the Done button. Warning: Deleting a door style will delete all pricing and parameters for that door style. Printing Parameter Files You may find it necessary to print a copy of your parameter files. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the appropriate option button in front of a parameter type (i.e., Counter Tops, Layout, Cabinet, etc.). 6. Pull down the list box to the right of the selected option button and choose a parameter file. 7. Select the Print button. 8. Select the appropriate option(s) from the Print Range options. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Select the Done button. 2-15 Counter Top Parameters Counter top parameters describe to the program the way in which a counter top will interact with the room and cabinet design. Top Thickness Enter the thickness of the counter top. If the buildup on counter tops is allowed to hang down over the face frame, enter only the thickness of the deck itself. If the buildup of counter tops is even with the top of the face frame, enter the thickness of the deck and buildup together. The program subtracts the thickness of the counter top selected from the overall base cabinet height. If entering a cabinet height, which does not include the counter tops in the Cabinet parameters, then enter "0" for the Top Thickness parameter. Back Splash Height Enter the height of the back splash. Front Edge Thickness Enter the thickness of the front edge of counter tops. This value is used only for the graphic representation of the counter top edge on the screen. It doesn't affect the height of the cabinet on the cutlist. Top Slat Thickness (Frame Only) This is the thickness of the decking for tile tops. If the decking is set behind the face frame, enter the thickness of the decking. If the decking is set on top of the face frame, enter "0", since it was already allowed for in the previous entry. Click the Next button on the counter top wizard. Counter Overhang at Front of Cabinet Enter the distance the counter overhangs the front side of base cabinets. Counter Overhang at Finished End Enter the distance the counter top overhangs the finished ends of base cabinets. Bar Overhang on Back Face of Peninsula/Island Enter the distance the counter top normally overhangs the back of a peninsula or island cabinet. Radius on Finished End Enter the typical or default counter top radius that appears on all finished ends. Enter "0" if the default should be for a square corner on all finished ends. Radius on Peninsula/Island Overhang Enter the typical or default counter top radius that appears on a peninsula or island overhang. This would be the corner of the counter where the finished end and the finished back of the cabinet connect. If the counter is to show a square corner on the overhang, set this parameter to "0". Click the Next button on the Counter Top wizard. Counter Top Method Select the method of pricing for counter tops. 2-16 Counter Top Price Enter a price for the selected method of pricing. Edge Detail Method Select the method of pricing for edge details. Edge Detail Price Enter a price for the selected method of pricing. Back Splash Method Select the method of pricing for back splashes. Back Splash Price Enter a price for the selected method of pricing. End Splash Method Select the method of pricing for end splashes. End Splash Price Enter a price for the selected method of pricing. End Cap Method Select the method of pricing the end caps. End Cap Price Enter a price for the selected method of pricing. Clipped Corners Method Only Each can be selected for this option. Clipped Corners Price Enter a price for each clipped corner. Radius Corners Method Only Each can be selected for this option. Radius Corners Price Enter a price for each radius corner. Joints Method Select the method of pricing for construction joints. Joints Price Enter a price for the selected method of pricing. Cutouts Method Only Each can be selected for this option. Cutouts Price Enter a price for each counter top cutout. 2-17 Layout Parameters Layout parameters describe to the program the layout method used to automatically fill cabinets in a room. A number of Layout files with different names and values can be created for each manufacturer’s catalog. Each Layout file is available as an option to choose from before beginning a room design. Frame Line Parameters (0) Integral (1) Modular (2) Catalog Modular • Enter "0" if building integral cabinets. • Enter "1" if building modular cabinets that are custom in size or of any increment in width. • Enter "2" if cabinets are supplied from an inventory of stock or standard cabinet sizes from the cabinet catalog. Modular Increments If modular cabinets were selected for the previous parameter, and they are constructed on increments, enter the increment size. If the modular cabinets are built on 3" increments, enter "3". If they are built on 1" increments, enter "1", etc. If the modular cabinets are all custom widths, leave this value at "0". Modular End Adjustments: (0) Filler (1) Cabinet When designing modular cabinets on increments, what is the typical procedure when it is not possible to design a given wall length with incrementally sized modular cabinets? • Enter "0" if the difference is made up with a filler. • Enter "1" if the width of the last cabinet is customized to make up the difference. Wall Height Enter the default ceiling height for starting a room design. Distance Door Opening to Cabinet Enter the distance cabinets and appliances are held away from all door openings. Distance Wall End to Cabinet Enter the distance cabinets are held away from the end of a wall or sheetrocked opening. Distance Window Opening to Cabinet Enter the distance cabinets and appliances are held from all window openings. Distance Base Return Pulled From Wall If building integral or custom modular cabinets, enter the distance a base return cabinet is held away from the adjacent wall. If butting the cabinet to the adjacent wall, enter "0". If the cabinet is held 1/2” from the adjacent wall, enter ".5". See Fig. 1. If building stock cabinets or modular cabinets built on increments, enter the maximum distance the base return cabinet can be pulled out of a corner. While actually designing a room, depending on how the walls are laid out, a cabinet with a return can be pulled any distance out of the corner up to the value entered for this parameter. For example, if the cabinet is pulled a maximum of 3" out of the corner, enter "3" for this parameter. 2-18 TOP VIEW OF CORNER CABINET DISTANCE RET. PULLED FROM WALL FACE FRAME RETURN STILE WIDTH CORNER STILE WIDTH OPTION (0) CORNER STILE BUTTS TO RETURN OPTION (1) CORNER STILE RUNS BEHIND RET. STILE Fig. 1 DISTANCE RETURN PULLED FROM WALL PANEL RETURN CLEARANCE BETWEEN PAIRS OF DOORS DISTANCE CABINET PULLED FROM WALL DOOR FILLER WALL END Fig. 2 TOP VIEW OF CORNER CABINET DOOR 2-19 Minimum Distance Base Return Pulled From Wall This parameter applies only to shops building stock cabinets or modular cabinets built on increments. Enter the minimum distance base return cabinets can be pulled out of a corner. If building integral or custom modular cabinets, leave this parameter set to "0". Distance Upper Return Pulled From Wall Enter a value for this parameter as was entered for the parameter Distance Base Return Pulled from Wall. Minimum Distance Upper Return Pulled From Wall Enter a value for this parameter as was entered for the parameter Minimum Distance Base Return Pulled From Wall. Soffit Overhang Enter the distance that a room soffit overhangs the front of the upper wall and floor-to-ceiling cabinets. If there is no soffit in a room, leave this parameter set to "0". Soffit Height Over Upper Enter the soffit height over upper wall cabinets. If there is no soffit, leave this parameter set to "0". Distance Upper Pulled From Ceiling/Soffit Enter the distance upper wall cabinets are held down from the ceiling or soffit. This parameter is used for leaving space between upper wall cabinets and the ceiling or soffit for ceiling scribes or molding. The height of upper wall cabinets is determined by the value of this parameter, the Wall Height parameter and the Minimum Distance from Floor to Upper Wall parameter. The formula the program uses is: Upper Wall Cabinet Height = Wall Height - (Distance Upper Wall Pulled from Ceiling/Soffit + Minimum Distance from Floor to Upper Wall) Soffit Height Over Pantries and Special Cabinets Enter the soffit height over pantries and special cabinets. If there is no soffit, leave this parameter set to "0". Distance Pantries and Special Cabinets Pulled From Ceiling/Soffit Enter the distance pantries and special cabinets are held down from the ceiling or soffit. Additional Frameless Line Parameters Distance Cabinet Pulled from Wall Enter the distance cabinets are held away from the side wall. A filler will automatically be placed in the space between the cabinet and the wall to fill this distance. 2-20 Cabinet Parameters The purpose of the Cabinet parameters is to let the program know basically how a typical cabinet is to look. This enables you to enter a new cabinet type and save it into the stock cabinet catalog for later retrieval. These parameters also allow the program to quickly do most of the cabinet designing for you. Right Partition: (0) No (1) Center (2) Flush Left (3) Flush Right • Enter "0" if partitions are not placed behind cabinet mullions. • Enter "1" if partitions are placed behind most cabinet mullions and they are centered. • Enter "2" if partitions are placed behind most cabinet mullions and they are flush to the left of the mullion. • Enter "3" if partitions are placed behind most cabinet mullions and they are flush to the right of the mullion. Ignore Catalog Cabinet Wall/Finished Distinctions: (0) No (1) Yes This option defines whether a cabinet saved to a catalog is retrieved with its saved end designations (finished or unfinished ends). • Enter "0", if the cabinet should maintain the end designation it was saved with. • Enter "1", if the end designations the cabinet was saved with should be ignored when a cabinet is later placed in a room. Uppers Depth Enter the typical depth of all wall cabinets. This amount will be from the front of the cabinet to the back of the finished end. It does not include the doors. Section Type: (0) Open (1) Doors • Enter "0" to designate that all wall cabinets will have open sections. • Enter "1" to designate that all wall cabinets will have doors. Doors: (0) Pair (1) Pair/Mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right • Enter "0" if wall cabinets will be designed with a pair of doors. • Enter "1" if wall cabinets will be designed with a pair of doors separated by a door mullion. • Enter "2" if wall cabinets will be designed with doors hinged to the left. • Enter "3" if wall cabinets will be designed with doors hinged to the right. If "0" or "1" is entered, the program will place a pair of doors on all sections or modules which are close to the Optimum or Maximum Section/Module Width. If the program must make a section or module that is half or less than the Optimum Section/Module Width, it will automatically place a single door. 2-21 Optimum Section/Module Width Enter the optimum section or module width the program is to design with. When designing custom integral cabinets, this parameter determines the number of sections added to each cabinet. It allocates just enough sections so that each section size is as close as possible to this value. The formula used is: Number of sections = Cabinet Width / Optimum Section Width If building modular cabinets, the program will use this value as the ideal module width (overall cabinet width) to design a cabinet. Maximum Section/Module Width Enter the maximum section or module width the program is to design with. If the formula used in Optimum Section/Module Width exceeds this value, then it will make another section or modular cabinet up to, but not greater than the value of this parameter. Minimum Section/Module Width Enter the minimum section or module width the program is to design with. If the value of the section or module is smaller than the minimum size, the program will automatically place a filler instead of a cabinet. Fill 1 Max Catalog Module Width The next four options only apply if saving stock catalog cabinets that will be used to do most or all cabinet designs. For example, cabinets could be saved in 3" increments (B15, B18, B21, B27, B30, etc.). If stock cabinets are not used, leave these four parameters at "0". If saving catalog cabinets in specific increments, these four options will allow the designer to select how a wall is filled with these catalog modular cabinets. Enter a value for each Fill option under upper wall and base cabinets. For example, Fill 1 might have a value of "18", Fill 2 a value of "24", Fill 3 a value of "36" and Fill 4 a value of "48". Later, while entering cabinets, these same options will be available. If Fill 1 is chosen, point at a wall and "click". The maximum size catalog cabinet that will be used to fill a given space will be 18" wide. If Fill 2 is chosen, the maximum size cabinet will be 24", etc. These four Fill options allow flexibility in the size of cabinets used to design a given area. Fill 2 Max Catalog Module Width Fill 3 Max Catalog Module Width Fill 4 Max Catalog Module Width Number of Fixed Shelves Enter the number of fixed shelves normally placed in wall cabinets. Number of Adjustable Shelves Enter the number of adjustable shelves normally placed in wall cabinets. The program knows not to place shelves in cabinets over hoods, and it will only place one shelf over a refrigerator or sink. 2-22 Minimum Distance From Floor to Upper Enter the distance from the floor to the bottom of a wall cabinet. If base cabinets are 36" high, and 18" is desired between the counter and the bottom of wall cabinets, then enter "54". This parameter is one of three used to determine the height of wall cabinets. The formula is: Wall Cabinet Height = Wall Height - (Distance Wall, Pantry and Special Cabinet Pulled from Ceiling + Minimum Distance from Floor to Wall) Minimum Distance From Floor to Hood Top Enter the distance from the floor to the bottom of a wall cabinet over a range or cook top. This value is not the distance to the bottom of the hood, but to the bottom of the wall cabinet over the hood. Minimum Distance From Floor to Upper Over Sink Enter the distance from the floor to the bottom of a wall cabinet that would be placed over a sink. This would be a wall cabinet placed over a sink where there is no window. Height Increment (Standard) Enter the height increment that is to be used for wall cabinets. For example, if the typical wall cabinets are to be 42" high in a room that is roughly 96" high, the program will change the cabinets to 41-1/4" if the room is actually 95-1/4" high and this parameter is set to "0". This parameter forces the program to round the cabinet to the nearest increment of the value entered. If "2" were entered, the cabinets in the example would still be generated at 42" until a 94” ceiling was entered. A 94” ceiling height would generate a 40” high cabinet. Access Door Opening Height For wall and base cabinets, an access door can be placed on the backside of a peninsula cabinet to provide access into the space next to the wall. Enter the typical access door opening height for upper peninsula cabinets. Access Door Opening Width Enter the typical access door opening width for upper peninsula cabinets. Upper Valance: (0) No (1) Yes (Euro Cabinets Only) • Enter “0” for no light valances under upper wall cabinets. • Enter “1” to place light valances under upper wall cabinets If you choose to design light valances under upper cabinets, the program automatically eliminates light valances from all upper wall cabinets placed over refrigerators, hoods and sinks. Upper Valance Width (Euro Cabinets Only) Enter a light valance width. Upper Valance Butts Wall End: (0) No (1) Yes (Euro Cabinets Only) • Enter “0” if upper valances run under unfinished wall ends. • Enter “1” if upper valances butt to unfinished wall ends. 2-23 Bases Section Type: (0) Open (1) Door(s) (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer Bank (4) Desk Enter the default configuration for all base cabinet section or module openings as they will appear when the program designs from this file. • Enter "0" if all base sections will be left open. • Enter "1" if all base sections will be designed with doors only. • Enter "2" if all base sections will be designed with a drawer over doors. • Enter "3" if all base sections will be designed as drawer banks. • Enter "4" if all base sections will be designed as desk sections. Doors: (0) Pair (1) Pair/Mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right • Enter "0" to design base cabinets with a pair of doors without a mullion. • Enter "1" to design base cabinets with a pair of doors separated by a mullion. • Enter "2" to design base cabinets with a single door hinged left. • Enter "3" to design base cabinets with a single door hinged right. If "0" or "1" is entered, the program will place a pair of doors on all sections or modules which are close to the Optimum or Maximum Section/Module Width. If the program must make a section or module that is half or less than the Optimum Section/Module Width, it will automatically place a single door. Depth Enter the typical depth of all base cabinets. This amount will be from the front of the cabinet to the back of the finished end. It does not include the doors. Height Enter the height of typical base cabinets. This should be the finished height including the thickness of the counter top. The top thickness will be subtracted from the overall finished height when the program calculates the cabinet height. If you choose to enter the cabinet height and not include the counter top thickness, make sure to enter a "0" for Counter Top Thickness in the Counter Top parameters. Toe Kick Height Enter the height of toe kicks from the floor to the bottom of the bottom rail. Toe Kick Depth Enter the depth of toe kicks from the front of the cabinet to the front of the toe kick. 2-24 Toe Kick: (0) None (1) Attached (2) Detached (3) No Notch (Finished) (4) No Notch (All) • Enter "0" if the cabinets do not have toe kicks. • Enter "1" if the finished end extends all the way to the floor and is notched out for the toe kick. • Enter "2" if the finished end does not run to the floor and the toe kick is inset on the finished end. See Fig. 3 to determine the appropriate toe kick construction. • Enter “3” if the finished end extends all the way to the floor and there is no notch for the toe kick. This option causes the face frame left and right stiles to go to the floor on finished ends. • Enter “4” if both the all ends extend all the way to the floor and there is no notch for the toe kick. This option causes the face frame left and right stiles to go to the floor. OPTION (1) Fig. 3 OPTION (2) Toe Kick Butts to Wall End (0) No (1) Yes • Enter "0" if the toe kick is to extend to the outside edge of the cabinet on all unfinished or wall ends. • Enter "1" if the toe kick butts to the inside edge of all unfinished or wall ends. Front Toe Kick Finished End Adjustment Enter a front toe kick adjustment for finished ends. Front toe kicks are calculated to be flush with the outside face of unfinished and finished ends, if the value for this parameter is set to "0". If toe kicks are held in from the outside of the finished end, an additional adjustment is entered here. 2-25 Optimum Section/Module Width Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for wall cabinets. It is recommended to place the same value in this parameter as was placed in these parameters for wall cabinets. This will force the program to design the same amount of sections or modules for both wall and base cabinets on the same length of wall. Maximum Section/Module Width Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for wall cabinets. Minimum Section/Module Width Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for wall cabinets. Fill 1 Max Catalog Module Width Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for wall cabinets. Fill 2 Max Catalog Module Width Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for wall cabinets. Fill 3 Max Catalog Module Width Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for wall cabinets. Fill 4 Max Catalog Module Width Enter a value for base cabinets as was entered for wall cabinets. Number of Pull-Outs Enter the number of pull-out shelves normally placed in base cabinets. Number of Fixed Shelves Enter the number of fixed shelves normally placed in base cabinets. Number of Adjustable Shelves Enter the number of adjustable shelves normally placed in base cabinets. Height of Drawer over Door Enter the height of the top drawer opening in a drawer over door cabinet. Number of Drawers in Standard Bank Enter the number of drawers in a typical bank or stack of drawers. Enter up to 8 drawers. Height of Drawer No. 1 (Top) Enter the height of the top drawer opening in a typical drawer bank. Height of Drawer No. 2-8 These seven fields apply to the remaining drawer openings in a typical drawer bank. Enter these as Drawer No. 1 was entered, from top to bottom. If a typical drawer bank has only four drawers, enter "0" for drawers 5 through 8. If drawer heights are not entered correctly for a typical drawer bank, the program will automatically override the entries here and calculate equal-height drawers when trying to enter a drawer bank. This may be due to using a standard drawer bank on a non-standard height cabinet, or may be due to using drawer heights that do not add up to the height of the cabinet. For convenience a worksheet has been provided. 2-26 Worksheet for Typical Drawer Bank Top thickness ......................:_____ Top rail.................................:_____ Drawer No. 1 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 1..................:_____ Drawer No. 2 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 2..................:_____ Drawer No. 3 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 3..................:_____ Drawer No. 4 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 4..................:_____ Drawer No. 5 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 5..................:_____ Drawer No. 6 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 6..................:_____ Drawer No. 7 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 7..................:_____ Last Drawer opening ...........:_____ Last Drawer rail :_____ Toe kick :_____ Total of the above Overall Height of Cabinet :_____ :_____ For a typical drawer bank to work, the "Total of the above" and "Overall Height of Cabinet" must be equal. Drawer No. 1: (1) Single (2) Double (3) False (4) Double False • Enter "1" for a single drawer. • Enter "2" for two drawers. • Enter "3" for a single false drawer. • Enter "4" for two false drawers. Drawer No. 2-8: (1) Single (2) Double • Enter "1" if the remaining seven drawers in a bank are typically single. • Enter "2" if the remaining seven drawers in a bank are typically double. Access Door Opening Height Enter the typical opening height for an access door on a base peninsula cabinet. Access Door Opening Width Enter the typical opening width for an access door on a base peninsula cabinet. 2-27 Pantry Cabinets Depth Enter the typical depth of all pantry cabinets. This amount will be from the front of the cabinet to the back of the finished end. It does not include the doors. If backs are not rabbeted or dadoed but applied over the back of the cabinet, this depth must include the back thickness. Height of Bottom Section Enter the opening height of the bottom section of a pantry cabinet. Number of Fixed Shelves in Upper Section Enter the number of fixed shelves normally placed in the upper section of a pantry cabinet. Number of Adjustable Shelves in Upper Section Enter the number of adjustable shelves normally placed in the upper section of a pantry cabinet. Number of Pull Outs in Bottom Section Enter the number of pull out shelves normally placed in the bottom section of a pantry cabinet. Number of Fixed Shelves in Bottom Section Enter the number of fixed shelves normally placed in the bottom section of a pantry cabinet. Number of Adjustable Shelves in Bottom Section Enter the number of adjustable shelves normally placed in the bottom section of a pantry cabinet. Split-Level Cabinets Overall Height Enter the overall height of a typical split-level cabinet. Upper Section Depth Enter the depth of the upper level of a typical split-level cabinet. The height and depth of the lower level of a split-level cabinet are determined by the base Height and Depth parameters. Type: (0) Open (1) Door (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer Bank • Enter "0" if the upper level will be left open. • Enter "1" if the upper level will be designed with doors. • Enter "2" if the upper level will be designed with a drawer over a door. • Enter "3" if the upper level will be designed as a drawer bank. Closet Components Depth Enter the typical depth of all closet components. Drawer Side Length Enter the length of drawer sides for a closet unit. 2-28 Distance Rod from Wall Enter the distance the closet rod will be held from the wall. Desk Sections Desk Drawer: (0) None (1) Single (2) Double • Enter "0" for desk sections with no drawer. • Enter "1" for desk sections with a single drawer. • Enter "2" for desk sections with two drawers. Rail Under Desk Drawer: (0) No (1) Yes • Enter "0" for no rail under the desk drawer(s). • Enter "1" for a rail under the desk drawer(s). Rail Width Under Desk Drawer Enter the rail width located below desk drawer(s). Extend Back Across Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes • Enter "0" if the back of the adjacent cabinet is not extended to cover the back of a desk. • Enter "1" if the back of the adjacent cabinet is extended to cover the back of a desk. Break Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes • Enter "0" if a desk section is part of the adjacent cabinet, and the cabinet top or top stretchers of the adjacent cabinet run over the drawer. • Enter "1" if the desk section is a separate unit. Finished Ends Finished End Type: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Applied (3) Laminated (Euro Cabinets Only) • Enter “0” to design cabinets with normal finished ends. • Enter “1” to design cabinets with paneled ends. • Enter “2” to design cabinets with applied finished ends. • Enter “3” to design cabinets with laminated finished ends. Base Cabinet Ends next to Appliances: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Applied (3) Laminated (Euro Cabinets Only) • Enter “0” to design cabinets with normal finished ends. • Enter “1” to design cabinets with paneled ends. • Enter “2” to design cabinets with applied finished ends. • Enter “3” to design cabinets with laminated finished ends. 2-29 Finished End Type: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Laminated (Frame Cabinets Only) • Enter “0” to design cabinets with normal finished ends. • Enter “1” to design cabinets with paneled ends. • Enter “2” to design cabinets with laminated finished ends. Base Cabinet Ends next to Appliances: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Laminated (Frame Cabinets Only) • Enter “0” to design cabinets with normal finished ends. • Enter “1” to design cabinets with paneled ends. • Enter “2” to design cabinets with laminated finished ends. The program always places unfinished wall ends next to freestanding ranges, dishwashers and compactors. Miter Paneled Ends to Face Frame • Enter “0” if you want your paneled ends to butt to the back of your face frame. • Enter “1” if you want your paneled ends to miter into the face frames. Face Frames Face Frame Thickness Enter the thickness of face frames. Beaded Face Frames • Enter “0” if you want no bead. • Enter “1” if you want molding pieces to be provided and the opening to adjust accordingly. • Enter “2” if you want the beaded molding to be shaped into the frame parts themselves. The rails and mullions will be extend the thickness of the bead, so that the bead may be coped. Bead Width Enter the thickness of the bead molding. Refer to Figs. 5, 6, 7, and 8 to define the part names used in these parameters. Rail Width Enter the width of all cabinet middle rails. Mullion Width Enter the width of mullions used between cabinet sections. Mullion Width Between Pairs of Doors Enter the width of mullions used between pairs of doors within a section. 2-30 Even if mullions are not used between a pair of doors, a value should be entered. Finished Stile Width Enter stile widths on all finished ends. Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Wall) Enter the stile width on all unfinished cabinet ends that but a wall Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Cabinet) Enter the stile width on all unfinished cabinet ends that but a cabinet Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Appliance) Enter the stile width on all unfinished cabinet ends that but an appliances. RAIL BASE TOP RAIL CONT. MIDDLE RAIL CUTTING BOARD RAIL OPTION (0) BROKEN MIDDLE RAIL, OPTION (1) MULLION Fig. 5 BASE BOTTOM RAIL FIG. 6 2-31 RECESSED SECTION STILE RECESSED SECTION SET STILE STILE FINISHED STILE UPPER TOP RAIL MULLION BETWEEN PAIR OF DOORS MULLION UPPER BOTTOM RAIL WALL SIDE RECESSED SECTION STILE STILE Fig. 8 Fig. 7 Cutting Board Rail Width Enter the width of cutting board rails. Refer to Fig. 5 to define the part names used in these parameters. Recessed Section Stiles and Rail Width These next two entries are only for manufacturers that inset doors under a sink or cook top, as in Fig. 8. If inset doors are not used, enter "0" for both values. Base Top Rail Width Enter the width of base cabinet top rails. Upper Top Rail Width Enter the width of top rails in wall cabinets. The same value will be used for the top rail in pantry and special cabinets. Base Bottom Rail Width Enter the width of bottom rails in base cabinets. The same value will be used for the bottom rail in pantry and special cabinets. Upper Bottom Rail Width Enter the width of bottom rails in wall cabinets. Upper Return Stile Width Enter the width of return stiles in wall cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1. Upper Corner Stile Width Enter the width of corner stiles in wall cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1. Base Return Stile Width Enter the width of return stiles in base cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1. 2-32 Base Corner Stile Width Enter the width of corner stiles in corner base cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1. Round Base Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes • Enter "0" if base corner cabinets are angled at 45-degrees across the face of the cabinet. • Enter "1" if base corner cabinets are designed with an inside radius across the face of the cabinet. Round Upper Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes • Enter "0" if wall corner cabinets are angled at 45-degrees across the face of the cabinet. • Enter "1" if wall corner cabinets are designed with an inside radius across the face of the cabinet. Base Return Panel Width Enter the width of returns on base cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1. for face frame cabinets and Fig 2 for frameless cabinets. Upper Return Panel Width Enter the width of returns on wall cabinets. Refer to Fig. 1. for face frame cabinets and Fig 2 for frameless cabinets. Top Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken This parameter applies to base, wall, pantry and special cabinets. • Enter "0" if top rails extend the full width of the cabinet, butting between the end stiles. • Enter "1" if top rails are broken by each section mullion, and the tops of the mullions will be flush with the top of the top rail. Middle Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken This parameter applies to base cabinets. Refer to Figs. 5 and 6. • Enter "0" if middle rails will extend the full width of the cabinet, butting between the end stiles. • Enter "1" if middle rails will be broken by each section mullion. Bottom Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken This parameter applies to base, wall, pantry and special cabinets. • Enter "0" if bottom rails extend the full width of the cabinet, butting between the end stiles. • Enter "1" if bottom rails are broken by each section mullion, and the bottoms of the mullions will be flush with the bottom of the bottom rails. Scribes The following four parameters apply to cabinet scribe on Face Frame cabinets. If you are interested only in cabinet design and pricing, do not enter anything for the following four parameters. If you sell a cabinet line from a manufacturer that uses Cabnetware's cutting list program, and you supply this manufacturer with jobs entered with Cabnetware's Design program, enter the scribe values for the next four parameters. You will need to get these values from the manufacturer. 2-33 Base Scribe (Cabinet to Wall) Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of base cabinets that butt to walls. See Fig. 11. Base Scribe (Cabinet to Cabinet) Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of base cabinets that butt to other cabinets. Base Scribe (Cabinet to Appliance) Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of base cabinets that butt to appliances. Peninsula Base Return Scribe Enter the amount you typically set the wall end in from the outside edge of a finished back. This will decrease the width of the return by this amount. If the typical return is 23" and you enter "1/2" (.5) here, it will make the return 22 1/2" on peninsula base cabinets. See Fig. 12. Upper Scribe (Cabinet to Wall) Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of upper cabinets that butt to walls. See Fig. 13. Upper Scribe (Cabinet to Cabinet) Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of upper cabinets that butt to other cabinets. Upper Scribe (Cabinet to Appliance) Enter the amount of scribe typically used on unfinished cabinet ends of upper cabinets that butt to appliances. Upper Return Scribe Enter the amount of scribe on wall cabinets where they return into another cabinet. If you do not set the wall end in on a return side as in Fig. 14, then enter "0". 2-34 BASE SCRIBE WALL END Fig. 11 BASE PENINSULA RETURN SCRIBE PENINSULA FINISHED BACK WALL END Fig. 12 2-35 FINISHED END UPPER SCRIBE WALL END Fig. 13 SIDE BOTTOM WALL UPPER RETURN SCRIBE BOTTOM Fig. 14 WALL SIDE 2-36 Additional Frameless Line Parameters Interior Material Thickness Enter the thickness of interior cabinet sides, bottoms, etc. Exterior Material Thickness Enter the thickness of finished cabinet sides. Finished Ends Finished End Type: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Applied • Enter “0” if you place normal finished ends or laminated finished ends as an integral part of the cabinet box. • Enter “1” if you do not use normal or applied finished ends; but place a paneled end in place of finished ends. • Enter “2” if you use applied finished ends for finished cabinet ends. Base Cabinet Ends Next to Appliances: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Applied • Enter “0” if you place normal finished ends or laminated finished ends next to refrigerators, washers and dryers. • Enter “1” if you place paneled finished ends next to refrigerators, washers and dryers. • Enter “2” if you place applied finished ends next to refrigerators, washers and dryers. Upper Cabinet Ends next to Hood/Refer: (0) Normal (1) Applied, Full Height (2) Applied, Half Height • Enter "0", if you do not place an applied finished ends on the exposed surface of a wall cabinet next to a refrigerator or hood cabinet. • Enter "1", if you do place applied finished ends in these areas and the applied ends are the same height as the taller wall cabinet when placed next to a hood. • Enter "2", if you place applied ends in these areas and the applied ends stop at the bottom of the cabinet that goes over a hood or refrigerator. The program always places unfinished wall ends next to freestanding ranges, dishwashers and compactors. 2-37 Applied Ends Applied Finished End Type: (0) Square (1) Radius (2) Clipped • Enter "0" if applied finished ends have a square front edge. • Enter "1" if applied finished ends have a radius front edge. • Enter "2" if applied finished ends have a clipped front edge. Applied Finished End Upper Top Adjustment Applied finished ends are shown and calculated to the top of all wall cabinets. Entering a value here shortens and pulls the applied finished end down from the top of a wall cabinet by the value entered. Applied Finished End Upper Bottom Adjustment Applied finished ends are shown and calculated to the bottom of all wall cabinets. Entering a value here shortens and pulls the applied finished end up from the bottom of a wall cabinet by the value entered. Applied Finished End Base Top Adjustment Applied finished ends are shown and calculated to the top of all base cabinets. Entering a value here shortens and pulls the applied finished end down from the top of a base cabinet by the value entered. Applied Finished End Base Bottom Adjustment Applied finished ends are shown and calculated to the bottom of all base cabinets. Entering a value here shortens and pulls the applied finished end up from the bottom of a base cabinet by the value entered. Applied Finished End Radius Enter the applied finished end radius size here. Applied Finished End Depth Adjustment All applied finished ends are calculated to be the same depth as the cabinet, plus the thickness of the door. Enter any difference in depth for applied finished ends. Face Frame Sizes Top Rail in Base Cabinets: (0) No (1) Yes The typical construction for a frameless cabinet is to use a full top or stretcher for the top of a base cabinet. The drawer or door will then overlay this full top or stretcher. The counter top would then be shimmed up on the cabinet creating a reveal between the counter top and the top drawer or door. If this is the way you build base cabinets, enter "0". Another construction method is to place a top rail on base cabinets, as you would in face frame cabinet construction. This rail might be between 38mm and 76mm in width and would be placed in front of the base cabinet top or top stretcher. This provides more reveal at the top of the cabinets, making it unnecessary to shim the counter tops. If you are using a top rail as described above, enter "1". Top Rail Width/Top Stretcher Thickness If you answered "1" above, then enter the width of the top rail. If you answered "0", then you will need to enter the thickness of the top or top stretcher. This parameter will allow you to have a different top or top stretcher thickness than the rest of the body parts. 2-38 Warning: It is important that a value be placed in this parameter for the correct calculation of door, drawer and partition heights. Vertical Gap Between Drawer Fronts Enter the distance between drawer fronts in a standard bank of cabinets. This would also apply to the distance between a drawer and a door, when a drawer is placed over a door. Euro Face Frame Sizes Face frames can now be placed on the face of a euro cabinet. The following parameters determine the default frame sizes used when a face frame is applied to a cabinet. Face Frame Thickness Enter the thickness of the face frame material. Rail Width Enter the width of all cabinet middle rails. Mullion Width Enter the width of mullions used between cabinet sections. Mullion Width Between Pair of Doors Enter the width of mullions used between pairs of doors within a section. Finished Stile Width Enter the stile width on all finished ends. Wall Stile Width Enter the stile width on all wall ends. Base Top Rail Enter the width of base cabinet top rails. Upper Top Rail Enter the width of top rails in upper cabinets. This same value will be used for the top rail in pantry and special cabinets. Base Bottom Rail Enter the width of bottom rails in base cabinets. This same value will be used for the bottom rail in pantry and special cabinets. Upper Bottom Rail Enter the width of bottom rails in upper cabinets. Top Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken This parameter applies to base, upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets. • Enter "0" if top rails extend the full width of the cabinet, butting between the end stiles. • Enter "1" if top rails are broken by each section mullion, and the tops of the mullions will be flush with the top of the top rail. 2-39 Middle Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken This parameter applies to bases. • • Enter "0" if middle rails will extend the full width of the cabinet, butting between the end stiles. • Enter "1" if middle rails will be broken by each section mullion. Bottom Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken This parameter applies to bases, upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets. • Enter "0" if bottom rails extend the full width of the cabinet, butting between the end stiles. • Enter "1" if bottom rails are broken by each section mullion, and the bottoms of the mullions will be flush with the bottom of the bottom rails. Face Frame Mortise and Tenon Depth The value entered is added to both ends of rails and mullions where the mullion butts against another face frame part. 2-40 Door, Drawer, and End Panel Parameters Door /Drawer/End Panel wizard identifies to the program the door styles that are available for each manufacturer and cabinet line. It also determines the graphical look of the door, and the doors overlap values. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the Door Style radio button. 6. Pull down the combo box next to the Door Style radio button and choose a Door/Drawer/End Panel file. 7. Select the Edit button. Creating Doors • With the Door/Drawer/End Panel wizard dialog displayed on the screen, select the Door button from the Door/Drawer/End Panel wizard. Answer the following parameters as requested on the door wizard dialog. Door Type • Select Slab to identify the construction of a one-piece door that might have edge banding applied. • Select Frame and Panel to identify the construction of a five-piece door. A raised panel door is a good example of a frame and panel door. • Select Mitered to identify the construction of a five-piece door with mitered stiles and rails at the corners of the doors. • Select MDF/RTF to identify the construction of a one-piece door that is routed to give the look of a raised panel door. • Select Horizontal Battens to identify the construction of a batten door with horizontal slats. • Select Vertical Battens to identify the construction of a batten door with vertical slats. Sub Contract Door Check this box if you order your doors from an outside source. With this option selected, the cutting list prints only the overall door sizes. Door Thickness Enter the overall thickness of the door. Door Inset into Cabinet Enter the distance the door insets into the cabinet. Enter the door thickness if you want to show an inset door. 2-41 Clearance Between Pair of Doors Enter the amount of clearance or gap that you leave between a pair of doors. Click the Next button on the door wizard. Alternate Door Style Minimum Door Width Enter a minimum width for which it would become necessary for the current door style to change to an alternate door style. Minimum Door Length Enter a minimum length for which it would become necessary for the current door style to change to an alternate door style. Alternate Door/Drawer Select an alternate door/drawer style that will be used when either the minimum door width or length is reached. When minimum door widths and lengths are reached, the program automatically switches a door on a cabinet to the alternate door selected. This is useful if the identified door style becomes to small to physically build and you want to swap to an alternate door style. Click the Next button on the door wizard. The displayed wizard screen pertains to the different overlaps given to the door style on upper, pantry, and special cabinets. The program allows the door overlaps to vary in any direction. All door overlaps are calculated from the face frame opening. If this is an overlay door, enter the amount of overlay in each direction. If this is an inset door, enter the amount by which the door is to be made smaller than the face frame opening in each direction. To make the door smaller, as with an inset door, put a minus (-) sign before the amount entered. Enter the overlaps or inset values given this door style for base, upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets in each direction. Overlap of Top Rail Enter the amount this door style overlaps the top rail of upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets. Overlap of Intermediate Rails Enter the amount this door style overlaps any intermediate horizontal rails placed in upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets. Overlap of Bottom Rail Enter the amount this door style overlaps the bottom rail in upper wall cabinets. Overlap of Finished Ends Enter the amount this door style overlaps the finished stiles on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets. Overlap of Wall Ends Enter the amount this door style overlaps wall end stiles on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets. 2-42 Overlap of Partitions Enter the amount this door style overlaps all mullions on upper wall, pantry, and special cabinets. Click the Next button on the door wizard. Overlap of Top Rail Enter the amount this door style overlaps top rails in base cabinets. Overlap of Intermediate Rails Enter the amount this door style overlaps intermediate horizontal rails that may be placed in base cabinets. Overlap of Bottom Rail Enter the amount this door style overlaps bottom rails in base, pantry and special cabinets. Overlap of Finished Ends Enter the amount this door style overlaps finished stiles in base cabinets. Overlap of Wall Ends Enter the amount this door style overlaps non-finished stiles in base cabinets. Overlap of Partitions Enter the amount this door style overlaps mullions in base cabinets. Click the Next button on the door wizard. Top Rail Width Enter the width of top rails for the door. See Fig. 15. If the top rail is arched, enter the width at its widest point. See Fig.16. Base Bottom Rail Width Enter the width of bottom rails for the door. Base Stile Width Enter the width of stiles for the door. Click the Next button on the door wizard. Top Rail Shape Select the type of shape used for the top rail. Mirror Top Rail Shape to Bottom Rail Select this option if you want the same top rail shape mirrored to the bottom rail. Create or Modify Rail Shapes Select the Create or Modify Rail Shapes button to enter and modify your collection of available rail shapes. Click the Next button on the door wizard. Inside Frame Edge Select the type of profile used for the inside edge of the doorframe. 2-43 Outside Frame Edge Select the type of profile used for the outside edge of the doorframe. Raised Panel Select the type of profile used for the door panel. Create or Modify Profiles Select the Create or Modify Profiles button to enter and modify your collection of available frame and panel profiles. Click the Next button on the door wizard. Middle Rail/Mullion Width Enter the width of middle rails or mullions that divide the panels on a multi-panel door. Middle Rail/Mullion Cope Depth Enter the cope depth for the rails and mullions on this style door. This parameter will lengthen the middle rails and mullions to accommodate for this profile cut on the cutting list for both ends. Panel Inset into Middle Rails/Mullions Enter the distance the panel will inset into middle rails and mullions. All panels are calculated to be on the inside edge of the middle rails and mullions when a "0" is entered here. Any value entered here will make the panel larger in the direction of any middle rails and mullions. Mullion Button Select this button to add vertical mullions to the door style. Middle Rail Button Select this button to add horizontal rails to the door style. Delete Button Selecting this button with the complete middle rail or mullion highlighted will delete it. Also, selecting this button with a segment of a middle rail or mullion highlighted will delete just that segment. Move Button Selecting this button with a middle rail or mullion highlighted will display a dialog box for identifying its location. Click the Next button on the end panel wizard. Panel Texture Select the Panel Texture button and choose a unique render texture to represent the panel of your door. You will only select a texture here when you don’t want the door panel material changing when different wood grain textures are selected for the room design. A good example for selecting a panel texture here would be if you are selecting a texture that would represent a glass door panel. No Grain Select this option if you want no grain to appear on the door panel. Vertical Grain Select this option if you want vertical grain to appear on the door panel. 2-44 Horizontal Grain Select this option if you want horizontal grain to appear on the door panel. If the door has more than one panel as in a multiple panel door, click on each panel to change the grain direction. Click the Finished button on the door wizard. You have completed the editing of your door parameters by way of the door wizard. The next step is to complete the Drawer Wizard for the same Door/Drawer/End Panel style. STILE WIDTH TOP RAIL WIDTH Fig. 15 BOTTOM RAIL WIDTH 2-45 STILE WIDTH Fig. 16 TOP RAIL WIDTH BOTTOM RAIL WIDTH Creating Drawers • With the Door/Drawer/End Panel wizard dialog displayed on the screen, select the Drawer button from the Door/Drawer/End Panel wizard. Drawer Type • Select Slab to identify the construction of a one-piece drawer that might have edge banding applied. • Select Frame and Panel to identify the construction of a five-piece drawer. A raised panel drawer is a good example of a frame and panel drawer. • Select Mitered to identify the construction of a five-piece drawer with mitered stiles and rails at the corners of the drawers. • Select MDF/RTF to identify the construction of a one-piece drawer that is routed to give the look of a raised panel drawer. • Select Horizontal Battens to identify the construction of a batten drawer with horizontal slats. • Select Vertical Battens to identify the construction of a batten drawer with vertical slats. Drawer Thickness Enter the overall thickness of this drawer. Drawer Inset into Cabinet Enter the distance the drawer insets into the cabinet. Enter the drawer thickness if you want to show an inset door. 2-46 Click the Next button on the drawer wizard. Alternate Drawer Style Minimum Drawer Width Enter a minimum width for which it would become necessary for the current drawer style to change to an alternate drawer style. Minimum Drawer Length Enter a minimum length for which it would become necessary for the current drawer style to change to an alternate drawer style. Alternate Door/Drawer Select an alternate door/drawer style that will be used when either the minimum drawer width or length is reached. When minimum drawer widths and lengths are reached, the program automatically switches a drawer on a cabinet to the alternate drawer selected. This is useful if the identified drawer style becomes too small to physically build and you want to swap to an alternate drawer style. Click the Next button on the drawer wizard. Overlap of Top Rail Enter the amount drawer fronts overlap top rails in base cabinets. Overlap of Intermediate Rails Enter the amount drawer fronts overlap any intermediate horizontal rails in base, pantry and special cabinets. Overlap of Bottom Rail Enter the amount drawer fronts overlap bottom rails in base, pantry and special cabinets. Overlap of Partitions Enter the amount drawer fronts overlap mullions in base, pantry and special cabinets. Overlap of Finished Ends Enter the amount drawer fronts overlap finished stiles in base, pantry and special cabinets. Overlap of Wall Ends Enter the amount drawer fronts overlap non-finished stiles in base, pantry and special cabinets. Click the Next button on the drawer wizard. Outside Frame Edge Select the type of profile used for the outside edge of the drawer front. 2-47 Create or Modify Rail Profiles Select the Create or Modify Profiles button to enter and modify your collection of available drawer frame and panel profiles. Click the Next button on the drawer wizard. Panel Texture Select the Panel Texture button and choose a unique render texture to represent the panel of your drawer. You will only select a texture here when you don’t want the drawer panel material changing when different wood grain textures are selected for the room design. A good example for selecting a panel texture here would be if you are selecting a texture that would represent a plastic laminate. No Grain Select this option if you want no grain to appear on the drawer panel. Vertical Grain Select this option if you want vertical grain to appear on the drawer panel. Horizontal Grain Select this option if you want horizontal grain to appear on the drawer panel. Click the Finished button on the drawer wizard. You have completed the editing of your drawer parameters by way of the drawer wizard. The next step is to complete the End Panel Wizard for the same Door/Drawer/End Panel style. Creating End Panels • With the Door/Drawer/End Panel wizard dialog displayed on the screen, select the End Panel button from the Door/Drawer/End Panel wizard. Drawer Type • Select Slab to identify the construction of a one-piece drawer that might have edge banding applied. • Select Frame and Panel to identify the construction of a five-piece drawer. A raised panel drawer is a good example of a frame and panel drawer. • Select MDF/RTF to identify the construction of a one-piece drawer that is routed to give the look of a raised panel drawer. Panel Thickness Enter the overall thickness of the end panel. Click the Next button on the End Panel wizard. Base Top Rail Width Enter the width of top rails for base end panels. See Fig.15. If the top rail is arched, enter the width at its widest point. See Fig 16. 2-48 Base Bottom Rail Width Enter the width of bottom rails for base end panels. Base Front Stile Width Enter the width of stiles for base end panels that will be near the front side of the cabinet. Base Back Stile Width Enter the width of stiles for base end panels that will be near the backside of the cabinet. Base Middle Rail/Mullion Width Enter the width of any middle rails or mullions that might be added to an end panel. Click the Next button on the End Panel wizard. Upper Top Rail Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Top Rail Width parameter. Upper Bottom Rail Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Bottom Rail Width parameter. Upper Front Stile Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Front Stile Width parameter. Upper Back Stile Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Back Side Width parameter. Upper Middle Rail/Mullion Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Middle Rail/Mullion Width parameter. Click the Next button on the End Panel wizard. Pantry and Special Cabinet Top Rail Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Top Rail Width parameter. Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom Rail Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Bottom Rail Width parameter. Pantry and Special Cabinet Front Stile Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Front Stile Width parameter. Pantry and Special Cabinet Back Stile Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Back Stile Width parameter. Pantry and Special Cabinet Middle Rail/Mullion Width Enter a value in the same manner as you did for the Base Middle Rail/Mullion Width parameter. Click the Next button on the End Panel wizard. Top Rail Shape Select the type of shape used for the top rail. 2-49 Mirror Top Rail Shape to Bottom Rail Select this option if you want the same top rail shape mirrored to the bottom rail. Create or Modify Rail Shapes Select the Create or Modify Rail Shapes button to enter and modify your collection of available rail shapes. Click the Next button on the end panel wizard. Inside Frame Edge Select the type of profile used for the inside edge of the end panel frame. Raised Panel Select the type of profile used for the end panel. Create or Modify Profiles Select the Create or Modify Profiles button to enter and modify your collection of available frame and panel profiles. Click the Next button on the end panel wizard. Panel Texture Select the Panel Texture button and choose a unique render texture to represent the panel of your end panel. You will only select a texture here when you don’t want the end panel material changing when different wood grain textures are selected for the room design. A good example for selecting a panel texture here would be if you are selecting a texture that would represent a glass end panel. No Grain Select this option if you want no grain to appear on the end panel. Vertical Grain Select this option if you want vertical grain to appear on the end panel. Horizontal Grain Select this option if you want horizontal grain to appear on the end panel. Click the Finished button on the End Panel wizard. Now that we have completed the End Panel Wizard, it is important that we generate the door/drawer/end panel graphics that represent the look in an elevation view. 2-50 Door and Drawer Graphics After a new door style wizard has been created and the parameters filled out, the graphical look of the new door and drawer face needs to be designed. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the Door Style radio button. 6. Pull down the combo box next to the Door/Drawer radio button and choose a door/drawer/end panel file. 7. Select the Edit button. 8. Select the Door/Drawer Elevation Graphic Details button from the Door/Drawer wizard. 9. Two doors and a single blank drawer panel now appear on the screen. The two panels on the right represent the base drawer and door style. The panel on the left represents the upper door style. 10. Select the Generate Default CAD button from the Main toolbar to generate the basic look of the door style from the options selected in the Door/Drawer wizard. 11. Select from the Panel Graphics for Elevations dialog the options you wanted displayed on door/drawer panels in an elevation view. 12. Select the OK button. 13. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, create any additional details for each of the door and drawer panels. 14. Select the Close button to save and exit the design. 2-51 Placing Cabinet Handle Markers A marker can be placed on the door design to identify the location of cabinet handles and pulls. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line combo box. 5. Select the Door Style radio button. 6. Pull down the combo box next to the Door Style radio button and choose a door/drawer/end panel file. 7. Select the Edit button. 8. Select the Door/Drawer Elevation Graphic Details button from the Door/Drawer wizard. 9. Select the Enhancements command from the CAD menu. 10. Select the Vertical Handle command from the Enhancements menu for a marker that will place handles and pulls vertically; or select the Horizontal Handle that will place handles and pulls horizontally. 11. Move the mouse to the desired door or drawer face and click the mouse at the desired handle location. 12. Continue this process for each door and drawer face. 13. Select the Close button and save the door and drawer design. 2-52 End Panel Graphics After a new door style parameter file has been created and the parameters filled out, the graphical look of the end panel face needs to be designed. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Manufacturers. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the Door Style radio button. 6. Pull down the combo box next to the Door Style radio button and choose a door/drawer/end panel file. 7. Select the Edit button. 8. Select the End Panel/Wainscot Elevation Details button from the End Panel wizard. 9. Two blank end panels now appear on the screen. The panel on the left represents the base end panel. The panel on the right represents the upper end panel. 10. Select the Generate Default CAD button from the Main toolbar to generate the basic look of the end panel style from the options selected in the End Panel wizard. 11. Select from the Panel Graphics for Elevations dialog the options you wanted displayed on end panels in an elevation view. 12. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, create any additional details for each of the end panels. 13. Select the Close button to save and exit the design. It is important to note when designing an end panel that you only design the look of the panel itself, not the stiles and rails. Creating Appliance Files Appliance files can be created to build a catalog of different appliances. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu. 3. Select a radio button in front of an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.). 4. Select the New button. 5. Enter the name of the new appliance file. 6. Answer all parameter questions in the Appliance Parameter dialog box. 7. Select the OK button. 2-53 Modifying Appliance Files The values in the appliance files can be modified. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu. 3. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired combo box. 4. Select the Edit button. 5. Edit the parameter questions in the Appliance Parameters dialog box. 6. Select the OK button. Copying Appliance Files The best way to create a new appliance file is to use an existing appliance file as a template. By using an existing appliance file as a template for the new file, you edit only the information that will be different between the files. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu. 3. Select the radio button in front of an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.). 4. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired combo box. 5. Select the Copy button. 6. Enter the name of the new appliance in the New Appliance dialog box. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Follow the steps for Modifying Appliance Files to modify the new appliance file. Deleting Appliance Files When an appliance file is no longer needed, it can be deleted. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu. 3. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired combo box. 4. Select the Delete button. 5. Select the OK button. 2-54 Creating Graphics for Appliance Files The user can create the custom graphical look of an appliance. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu. 3. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired combo box. 4. Select the Graphics button. 5. Select either the Left, Front, Right, Back, or Top button from the Main toolbar to view each of the appliance faces. 6. Create the look on the desired face using the tools from the CAD menu. 7. Continue this process for each of the appliance faces that you want to create custom graphics for. Printing Appliance Files You may find it necessary to print a copy of an appliance file. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Appliance command from the Setup menu. 3. Select an appliance type (i.e., Refrigerator, Cooktop, Dishwasher, etc.) and model from the desired combo box. 4. Select the Print button. 2-55 Pricing Pricing allows the entry of values used by the program for calculating proposals, quotes and order forms for a job. These prices include profit, overhead, tax percentages, markups and discount percentages; and cabinet and accessory prices. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. Profit/Overhead/Taxes Profit, overhead, and tax percentages are entered and used by the program for proposal and quote calculations. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Profit/Overhead/Taxes radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. Enter percentages for profit and overhead. 7. Enter a description and percentage for up to three tax rates. 8. Select the OK button. If profit and overhead are already included in your basic cabinet prices, enter a zero value for profit and overhead. Markups/Discounts A list of different markup and discount rates can be created and made available for selection before a proposal, quote or order form is calculated. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Markups/Discounts radio button. 5. Select the New button. 6. On the Markup/Discount dialog, select the Markup radio button if this is a markup; or the Discount radio button if this is a discount. 7. Enter a Description and Percentage for the markup or discount. 8. Under Apply Percentage to, select the check box in front of each item the markup or discount will apply to. 2-56 9. Under Apply to Percentage, select the appropriate check box as to whether profit, overhead or taxes will apply to the percentage. 10. Select the Hidden Price check box if you do not want the markup or discount to be printed as a line item on a proposal, quote or order form. This markup or discount will still be calculated as a percentage into each appropriate line item. 11. Select the OK button. 12. Continue this process for each markup or discount you want to create. Editing Markups and Discounts 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select the Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select a markup or discount from the Markup/Discount combo box. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. Make any necessary changes. 7. Select the OK button. Deleting Markups and Discounts 1. From the File menu select the Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select a markup or discount from the Markup/Discount combo box. 5. Select the Delete button. 2-57 Price Prompts Price prompts allow for the creation of prompted line items that are printed and calculated into the total price of a proposal, quote or order form. A good example of price prompts is items that are entered into a proposal, quote or order form that has a fixed price or a price that you want to be prompted for by the program. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Price Prompts radio button. 5. Select the New button. 6. On the Price Prompts dialog, enter a Description and Amount for the price prompt. If you want the program to prompt you for a price before the calculation of a proposal, quote or order form, enter a “0” in the Amount field. 7. Under Apply to Prompt, select the appropriate check box as to whether profit, overhead or taxes will apply to the prompt. 8. Select the OK button. Editing Price Prompts 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select a price prompt from the Price Prompts combo box. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. Make any necessary changes. 7. Select the OK button. Deleting Price Prompts 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select a price prompt from the Price Prompts combo box. 5. Select the Delete button. 2-58 Text Prompts Text prompts are questions asked by the program before printing of an order form. The responses to the text prompts are used by the program to fill out text prompt fields on the order form. Text prompt fields must be entered on the order form template for the program to print the text prompt responses. Refer to the Order Form template. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Text Prompts radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. Enter up to thirty text prompts on the Text Prompts dialog. 7. Select the OK button. Catalog Cabinet Pricing Before entering prices for a manufacturer’s catalog, a new manufacturer’s catalog must have already been created as described in Creating a New Manufacturer’s Catalog. Determining Catalog Cabinet Pricing Methods Before a catalog cabinet pricing method can be selected and prices entered for cabinets saved to the catalog, cabinet must first be designed and saved to the catalog. The purpose of this is twofold. First, it allows for the entry of unique cabinet names for each cabinet line for any given cabinet you saved to the catalog. Second, it lets the program know which cabinets saved to the catalog are available for each cabinet line. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets under the Cabinet Names column that have been saved to the catalog. 7. Select the Pricing Method command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the Price by Cabinet options to price cabinets with a single price for each cabinet unit, or the Price by Door/Drawer Count option to price cabinets as a price for each cabinet unit and a price for the door and drawer count found those cabinets. 2-59 Entering Catalog Cabinet Line Names 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets under the Cabinet Names column that have been saved to the catalog. 7. Click on a blank cell where the cabinet line intersects with the cabinet name and enter the name (or size) of the cabinet, as you want it to appear for that cabinet line. Leave the cell blank if you do not want a cabinet to be available for a given cabinet line. 8. Continue this process for each cabinet under each cabinet line. 9. After entering the cabinet names for each cabinet line, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 10. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. A row of asterisks in a cell indicates that there is either no face frame or frameless cabinet saved in the catalog for this cabinet and cabinet line. Arranging Catalog Cabinets Catalog cabinets can be moved to a new location in the grid. This allows you to arrange saved cabinet in the catalog in the same order as they are found in the manufacturer’s paper catalog for easy line name and pricing entry. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Select a number to the left of the cabinet name you want to move. 8. Select Move Row command from the Edit menu. 9. Select a number to the left of the cabinet name just below the location you want to move the cabinet name. 10. Continue this process for each cabinet you want to move. 11. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-60 Copying Line Names Many times cabinet names are the same from one line to another. By copying cabinet names from one line to another, you will save yourself time in entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Click on one of the cells in the cabinet line column that you will be copying the line names from. 8. Select Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 9. Click on one of the cells in the cabinet line column that you want to copy the line names to. 10. Continue this process for each cabinet line with like names. 11. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Editing Catalog Cabinet Line Prices using the Price by Cabinet Method 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line names of cabinets in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cell where the door style intersects with the cabinet name and enter a price for that cabinet with that door style. By entering -999 in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that this door style is not available for this cabinet. 11. Continue this process for each cabinet under each door style. 12. After entering the cabinet prices, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 13. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-61 Editing Catalog Cabinet Line Prices using the Price by Cabinet and Door/Drawer Method 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the Door and Drawer in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cell where the door style intersects with the Door name and enter a price for a door of that door style. By entering -999 in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that this door style is not available for this cabinet. 11. Continue this process for each door style. 12. Using the same process, enter drawer prices. 13. After entering door and drawer prices, select the Info command from the Edit menu. 14. The following screen displays a grid with line names of cabinets in the left column. Across the top of the grid is Door #, Drawer #, Weight, Volume, and Box Price for the selected cabinet line. 15. Click on a blank cell where the cabinet line name intersects with the Door # and enter a door count for this cabinet. 16. Click on a blank cell where the cabinet line name intersects with the Drawer # and enter a drawer count for this cabinet. 17. Click on a blank cell where the cabinet line name intersects with the Box Price and enter a box price for this cabinet. 18. Continue this process for each cabinet. 19. After entering the all information, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 20. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-62 Copying Cabinet Prices Many times cabinet prices are the same from one door style to another. By copying cabinet prices from one door style to another, you will save yourself time entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line names of cabinets in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on one of the cells in the door style column that you will be copying the prices from. 11. Select the Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 12. Click on one of the cells in the door style column that you want to copy the prices to. 13. Continue this process for each door style with like prices. 14. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 15. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Setting Filters When entering catalog cabinet line names and prices in the grid, all cabinets saved to the catalog are displayed on the screen. Sometimes you will find it helpful to focus on one specific cabinet type by setting a filter. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Select the Set Filters command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the cabinet type that you want displayed from the list. 9. Select the OK button. 2-63 Deleting Catalog Cabinets Cabinets saved to the cabinet catalog can be deleted from the computer when they are no longer needed. Warning: Be very cautious when deleting files from your computer. Once a file has been deleted, there is no way to bring it back. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Select a number to the left of the cabinet name you want to delete. 8. Select Delete Row command from the Edit menu. 9. Continue this process for each cabinet you want deleted. 10. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 11. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Custom Cabinet Pricing If the program is used for pricing custom cabinets, prices for each cabinet type must be entered. Before prices can be entered for custom cabinets, you must first describe your pricing method and enter your own unique cabinet names for each cabinet type. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Custom Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of each cabinet type in the Cabinet Names column. The Pricing column to the right displays the pricing method for each cabinet type. Select the pricing method that you want to use for each cabinet type. 7. Click on a blank cell where the cabinet line intersects with the cabinet name and enter the name of this type of cabinet, as you want it to appear on all printouts. For example, you might want to enter “WALL CABINET” in your cabinet line to the right of the program’s “UPPER” cabinet type. 8. Continue this process for each cabinet type under each cabinet line. 9. After entering the cabinet names for each cabinet line, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 10. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-64 Copying Line Names Many times cabinet names are the same from one line to another. By copying cabinet names from one line to another, you will save yourself time entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Click on one of the cell in the cabinet line column that you will be copying the line names from. 8. Select the Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 9. Click on one of the cells in the cabinet line column that you want to copy the line names to. 10. Continue this process for each cabinet line with like names. 11. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Editing Custom Cabinet Pricing 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Custom Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets and the pricing methods for each cabinet line. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line names of cabinets in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cell where the door style intersects with the cabinet name and enter a price for that cabinet with that door style. By entering a negative number in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that this door style is not available for this cabinet. 11. Continue this process for each cabinet under each door style. 12. After entering the cabinet prices, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 13. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-65 Copying Cabinet Prices Many times cabinet prices are the same from one door style to another. By copying cabinet prices from one door style to another, you will save yourself time entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line names of cabinets in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on one of the cell in the door style column that you will be copying the prices from. 11. Select the Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 12. Click on one of the cells in the door style column that you want to copy the prices to. 13. Continue this process for each door style with like prices. 14. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 15. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Manufacturer Accessories and Pricing Accessories available from the cabinet manufacturer are entered as manufacturer accessories. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Enter a descriptive name for all manufacturer accessories down the Accessory Name column. 8. Select the pricing method in the Pricing column for each accessory. The % symbol represents that the value entered for an accessory price will be a percentage of the price of the cabinet it is attached to. 9. Enter the manufacturer’s accessory order codes in each of the cabinet line columns. 10. After entering accessories, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 11. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-66 Arranging Manufacturer Accessories Accessories can be moved to a new location in the grid. This allows you to arrange accessories in the same order as they are found in the manufacturer’s paper catalog for easy line name and pricing entry. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select a number to the left of the accessory that you want to move. 8. Select Move Row command from the Edit menu. 9. Select a number to the left of the accessory just below the location to which you want to move the accessory. 10. Continue this process for each accessory that you want to move. 11. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Creating Accessory Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select the Categories command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the New button from the Category dialog. 9. Enter a category name. 10. Select the OK button. 11. Continue this process for each category you wish to create. 12. If sub-categories are desired, select a category name and the Sub Cats button from the Category dialog. 13. Select the New button from the Sub Categories dialog. 14. Enter a sub-category name. 15. Select the OK button. 2-67 Organizing Manufacturer Accessories using Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select categories and sub-categories for each accessory in the Category and Sub Category columns. 8. After entering categories and sub-categories for all accessories, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 9. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Copying Manufacturer Accessory Line Names Many times accessory order codes are the same from one line to another. By copying accessory order codes from one line to another, you will save yourself time as opposed to entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Click on one of the cells in the cabinet line column that you will be copying the order code names from. 8. Select the Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 9. Click on one of the cells in the cabinet line column that you want to copy the order codes to. 10. Continue this process for each cabinet line with like codes. 11. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-68 Entering Manufacturer Accessory Pricing 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line names of each accessory in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cells where the door style intersects with the accessory name, and enter a price for that accessory with that door style. By entering a negative number in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that the accessory is not available for this door style. 11. Continue this process for each accessory under each door style. 12. After entering the accessory prices, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 13. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Copying Manufacturer Accessory Prices Many times accessory prices are the same from one door style to another. By copying accessory prices from one door style to another, you will save yourself time entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line names of each accessory in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on one of the cells in the door style column that you will be copying the prices from. 11. Select the Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 12. Click on one of the cells in the door style column that you want to copy the prices to. 13. Continue this process for each door style with like prices. 14. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 15. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-69 Setting Filters When entering accessory names and prices in the grid, all accessories are displayed on the screen. Sometimes you will find it helpful to focus on one specific accessory type by setting a filter. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select Set Filters command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the accessory type that you want displayed from the list. 9. Select the OK button. Deleting Manufacturer Accessories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select a number to the left of the accessory that you want to delete. 8. Select the Delete Row command from the Edit menu. 9. Continue this process for each accessory you want deleted. 10. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 11. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-70 Generic Accessories and Pricing Accessories purchased from an outside source are entered as generic accessories. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Generic Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Enter a descriptive name for all accessories down the Accessory Name column. 8. Enter an order code for all accessories down the Order Name column. 9. Enter a price for all accessories down the Price column. 10. Select the pricing method in the Pricing column for each accessory. The % symbol represents that the value entered for an accessory price will be a percentage of the price of the cabinet it is attached to. 11. After entering accessories, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Arranging Generic Accessories Accessories can be moved to a new location in the grid. This allows you to arrange accessories in the same order as they are found in the manufacturer’s paper catalog for easy line name and pricing entry. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Generic Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select a number to the left of the accessory you want to move. 8. Select the Move Row command from the Edit menu. 9. Select a number to the left of the accessory just below the location to which you want to move the accessory. 10. Continue this process for each accessory you want to move. 11. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-71 Creating Generic Accessory Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Generic Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select the Categories command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the New button from the Category dialog. 9. Enter a category name. 10. Select the OK button. 11. Continue this process for each category you wish to create. 12. If sub-categories are desired, select a category name and the Sub Cats button from the Category dialog. 13. Select the New button from the Sub Categories dialog. 14. Enter a sub-category name. 15. Select the OK button. Organizing Generic Accessories using Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Generic Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select categories and sub-categories for each accessory in the Category and Sub Category columns. 8. After entering categories and sub-categories for all accessories, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 9. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-72 Setting Filters When entering accessory names and prices in the grid, all accessories are displayed on the screen. Sometimes you will find it helpful to focus on one specific accessory type by setting a filter. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Generic Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select the Set Filters command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the accessory type that you want displayed from the list. 9. Select the OK button. Deleting Generic Accessories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Generic Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select a number to the left of the accessory that you want to delete. 8. Select Delete Row command from the Edit menu. 9. Continue this process for each accessory you want deleted. 10. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 11. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-73 Modifications and Pricing Some cabinet manufacturers allow customization of their stock cabinet line. In some cases when a stock cabinet is modified, a prefix or suffix is added to the stock cabinet code and an up-charge is added to the cabinet’s cost. The following details the process of setting prefix and suffix codes and related prices for cabinet modifications. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modifications radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the modification grid. 7. Enter a descriptive name for all modifications down the Modification Name column. 8. Select the pricing method in the Pricing column for each modification. The % symbol represents that the value entered for a modification’s price will be a percentage of the price of the cabinet it is attached to. 9. Select the location of the modification code for a cabinet from the Locator column for each modification. Selecting Item, indicates that the modification designation should be added as an additional line item, under the cabinet code on all printouts. Selecting Prefix, indicates that the modification code should be added as a prefix to the cabinet code and the price combined with the cabinet price. Selecting Suffix, indicates that the modification code should be added as a suffix to the cabinet code and the price combined with the cabinet price. Selecting Replace, indicates that the modification code should replace the cabinet code and the price combined with the cabinet price. 10. Enter the modification order codes in each of the cabinet line columns. 11. After entering modifications, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-74 Arranging Modifications Modifications can be moved to a new location in the grid. This allows you to arrange modifications in the same order as they are found in the manufacturer’s paper catalog for easy line name and pricing entry. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modifications radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the modification grid. 7. Select a number to the left of the modification that you want to move. 8. Select the Move Row command from the Edit menu. 9. Select a number to the left of the modification just below the location to which you want to move the modification. 10. Continue this process for each modification that you want to move. 11. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Creating Modification Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Modification grid. 7. Select the Categories command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the New button from the Category dialog. 9. Enter a category name. 10. Select the OK button. 11. Continue this process for each category that you wish to create. 12. If sub-categories are desired, select a category name and the Sub Cats button from the Category dialog. 13. Select the New button from the Sub Categories dialog. 14. Enter a sub-category name. 15. Select the OK button. 2-75 Organizing Modification using Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Modification grid. 7. Select categories and sub-categories for each modification in the Category and Sub Category columns. 8. After entering categories and sub-categories for all modifications, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 9. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Copying Modification Line Names Many times modification codes are the same from one line to another. By copying modification codes from one line to another, you will save yourself time entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Modification grid. 7. Click on one of the cells in the cabinet line column that you will be copying the modification codes from. 8. Select the Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 9. Click on one of the cells in the cabinet line column that you want to copy the modification codes to. 10. Continue this process for each cabinet line with like codes. 11. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-76 Entering Modification Pricing 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Modification grid. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line code names of each modification in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cells where the door style intersects with the modification name and enter a price for that modification with that door style. By entering a negative number in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that the modification is not available for this door style. 11. Continue this process for each modification under each door style. 12. After entering the modification prices, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 13. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Copying Modification Prices Many times modification prices are the same from one door style to another. By copying modification prices from one door style to another, you will save yourself time entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Modification grid. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line names of each modification in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on one of the cells in the door style column that you will be copying the prices from. 11. Select the Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 12. Click on one of the cells in the door style column that you want to copy the prices to. 13. Continue this process for each door style with like prices. 14. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 15. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-77 Setting Filters When entering modification names and prices in the grid, all modifications are displayed on the screen. Sometimes you will find it helpful to focus on one specific modification type by setting a filter. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Modification grid. 7. Select the Set Filters command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the modification type that you want displayed from the list. 9. Select the OK button. Deleting Modifications 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the modification grid. 7. Select a number to the left of the modification that you want to delete. 8. Select the Delete Row command from the Edit menu. 9. Continue this process for each modification that you want deleted. 10. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 11. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-78 Fillers and Pricing Cabinet fillers purchased from the manufacturer are entered separately from the cabinets in the catalog. Fillers are priced by the program looking in the following Filler grid for the matching filler size or the next largest filler size. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Fillers radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Filler grid. 7. Enter the various widths and heights of filler available from the manufacturer under the Width and Height columns. 8. Click on the check box under the “C” column to identify any filler sizes as corner fillers. 9. Enter the filler order codes in each of the cabinet line columns. 10. After entering fillers, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 11. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Copying Filler Line Names Many times filler codes are the same from one line to another. By copying filler codes from one line to another, you will save yourself time entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Fillers radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Filler grid. 7. Click on one of the cells in the cabinet line column that you will be copying the filler codes from. 8. Select the Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 9. Click on one of the cells in the cabinet line column that you want to copy the filler codes to. 10. Continue this process for each cabinet line with like codes. 11. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-79 Entering Filler Prices 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Fillers radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Filler grid. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line code names of each filler in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cells where the door style intersects with the filler name and enter a price for that filler with that door style. By entering a negative number in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that the filler is not available for this door style. 11. Continue this process for each filler under each door style. 12. After entering the filler prices, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 13. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Copying Filler Prices Many times filler prices are the same from one door style to another. By copying filler prices from one door style to another, you will save yourself time entering them by way of the keyboard. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Fillers radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Filler grid. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The following screen displays a grid with the line names of each filler in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on one of the cells in the door style column that you will be copying the prices from. 11. Select the Copy Column command from the Edit menu. 12. Click on one of the cells in the door style column that you want to copy the prices to. 13. Continue this process for each door style with like prices. 14. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 15. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-80 Deleting Fillers 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Fillers radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following screen displays the Filler grid. 7. Select a number to the left of the filler that you want to delete. 8. Select the Delete Row command from the Edit menu. 9. Continue this process for each filler that you want deleted. 10. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 11. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 2-81 Proposal Wording Bid Wording is the contractual text used by the program to print on a proposal for a customer. Separate wording can be used on both the top and bottom portion of the proposal. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Proposal Wording radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The following dialog is divided into two parts - Upper Text Lines and Lower Text Lines. 7. Click on the Upper Text Lines text box and type in the wording, as you want it to appear at the top of your bid. 8. Click on the Lower Text Lines text box and type in the wording, as you want it to appear at the bottom of your bid. 9. Select the OK button. Creating User Graphic Files User Graphics allow the creation of moldings, floor patterns, windows, entrance doors, color palettes and 3D objects. The user may also import wallpaper patterns. Become familiar with the CAD features found in the program. Most of the User Graphics options use CAD extensively. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select a radio button in front of the graphic type being created (Molding, Flooring, Windows, etc.). 4. Select the New button. 5. Enter the name of the new graphic file. 6. Using the CAD options, create the desired graphical look. 7. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 2-82 Modifying User Graphic Files The designs in user-created graphic files can be modified. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select a radio button in front of the graphic type being edited (Molding, Flooring, Windows, etc.). 4. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose a file. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. Edit the graphics using the CAD options. 7. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. Copying User Graphic Files Sometimes it is quicker to use an existing graphic file as a template for creating a new file. By using an existing graphic file as a template for a new file, only the information that will be different needs to be edited. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose the graphic file to copy. 4. Select the Copy button. 5. Enter the name of the new graphic file. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Follow the steps for Modifying User Graphic Files to modify the new graphic file. Deleting User Graphic Files When a user-created graphic file is no longer needed, it can be deleted. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select a radio button in front of the graphic type deleted (Molding, Flooring, Windows, etc.). 4. Pull down the combo box next to the selected radio button and choose a graphic file. 5. Select the Delete button. 2-83 Molding Graphics Molding profiles can be created and displayed on the tops of wall, pantry, and special cabinets. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select the radio button in front of Molding. 4. Select the New button. 5. Enter a description for the molding. 6. Enter the width and height of the molding. If the molding is built-up from several pieces, indicate the overall molding size when all pieces are assembled. 7. Enter the molding offset. This is the distance the molding is pulled down from the top front edge of the cabinet. 8. Enter a labor price for the molding. 9. Enter a material price for the molding. 10. Enter a waste factor for the molding. 11. Select the OK button. 12. A dashed bounding box representing the width and height of the molding is now displayed on the screen. The upper left corner of the box will be where the top of the molding is located. The lower right hand corner of the box will be the location of the bottom part of the molding where it meets the cabinet front. 13. Select Preferences from the CAD menu. 14. Select 3D Enabled from the Preferences dialog. 15. Select Cursor Control from the CAD menu. 16. Select Snap Grid Size from the Cursor Control dialog and enter a grid value of “.125”. 17. Select Polyline from the CAD menu. 18. From the upper left corner of the molding box, move the cursor and click at each line segment location until you have formed your molding shape. 19. To finish the last line segment, press the right mouse button and select the End Polyline command from the Pop Up menu. The program finishes the polyline in the lower right corner. 20. Click on any line segments that you want to shape, and press the right mouse button selecting the Modify Shape command from the Pop Up menu. 21. Select a shape from the CAD Modify dialog. 22. Select the OK button. 23. Continue this process for all curved-shaped line segments. 24. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 25. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. The molding face profile must always be drawn from the upper left corner to the lower right corner and facing the left of the screen. 2-84 Molding Profile Example In this example we will be drawing a 2” x2” crown molding. 1. Select the radio button in front of Molding. 2. Select the New button. 3. Enter “2” for the depth and “2” for the height of the molding. 4. Enter a molding offset. This is the distance the bottom of the molding will be held down from the top of the cabinet. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Select Preferences from the CAD menu. 7. Select 3D Enabled from the Preferences dialog. 8. Select Cursor Control from the CAD menu. 9. Select Snap Grid Size from the Cursor Control dialog and enter a grid value of “.125”. 10. Select Polyline from the CAD menu. 11. From the upper left corner, move the mouse down until the X coordinate displays 0" and the Y coordinate displays 1-3/4" and click the mouse. 12. Move the mouse down until the X coordinate displays 1-1/2” and the Y coordinate displays 1/2" and click the mouse. 13. Move the mouse down until the X coordinate displays 1-1/2” and the Y coordinate displays 17/8" and click the mouse. 14. Move the mouse down until the X coordinate displays 1-7/8” and the Y coordinate displays 0", and click the mouse. 2-85 15. To finish the last line segment, press the right mouse button and select the End Polyline command from the Pop Up menu. The program finishes the polyline in the lower right corner. 16. Click on the longest diagonal line segment to select it, and press the right mouse button and select the Modify Shape command from the Pop Up menu. 17. Select the S-Curve radio button from the CAD Modify dialog. 18. Select the OK button. 19. With the s-curve line still selected, press the right mouse button and select the Reverse Curve command from the Pop Up menu. 20. Click on the shorter diagonal line segment to select it, and press the right mouse button and select the Modify Shape command from the Pop Up menu. 21. Select the Curve radio button from the CAD Modify dialog. 22. Select the OK button. Because we don't want the back lines of the molding detail to show in perspective and elevation views, it's important to turn off the 3D Enabled option from the CAD Preference dialog before drawing any more lines. Any work done to the front of the molding should be done with the 3D Enabled option turned on, so that it will display in elevations and perspectives. All CAD work done to the back of the molding should be done with the 3D Enabled option turned off. Draw the back of the molding with a polygon line. Flooring Graphics A repeating floor pattern can be created and displayed in a room layout. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select the radio button in front of Flooring. 4. Select the New button. 5. Enter the width and length of the repeating floor pattern. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create a repeating floor pattern within the floor outline. 8. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar to save and exit the design. 2-86 Window Graphics Custom window designs can be created and displayed in a room layout. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select the radio button in front of Windows. 4. Select the New button. 5. Enter the width and height of the window. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create a window design within the window outline. 8. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar to save and exit the design. Entrance Door Graphics Custom entrance door designs can be created and displayed in a room layout. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select the radio button in front of Entrance Doors. 4. Select the New button. 5. Enter the width and height of the entrance door. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create an entrance door design within the entrance door outline. 8. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar to save and exit the design. 2-87 Color Graphics Colors used by the program for different items in a cabinet and room design can be changed. Separate color files can be created and selected during a room design to display different color combinations. The default color file used by the program is called Colors. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select the radio button in front of Colors. 4. Select the New button. 5. Enter the name of the new colors file. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Select a color from the Custom Palette. 8. Click the fill and outline color buttons for each item using the selected color. 9. Select the OK button to save and exit the color file. Changing the Custom Palette 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select a file from the Colors combo box. 4. Select the Edit button. 5. Double click on a color in the Custom Palette. 6. Select a new color from the Change Color dialog box. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Continue this process for any colors that you wish to change in your Custom Palette. 9. Select the OK button to save and exit the color file. Changing Printer Line Weights Line weights for different items being sent to the printer can be controlled. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select a file from the Colors combo box. 4. Select the Edit button. 5. Select the Line Weight button from the Color dialog box. 6. Select a printer line weight for each of the displayed options. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Continue this process for all color files that you wish to change. 2-88 Changing Wood Grain Colors Wood grain is made up of four different colors. Changing any of the four colors allows you to change the type of stain color the wood is displaying. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select a file from the Colors combo box. 4. Select the Edit button. 5. Double click on a color in the Wood Palette. 6. Select a new color from the Change Color dialog box. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Continue this process for each of the Wood Palette colors until the desired wood color is achieved. 9. Select the OK button to save and exit the color file. 2-89 3D Object Graphics 3D objects such as tables, chairs, lighting, etc., have been supplied with the program. The 3D DXF and VRML files can also be imported to compliment your 3D object list. The 3D representation of the object cannot be changed. You can change the color of the object and the floor plan and elevation representation of the object. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select User Graphics. 3. Select a 3D object from the 3D Object combo box. 4. Select the Edit button. 5. Change the object’s name if desired. 6. Change the object’s reference if desired. 7. Change the color of the object’s layers. 8. Select the OK button. Changing a 3D Object’s Graphics 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select User Graphics. 3. Select a 3D object from the 3D Object combo box. 4. Select the Graphics button. 5. Select a view from the View buttons on the Main toolbar. 6. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create a 2D representation of the selected view. 7. Continue this process for each view. 8. Select the Close button to save and exit the design. User-Created 3-D Objects Besides the 3D objects supplied with the program, the user can create simple 3-D cube objects. This can be used for creating 3-D objects that are cube shaped such as microwaves, toasters, books, shower stalls, light boxes, outlets, etc. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select User Graphics. 3. Select the 3D Object radio button. 4. Select the New button. 5. Enter the description for the object. 6. Enter the size for the object. 7. Enter the type of reference used. 8. Select the OK button. 2-90 9. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, create a 2D representation of the selected view. 10. Continue this process for each view. 11. Select the Close button to save and exit the design. Importing 3D Objects There are many companies in the marketplace that supply their products in a 3D computer file format (i.e.; windows, doors, plumbing fixtures, office furniture, home furnishings, kitchen furnishings, etc.). You now have a way to import these items into your Cabnetware program as 3D objects. The file formats that we currently support for importing objects are 3D DXF and WRL files. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the User Graphics command from the Setup menu. 3. Select the 3D Objects radio button from the User Graphics dialog 4. Select the Import button. 5. Select a drive and folder for the location of the 3D DXF or WRL file that you wish to import. 6. Select a 3D DXF or WRL file. 7. Select the Open button. 8. Enter a description for the imported object. 9. Enter a scale factor for the import. Entering “1” will import the object at the same scale that the object was created. Entering a fraction, such as “.5” will import the object at half scale. Entering “2” will double the size of the object. 10. Select the Generate Graphics check box if you want the program to generate the floorplan and elevation graphics of the object as it is imported. 11. Select the Smooth Faces check box if you want the program to round the edges of connecting faces of the object as it is imported. This option will give the object more rounded surfaces. 12. Select the 2 Sided Faces check box if you want faces to be placed on both sides of the object as it is imported. Select this option if you find see-through holes in your object after it is imported. 13. Select the OK button. The imported object is now available on your 3D object list. At this time you can edit the layers of the 3D object by selecting the Edit button, or change the floorplan or elevational look of the object by selecting the Graphics button. If the 3D object you are importing contains a large number of layers and surfaces, the import process could take some time. 2-91 Pull and Handle Graphics The elevation representation and colors used to display cabinet pulls and handles can be changed. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select a pull or handle from the Pull/Handles combo box. 4. Select the Graphics button. 5. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create an elevation representation of the pull or handle. 6. Select the Close button from the Main toolbar to save and exit the design. Wallpaper Graphics Wallpaper samples can be scanned with a scanner and imported into the program to represent room walls in designs. Scanning Wallpaper 1. Scan only the repeating portion of the wallpaper sample into a paint program. 2. Reduce the pixel size of the image to 250 X 250 for a total of 62,500 pixels in the paint program. You can change the number of pixels that represent the height and width, but the total number of pixels can equal no more than 63,000 pixels. 3. Mask any unwanted edges of the wallpaper image with black. The program will not display any edges of the wallpaper that have a black mask. 4. Save the image as a .PCX file with a .PCX extension. Importing Wallpaper 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select User Graphics from the Setup menu. 3. Select the radio button in front of Wallpaper. 4. Select the Import button. 5. Select the drive where the .PCX file is located. 6. Select the directory where the .PCX file is located. 7. Select a .PCX file. 8. Enter the size of the sample, as you want it to appear on a wall in the Convert to Scale edit box. 9. Select the OK button. 2-92 Mechanical Symbol Graphics Mechanical symbols are two-dimensional architectural symbols that can be created and placed in a floor plan or elevation view. Electrical, plumbing and HVAC are good examples of mechanical symbols. Creating Mechanical Symbols 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select User Graphics. 3. Select the radio button in front of Mechanical. 4. Select the New button. 5. Enter the width and height of the mechanical symbol. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Using the options found on the CAD menu, create a mechanical symbol within the window outline. 8. Select the Close button to save and exit the design. 2-93 Customer Information Customer information is a database of customers, contractors, architects and designers. This information is used to complete job-related information and reports. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Customer Information. 3. Select the New button. 4. Select whether the information about to be entered will be for a Customer, Contractor or Architect/Designer. 5. Enter all applicable Customer information. 6. Enter all applicable Ship To information. 7. Enter all applicable Bill To information. 8. Enter any applicable Notes. 9. Select the OK button. Editing Customers 1. Select the customer being edited from the customer list. 2. Select the Edit button. 3. Make all necessary changes. 4. Select the OK button. Deleting Customers 1. Select the customer being deleted from the customer list. 2. Select the Delete button. 2-94 Render Lighting Lighting effects can be created or modified in the program to be placed in a room design. The placement of these lights control the lighting effects displayed in a rendered view. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Render Lighting from the Setup menu. 3. Select the New button. 4. Select the Directional Light radio button to create a lighting effect similar to sunlight coming into a room. Select the Point Light radio button to create a lighting effect similar to a light bulb casting light in all direction. Select the Spot Light radio button to create a lighting effect similar to a spotlight shining a focused beam of light in one direction. 5. Enter a description for the light. 6. Enter the height of the light effect above the floor. 7. Enter the brightness of the lighting effect. 0.00 (dark) – 2.00 (bright) is the range. 8. If the lighting effect is a spot light, enter softness of the outer edge of a spot light as it hits a surface in the Drop Off Rate field. 0.00 (hard edge) – 10.00 (soft edge) is the range. 9. If the lighting effect is a spotlight, enter the angle of the light cone in the Cut Off Angle field. 10. Select the compass direction of the light, as it will show in a room. 11. Select the elevation angle of a spotlight, as it will show in a room. 12. Select the color of the lighting effect. 13. Select the OK button. Modifying Render Lighting 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Render Lighting from the Setup menu. 3. Select the Edit button. 4. Make all necessary changes. 5. Select the OK button. Copying Render Lighting 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Render Lighting from the Setup menu. 3. Select the lighting effect that you want to use as a template to create a new lighting effect. 4. Select the Copy button. 5. Enter the name of the lighting effect file. 6. Select the OK button. 2-95 Deleting Render Lighting 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Render Lighting from the Setup menu. 3. Select the Delete button. 2-96 Render Textures Render textures are computer-scanned Bitmap (BMP) images that are imported into the program. These images are used during the rendering of a room to show a true representation of actual materials on cabinet and room surfaces. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Render Textures command from the Setup menu. Entering Render Texture Categories Categories are a very good way of organizing your textures. A good method for categorizing textures would be by texture types (Counter Tops, Wood Grain, Wallpaper, etc.); or by company (Corian, Wilsonart, Formica, etc.). The steps for adding a category are: 1. Select the Categories button. 2. Select the New button. 3. Enter the name of the new category. 4. Select the OK button. Editing Render Texture Categories 1. Select the Categories button. 2. Select a category name from the list. 3. Select the Edit button. 4. Edit the category name. 5. Select the OK button. Deleting Render Texture Categories 1. Select the Categories button. 2. Select a category name from the list. 3. Select the Delete button. 4. Select the OK button. A category cannot be deleted until all textures in that category have been deleted or moved to another category. 2-97 Entering Render Textures 1. Select a category under which the new texture is to be added. 2. Select the New button. 3. Enter the render texture description. 4. Select the Bitmap button and choose a BMP file to be imported as a texture. 5. Select the Decal option if you want the texture to cover the surface of an object hiding its base color. Not selecting the Decal option will cause the base color of an object to blend with the texture. 6. Enter the X and Y size of the texture, as you want it to appear in a cabinet and room design. Entering a “1” for both the X and Y size will cause the bitmap to stretch to fit the object it is being selected for. 7. Enter the rotation of the texture. 8. Determine a brightness for the texture. 9. Determine a shininess for the texture. 10. Determine the highlight size of lighting reflection for the texture. 11. Select the Use Default option to use the base color for rendering an object. 12. Select a material brightness with the Brightness slider. 13. Select a material shininess with the Shininess slider. 14. Select a material highlight size with the Highlight Size slider. 15. Select the Custom Color button to select a custom base color for rendering an object. 16. Select the Advance button to display further rendering options in the dialog. 17. Select the OK button. Editing Textures 1. Select the category that the texture is located under. 2. Select a texture. 3. Select the Edit button. 4. Make all necessary changes. 5. Select the OK button. Changing Texture Categories 1. Select the category that the texture is located under. 2. Select a texture. 3. Select the Edit button. 4. Pick a new category from the Category list. 5. Select the OK button. 2-98 Deleting Textures 1. Select the category that the texture is located under. 2. Select a texture. 3. Select the Delete button. 4. Select the OK button. 2-99 Password Password protection controls access to sensitive areas of the program; i.e., pricing, parameters, employee information, etc. Creating Password Protection 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Password. 3. Select the check boxes in front of the areas requiring password protection. 4. Select the Password button. 5. Enter a password. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Verify the password by re-typing it. 8. Select the OK button. Changing the Password 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Password. 3. Enter the old password. 4. Select the Password button. 5. Enter a new password. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Verify the new password by re-typing it. 8. Select the OK button. Removing Password Protection 1. Select the Password button. 2. Without entering a password, select the OK button. 3. Without verifying the password, select the OK button. It is important that the password be remembered. Once a password is set, it cannot be changed unless the original password is known. 2-100 Chapter 3 Features Starting a New Room Design Before beginning a room and cabinet design, you must first create a new room window. 1. Select the New Room command from the File menu, or select the New Room button from the Main toolbar. 2. Enter the name of the new room. 3. Select a manufacturer, cabinet line, layout parameter file, and door styles from the Room Default dialog box. 4. Select the Information tab. 5. Fill out all necessary room information from the Information dialog box. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Begin entering walls from the Wall menu. Starting a Quick Job A quick job allows the entry of saved catalog cabinets, custom cabinets, and accessories into a room for a job without designing a room. The selected cabinets and accessories can be used to generate a proposal, quote, or order form. Select the New Room command from the File menu, or select the New Room button from the Main toolbar. Enter the name of the new room. Select a manufacturer, cabinet line, layout parameter file, and door styles from the Room Default dialog box. Select the Quick Job check box. Select the Information tab. Fill out all necessary room information from the Information dialog box. Select the OK button. Begin picking cabinets and accessories. 3-1 Entering Room Defaults When a new room is started, the program prompts for the room defaults. The room defaults consist of the manufacturer, cabinet line, door style, and parameters that will be used for the room design. 1. Select the New Room command from the File menu, or select the New Room button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the Manufacturer tab. 3. Enter the name of the new room. 4. Select the Manufacturer required for the new room. 5. Select the Cabinet Line required for the new room. 6. Select a Layout parameter for the new room. 7. Select a Base Door Style for the new room. 8. Select an Upper Door Style for the new room. 9. Enter a value for Room Quantity. 10. Enter a cabinet start number. 11. Select the Information tab. 12. Fill out all necessary room information from the Information dialog box. 13. Select the OK button. 14. Begin entering walls from the Wall menu. Changing Room Defaults Sometimes a previously entered room will need the defaults changed from those that were selected when the room was first designed. Select the Open Room command from the File menu to open a previously saved room. Select the Room Defaults command from the Modify menu. Change the Cabinet Line, Door Styles, Layout parameter, and room information in the Room Default dialog box. Select the OK button on the Room Defaults dialog box. Select the Save or Save As command from the File menu, or choose the Save button from the Main toolbar to save the room default changes. The manufacturer cannot be changed once a room is started. 3-2 Entering Job Information Once a room is saved to a job, information can be entered concerning the job. 1. With a current room loaded and saved to a job, select the Job Information command from the Modify menu. 2. Select the Customer button to access customer information from the customer database, or enter customer information manually. 3. Select the Contractor to access contractor information from the customer database, or enter contractor information manually. 4. Select the Architect/Designer button to access Architect or Designer information from the customer database, or enter Architect/Designer information manually. 5. Enter Ship to information. 6. Enter Job information. 7. Enter any job notes. 8. Select the OK button to automatically save the information with the job. Opening a Job and Room File To view or modify a saved room design, you must first open a job and room file. 1. Select the Open Room command from the File menu, or select the Open Room button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the drive where the job and room file is located from the Open Room dialog box. 3. Select the directory where the job and file is located. 4. Select a job from the Job list. 5. Select a room from the Room list. 6. Select the OK button. Both a job file and a room file must be selected to open a room. Closing a Design A design can be closed without quitting the program. If a design is displayed in more than one window, the program closes all windows containing the active design. • Select the Close Room command from the File menu, or choose the Close Room button from the Main toolbar. Warning: If the design is not saved before choosing the Close Room option, the program prompts you to save the design. If you changed the design since it was last saved, the program prompts you to save the design. If you close a design without saving it, all changes since it was last saved are lost. 3-3 Saving a Design The current room and cabinet design can be saved to disk by using either the Save or Save As command. 1. Select the Save or Save As command from the File menu, or choose the Save button from the Main toolbar. 2. From the Save As dialog box, select a drive in which to store the document. 3. Select the directory where the document is to be stored. 4. Enter the name of the job. 5. Select the OK button. Updating Saved Room Designs To routinely save modifications performed to the active design with the same file name and path. • Select the Save command from the File menu, or choose the Save button from the Main toolbar. This automatically saves all changes since the design was last saved. It is very important to routinely save your work as you progress on a job. A good rule of thumb is to save your current room design about every ten minutes. This insures that if there is an interruption to the power supply, you lose only a minimal amount of work. Saving an Existing Room Design to a New Room or Job Sometimes it is necessary to save a copy of a previously saved room to a new room, new job, or both. This can be useful for making several copies of the same floor plan to show a client different cabinet layouts. 1. Select the Save As command from the File menu. 2. From the Save As dialog box, select a job to store the design to, or enter a new job name. 3. Select the OK button. Saving a Room Design to a Different Location Sometimes it may be necessary to save a design to a different location. 1. Select the Save As command from the File menu. 2. From the Save As dialog box, select a drive to store the design to. 3. Select a directory where the document is to be stored. 4. Select the OK button. 3-4 Job Copy All rooms from a single job can be copied to a new job. This is useful if you are using the same room and cabinet designs in different jobs. Select the Open Room command from the File menu, or select the Open Room button. Select the drive where the job and room file is located from the Open Room dialog box. Select the directory where the job file is located. Select a job from the Job list. Select the Copy Job button. Enter a new job name. Select the OK button. Saving Cabinets to a Catalog Cabinets can be saved to a catalog for two reasons. One reason would be for a custom cabinet manufacturer who designs specialized cabinets and wants to save them for future retrieval. The second reason for saving cabinets to a catalog is for manufacturers or dealers that design with a stock line of cabinets. Before the first cabinet can be saved to the catalog, you will need to run the Catalog Check command found on the Utility menu. 1. Select a cabinet to be saved to the catalog. 2. Select the Save Cabinet to Catalog command from the File menu, or click the right button and choose the Save to Catalog command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Select a category from the Category list, or create a new category by selecting the New Category button. 4. Enter a cabinet name. 5. Select the OK button. Saving a Group of Cabinets to a Catalog 1. Without selecting a cabinet, select the Save Cabinet to Catalog command from the File menu. 2. Select a cabinet when prompted. 3. Select a category from the Category list, or create a new category by selecting the New Category button. 4. Enter a cabinet name. 5. Select the Keep Picking Cabinet check box. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Select another cabinet and continue the process. 3-5 Exporting Graphic Files Room views can be exported to a BMP file, DXF file, VRML file, or to the program's slide show. Exporting a BMP File A BMP file can be used in many popular paint programs for adding additional color, design, or detail. This is also useful for saving multiple room and perspective views to a file before a client arrives. The view can then be quickly viewed by using the Saved Images (BMP) command from the View menu. 1. Pick the desired view from the View menu, or choose a view from the View toolbar. 2. Select the Export command from the File menu. 3. Select the Saved Images (BMP) command from the Export menu. 4. Enter a path and file name with a BMP extension. 5. Select the OK button. Exporting a 2D DXF File A 2D DXF file can be used in many popular CAD programs for adding additional CAD elements. 1. From any view, select the Export command from the File menu. 2. Select the 2D DXF command from the Export menu. 3. Enter a path and file name with a DXF extension. 4. Select the Save button. Exporting a 3D DXF File A 3D DXF file can be used in many popular CAD programs for additional design and rendering work. 1. From any view, select the Export command from the File menu. 2. Select the 3D DXF command from the Export menu. 3. Enter a path and file name with a DXF extension. 4. Select the Save button. Exporting a VRML File A VRML file can be used in many popular graphic and website programs for displaying design and rendering work. From any view, select the Export command from the File menu. Select the VRML command from the Export menu. Enter a path and file name with a VRML extension. Select the OK button. 3-6 Exporting a Slide Show File A slide show file is used by the Slide Show command on the Options menu to display a collection of saved floor plans, elevations, perspectives, etc. This feature is useful for displaying your design work in a showroom environment. 1. Pick the desired view from the View menu, or choose a view from the View toolbar. 2. Select the Export command from the File menu. 3. Select the Slide Show command from the Export menu. The Slide Show command on the Export menu automatically saves the current view as the last image in the slide show. The file format for the slide show is SLIDE701.BMP. The file format must contain the word SLIDE. The number following the word SLIDE represents the number of seconds you want the file to be displayed on the screen for. The files are automatically saved with a seven, to display the file for "7" seconds. The last two digits are the slide number. The program first looks for slide "01", and then "02", etc., up to a total of 99 slides. Because the program uses a standard BMP format, it is possible to create graphics files with any program that is capable of saving an image to a BMP-file format. You can create picture or text screens or even scan pictures from a scanner to be used in your slide show presentation. Printing a Design Before printing for the first time, you must connect the printer to the computer or network and select the desired printer. To install a printer, see your Printer or Windows documentation. To select a printer, see the Printer Setup dialog box. Printing the Current View 1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the Current View radio button. 3. Specify any printing options. 4. Select the OK button. Printing Floor Plans and Elevations The floor plan and all elevations can be printed at one time for the current room design. 1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the Floor Plan and Elevation radio button. 3. Specify any printing options. 4. Select the OK button. 3-7 Printing in Color 1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the Print in Color check box. 3. Specify any printing options. 4. Select the OK button. Printing in color with wood grain or wallpaper displayed will take some time depending on your printer or printer setup. Printing to Fit The current view can be printed to fit the printer’s selected paper size. 1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the Fit radio button. 3. Specify any printing options. 4. Select the OK button. Printing to Scale The current view can be printed to the scale set in your Preference dialog. 1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the Scale radio button. 3. Specify any printing options. 4. Select the OK button. Printing to Window The current view can be printed at its current size in relationship to its window. This feature is useful when you want to print a zoomed up or zoomed down view in relationship to its current window. 1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or select the Print button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the Window radio button. 3. Specify any printing options. 4. Select the OK button. It is a good idea to save your design before printing. This insures that if a printer error or other problem should occur, you will not lose your work. 3-8 Selecting Printers or Output Devices Room views, proposals, quotes, order forms, etc., can be printed on any printer supported by Windows with a printer driver. If you have a Fax/Modem card and a Windows Fax program you can fax drawings, cutting lists, estimates, contracts; etc., directly through your Cabnetware program. 1. Select the Printer Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Printer Setup dialog box; select the printer, plotter, or Fax driver from the list of available drivers. 3. Select the desired paper orientation, paper size, and paper source. 4. Select the Options button to select any special features unique to the selected device driver. 5. Select the OK button. Emailing Room Images Floor plans and elevations can be emailed from within the program. This option only works if you are using a Microsoft Windows email service like Outlook or Outlook Express. Contact you local email service concerning implementation of your email service within Outlook or Outlook Express. If you cannot hook up your email service to Outlook or Outlook Express, a copy of the email file will be placed in the \cabware\email folder for emailing manually. Emailing the Current View 1. Select the Email Room Images command from the File menu 2. Select the Current View radio button. 3. Select the OK button. Printing Floor Plans and Elevations The floor plan and all elevations can be emailed at one time for the current room design. 1. Select the Email Room Images command from the File menu 2. Select the Floor Plan and Elevation radio button. 3. Select the OK button. All views emailed are zipped into a single file. This reduces the size of that attached images being emailed. The recipient of the email will need a program such as WinZip to unzip the contents of the file. WinZip can be downloaded at www.winzip.com. 3-9 Backing Up Information It is important to back up your work on a regular basis. This insures that if anything should happen to the hard drive or computer, you can quickly restore the information from the backup. Backing Program Data to a Local Drive 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Backup command from the System Backup/Restore menu. 4. The following Backup Utility dialog now appears on the screen. 5. By default all program data is selected for backup as it is highly recommended that all program data be backed up. If you prefer not to backup selected data, deselect those items by removing the check mark. 6. Select the Local Drive radio button. 7. Enter a drive letter (C:\), or a drive letter and folder name (C:\Backup) in the Backup Path edit box. This is the location you want the backup file to be stored. If the backup path doesn’t exist, the program will create the path automatically during the backup process. 8. Select the Backup button to begin the backup process. 9. Select the Done button when the backup process is complete. If you are backing up your files to a blank CD or DVD drive, make sure you format the disk prior to using the backup utility. 3-10 Backing Program Data to a Server The backup utility can be setup to copy selected files across the internet to a remote server. 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Backup command from the System Backup/Restore menu. 4. The Backup Utility dialog now appears on the screen. 5. By default all program data is selected for backup as it is highly recommended that all program data be backed up. If you prefer not to backup selected data, deselect those items by removing the check mark. 6. Select the Server radio button. 7. Enter a network path in the Backup Path edit box. 8. Enter the server host name in the Host Name edit box. 9. Enter the user name in the User Name edit box. 10. .Enter the password in the Password edit box. 11. Select the Backup button to begin the backup process. 12. Select the Done button when the backup process is complete. Using Auto Backup The backup utility can be programmed to automatically backup selected files to a local drive or across the internet to a remote server. In order for the automatic backup function to work, you have to have the program running at the time the backup is to occur. If the program is not running during the scheduled backup time, the program will start the backup the next time the program is stated. 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Backup command from the System Backup/Restore menu. 4. The Backup Utility dialog now appears on the screen. 5. By default all program data is selected for backup as it is highly recommended that all program data be backed up. If you prefer not to backup selected data, deselect those items by removing the check mark. 6. Select the Local Drive or Server radio button. 7. Enter a network path in the Backup Path edit box. 8. Enter the server host name in the Host Name edit box if you are backing up to a remote server. 9. Enter the user name in the User Name edit box if you are backing up to a remote server. 10. .Enter the password in the Password edit box if you are backing up to a remote server. 11. Select the Auto Backup check box. 12. Select the Daily, Weekly, or Monthly radio button. 3-11 13. Select the desired time that you want the backup to occur. 14. Select the day you want the backup to occur if a Weekly or Monthly automatic backup is chosen. 15. Select the Done button. Warning: It is highly recommended that you do not store your backup files to the local hard drive. If the local hard drive should fail you would lose both your program and backup files. Backing up your files to a removable disk like a CD, flash drive, or a separate network computer is suggested System Restore Utility Files backed up using the backup utility can be restored into the program should something happen to your data, hard drive, or computer. Warning: Restoring files overwrites all changes made to files since the last backup. If you had to completely reinstall the software the Path preferences should also be set before restoring any user backup files. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu. Select the Restore command from the System Backup/Restore menu. The following Restore Utility dialog now appears on the screen. Select the Local Drive or Server radio button. Enter the path in were your backup files are located in the Backup Path edit box. 3-12 Enter the server host name in the Host Name edit box if you are restoring from a remote server. Enter the user name in the User Name edit box if you are restoring from a remote server. Enter the password in the Password edit box if you are restoring from a remote server. It is recommended that you leave the Restore Path edit box blank. This allows the Restore Utility to restore the data into the proper program folders as selected in the Path preferences. Enter a path in the Restore Path edit box only if you want the data to be restored in a folder of your choice. By default all program data is selected to restore. Notice the root of the data tree is highlighted in the upper left hand box. This root of the data tree is showing the (Month Day Year – Hour Minute Second) that the backup took place. If you prefer only selected data to be restored, click on the desired data name from the tree. Holding the Control key down allows you to select multiple data names from the tree. When a backup file is created the file is stamped with the computers ID. If you are backing up data from multiple computers to a central network backup folder, you will end up with multiple backup files from each computer. Selecting the My Computer radio button will display only the files backed up files created from the computer you are currently on. Selecting the Show All radio button will display the backup files from all computers. Selecting the Enable Roll Back check box will create a roll back file of all your data before any files are restored into your program. This is an insurance policy that allows you to roll back your previous data files should you accidentally restore the wrong backup file into your program. Select the Restore button to begin the restore process. Select the Done button when the restore process is complete. 3-13 Rolling Back Program Files If you restored a wrong backup file or you change your mind after the restoration of a backup file has taken place, you can roll back the program to the way it was just before any backup file was restored. You can only use the roll back feature of the program if the checkbox for the Enable Roll Back feature was checked before restoring any backup file. 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Restore command from the System Backup/Restore menu. 4. The Restore Utility dialog now appears on the screen. 5. Select the Roll Back button to begin the roll back. 6. Select the Done button when the roll back is complete. If the Roll Back button is grayed out, there is no roll back file available. Deleting Backup Files If a backup file is no longer needed, you can delete it from your backup folder. 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the System Backup/Restore command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Restore command from the System Backup/Restore menu. 4. The Restore Utility dialog now appears on the screen. 5. Select the Local Drive or Server radio button. 6. Enter the path in were your backup files are located in the Backup Path edit box. 7. Enter the server host name in the Host Name edit box if your backup file is on a remote server. 8. Enter the user name in the User Name edit box if your backup file is on a remote server. 9. .Enter the password in the Password edit box if your backup file is on a remote server. 10. Click on the root of the data tree that you want to delete in the upper left hand box to highlight it. This root of the data tree is showing the (Month Day Year – Hour Minute Second) that the backup took place. 11. Select the Delete button to delete the highlighted file. 12. Continue this process until all desired backup files are deleted. 13. Select the Done button when you are done deleting backup files. 3-14 Deleting Files Jobs, rooms and different files can be deleted from the computer when they are no longer needed. Warning: Be very cautious when deleting files from your computer. Once files have been deleted, there is no easy way to bring them back. Deleting Jobs 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the Delete command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Job radio button. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Select the drive where the job file is located. 6. Select the directory where the job file is located. 7. Select a job from the Job list. 8. Select the Delete button. Deleting Rooms 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the Delete command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Rooms radio button. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Select the drive where the job file is located. 6. Select the directory where the job file is located. 7. Select a job from the Job list. 8. Select a room from the Room list. 9. Select the Delete button. Deleting Cabinets from a Catalog 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the Delete command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Cabinets from Catalog command from the Delete menu. 4. Select a cabinet type. 5. Select a cabinet category. 6. Select a cabinet. 7. Select the Delete button. 3-15 Deleting Saved Graphics 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the Delete command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Saved Graphics command from the Delete menu. 4. Select a file from the list. 5. Select the Delete button. Deleting Saved CAD Text 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the Delete command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Saved CAD Text command from the Delete menu. 4. Select a file from the list. 5. Select the Delete button. Job Packages A Job Package allows you to compress all files for one or more jobs into a single zip file that can be emailed or transported to another computer to be loaded. This option only works if you are using a Microsoft Windows email service like Outlook or Outlook Express. Contact you local email service concerning implementation of your email service within Outlook or Outlook Express. If you cannot hook up your email service to Outlook or Outlook Express, a copy of the email file will be placed in the \cabware\email folder for emailing manually. Creating a Job Package Select the Utilities command from the File menu. Select the Job Package command from the Utilities menu. Select the Pack command from the Job Package menu. Enter the path to the location of your job files in the Path edit box. By default the program enters the job path located in your Path Preferences. Click on the job name that you want added to your job package. Holding the Control key down while clicking on jobs allows you to select multiple jobs to add to the package. Enter the path were your backup files are located in the Create Package To Path edit box. Enter the name of the package file in the Create Package To Name edit box Select the Pack button. 3-16 Restoring a Job Package Select the Utilities command from the File menu. Select the Job Package command from the Utilities menu. Select the Unpack command from the Job Package menu. Enter the path to the location of your job package file in the Path edit box. Click on the job package you want unpack in your jobs folder. Clicking on the + symbol in front of your package file displays all jobs in the package file. Holding the Control key down while clicking on each job allows you to select multiple jobs to be unpacked. Enter the job path were you want to unpack your selected job(s) into in the Unpack Package To Path edit box. By default the program enters the job path located in your Path Preferences. Select the Unpack button. All views emailed are zipped into a single file. This reduces the size of that attached images being emailed. The recipient of the email will need a program such as WinZip to unzip the contents of the file. WinZip can be downloaded at www.winzip.com. Emailing a Job Any job and all it associated files can be emailed from within the program. This is useful for sending a job quickly to another location. This option only works if you are using a Microsoft Windows email service like Outlook or Outlook Express. Contact you local email service concerning implementation of your email service within Outlook or Outlook Express. If you cannot hook up your email service to Outlook or Outlook Express, a copy of the email file will be placed in the \cabware\email folder for emailing manually. Emailing Job Files Select the Utilities command from the File menu. Select the Email Job command from the Utilities menu. Select a job from the Zip and Email Job dialog. Select the OK button. 3-17 Emailing Job and Parameter Files This allows you to email a job and all the associated parameters used on in the job. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. Select the Email Job command from the Utilities menu. Select a job from the Zip and Email Job dialog. Select and place a checkmark in the Save Parms option. Select the OK button. All views emailed are zipped into a single file. This reduces the size of that attached images being emailed. The recipient of the email will need a program such as WinZip to unzip the contents of the file. WinZip can be downloaded at www.winzip.com. Catalog Check The Catalog Check utility must be run before a cabinet can be saved to the catalog. It creates the necessary files to start building a cabinet catalog. This utility can also be used to repair the catalog should it become damaged. 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the Catalog Check command from the Utilities menu. Exiting the Program Use one of the following methods to exit the program: • Select the Exit command from the File menu. • Open the Control menu by pressing Alt+Spacebar and then choose the Close command. • Double-click the application Control menu box. • Press Alt + F4. 3-18 Viewing a Floor Plan A floor plan is a two-dimensional view looking directly down on a room layout. • Select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. • Select the Floor Plan button from the View toolbar. Viewing an Elevation An elevation is a two-dimensional view looking directly at a wall displaying its height and width. Viewing an Elevation Select the Elevation command from the View menu, or the Elevation button from the View toolbar. The active window automatically switches to a floor plan view. From the floor plan view, click on the wall to be elevated. Viewing Elevation to Elevation • With an elevation displayed, click on the Wall Right and Wall Left icons on the Main toolbar. Viewing a Cabinet A cabinet view allows a cabinet to be viewed on all sides for modifying of section ends & backs, and panel ends & backs. 1. Select the Cabinet command from the View menu, or the Cabinet button from the View toolbar. 2. Select the cabinet to be viewed. 3. Select the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main toolbar to choose the appropriate cabinet face to view and modify. Viewing a Bird’s Eye View A bird's eye view is a 3-dimensional view from a distance directly over the room, looking straight down through the ceiling. 1. Select the Birds Eye command from the View menu, or the Birds Eye button from the View toolbar. 2. A wire frame of the view is now displayed on the screen. This is your preliminary view. You can now choose the OK button to process the current view into a full-color bird’s eye view, or use the following toolbar buttons to reposition yourself in the view: 3-19 Rendering a View A rendered view allows you to create a 3-dimensional view of a room with lighting effects and real material textures added to different objects in the room. First, select lighting for the room. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. Select the Render Lighting command from the Pick User Graphics menu. Second, select material textures for the room and cabinets. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. Select the Render Textures command from the Pick User Graphics menu. Select the Render command from the View menu, or the Render button from the View toolbar. The active window automatically switches to a floor plan view with a displayed camera. From the floor plan view, move the mouse pointer over the camera handle until the cursor changes to four-arrows. Click and hold the mouse button. Move the camera to the desired location and release the mouse button. Move the mouse pointer over the camera direction handles until the cursor changes to fourarrows. Click and hold the mouse button. Move the camera direction handle to represent the direction you want the camera to view the room and release the mouse button. With the camera location and viewing direction set, click the OK button next to the camera. The active window automatically switches to a solid color rendered view. This is your preliminary view. You can now select the Architectural button to process the current view into a line drawing, the Apply Textures button to process the current view into a rendered view with material textures, or select the Smooth Lines button to process the current view into a view without jagged lines or edges, or use the following toolbar buttons to reposition the view: 4. 5. Tip: The options found in Render Preferences control the quality of your rendered view. Lighting location and properties have the greatest impact on the results of a rendered room design. 3-20 Viewing Counter Tops A counter top view can be displayed for adding, deleting, modifying, and printing of counter tops within the room design. • Select the Counter Top command from the View menu. • Select the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. Viewing Counter Tops by Layers If there are counter tops at different heights in a room design, you must first go to the appropriate counter top layer before a counter top can be modified. Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. Select the Up or Down button from the Main toolbar. Entering Counter Tops Counter tops are placed automatically on all base cabinets when designing a room. At times, it may be necessary to add additional counter tops to a design where there are no base cabinets located. • Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. Adding a Rectangle Counter Top Select the Add Counter command from the Counter menu. Select the Rectangle command from the Add Counter menu. Enter the height of the new counter top. Click to anchor a starting point for the rectangular counter top. Move the flexible counter top box with the mouse to an opposite end location. When you are satisfied with the counter top size and location, click the mouse button. Adding a Round Counter Top Select the Add Counter command from the Counter menu. Select the Round command from the Add Counter menu. Enter the height of the new counter top. Click on the screen location where the center of the counter top will be located. Move the mouse to create the counter top size. When you are satisfied with the counter top size, click the mouse button. 3-21 Adding a Polygon Counter Top Select the Add Counter command from the Counter menu. Select the Polygon command from the Add Counter menu. Enter the height of the new counter top. Click on a screen location where the first corner of the counter top will be located. Move the mouse in a clockwise direction to mark the second point of the polygon. When you are satisfied with the first edge length and direction, click the mouse button. Move the flexible line with the mouse to a third location. When you are satisfied with the second edge length and direction, click the mouse button. Continue with this process to add more edges to the polygon counter top. When all but the last edge is complete; press the ESC key, or click the right mouse button and select the End Polygon command from the Pop Up menu. The program automatically returns the last edge back to the starting point. Modifying Counter Tops The size, configuration, and location of a counter top can be modified after a room and cabinet layout is complete. • Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. Counter tops cannot be modified if there are counter tops at different heights in the room design. Select the Up or Down button from the main tool bar to display the counter top level that you wish to modify. Changing Counter Top Types Any counter top in the room design can be changed to another type of counter top. 1. Click on a counter top to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Select a new counter top from your counter top parameter list. 4. Click on the OK button. 3-22 Changing Counter Top Render Textures The texture selected for rendering a counter top can be changed for any counter top in the room design. 1. Click on a counter top to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Click on the Pick Texture button to select a new render texture material. 4. After selecting a new texture, click on the OK button. Changing Counter Top Heights The height of a counter top can be changed. 1. Click on a counter top to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Enter the new counter top height. 4. Click on the OK button. Modifying Counter Top Edges The counter top edge type, height, thickness, and shape can be modified for any counter edge. Select a counter edge from the counter top view. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. Change the edge type, height, and shape. Select the OK button. Modifying Counter Top Corners The counter top corners can be modified. 1. Select a counter corner or break point from the counter top view. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Change the corner to a square, radius, or clipped corner. 4. Select the OK button. 3-23 Adding End Splashes End splashes can be added to the end of a counter. 1. Select a counter edge from the counter top view. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Change the edge type to End Splash. 4. Select the OK button. Adding End Caps End caps can be added to the end of a counter. 1. Select a counter edge from the counter top view. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Change the edge type to End Cap. 4. Select the OK button. Adding Break Points Break points allow a single counter top edge to be divided into multiple sections. This is useful for adding extensions to a counter top or to change segments of a back splash to different heights. Break points can be placed on any counter top edge. They are represented by small circles. 1. Select the Display command from the View menu. 2. Select Break Points from the Display dialog to display the break points on the screen. 3. Select the OK button on the Display dialog. 4. Select the Add Break Points command from the Counter Top menu. 5. Click on a counter top edge to add the break point. 6. Click on the break point with the mouse. 7. Move the mouse pointer over the break point until the cursor changes to four arrows. 8. Click and hold the mouse button. 9. Move the mouse to move the break point. 10. When the break point is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Break points can only be moved along a counter top edge or perpendicular to the edge the first time it is moved. If a break point is moved perpendicular to the counter edge, the next time you move the break point it will move in any direction giving X and Y readouts. 3-24 Adding Perpendicular Construction Joints to Counter Tops Perpendicular construction joints can be added to a continuous run of counter tops to identify where two or more counter tops will be joined to form a single counter top. The following example shows how a perpendicular joint is added to a counter top. 1. Click of the front edge of the counter top to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Add Break Point command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Double-click the new break point added to the front counter top edge. 4. Enter 74 in the Left edit box to move the break point from the left 74”. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the break point, that you just moved, to select it. 7. Click the right mouse button and select the Add Joint (Perpendicular) command from the Pop Up menu. 8. The joint is added to the counter top. 3-25 Adding Construction Joints using Break Points Construction joints can be added to counter tops identifying where two or more counter tops will be joined to form a shaped counter top The following example will show how a 45-degree joint is added to a L-shape counter top by connecting two break points. 1. Click on the break point that is located on the inside corner of the L-shape counter top. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Add Joint (Break Points) command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Click on the break point that is located on the outside corner of the L-shape counter top. 4. The joint is added to the counter top. 3-26 If you will be pricing counter tops, it is very important that joints are identified where two or more counter tops join for the program to price correctly. 3-27 Adding a Mason Miter Construction Joint Construction joints can be added to a counter tops to identify where two or more counter tops will be joined to form a L-shaped counter top The following example will show how a mason miter is added to a L-shape counter top by connecting two break points. Click on the break point that is located on the inside corner of the L-shape counter top. Click the right mouse button and select the Add Joint (Mason Miter) command from the Pop Up menu. Move the mouse and click on the back edge of the 108” counter top as shown below. 3-28 5. When prompted to enter the length of the mason miter angle, enter 6 for 6”. 6. Select the OK button. 7. The mason miter joint is added to the counter top. Breaking Counter Tops Using the same methods explained for adding a perpendicular joint or a joint connecting two break points, you can break counter tops. Breaking counter tops takes one top and breaks it into two separate tops that can be modified separately. 3-29 Counter Top Pricing Preview & Overrides Counter tops can be priced automatically. Counter top pricing can be previewed and changes made before a proposal is printed. Pricing Preview A counter top pricing grid can be turned on or off on a counter top view to review the area of the counter top that is being priced. Select the Counter Top command from the View menu; or select the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. Select the Display Option command from the View menu. Click on the Price Hatching check box. Select the OK button. The following shows the Pricing Hatching applied to the counter top view. You will notice that the hatch shows outside the counter top area. This is because there is no joint located where the counters would be mitered. The program thinks that this counter top is going to be made out of one piece of material. If we were pricing counter tops by Lin. Ft., the program would calculate 9 Lin. Ft. If you were pricing counter tops by Sq. Ft., the program would calculate 65.7 Sq. Ft. Lets add a joint at the corner of the counter top angle to create a miter. 3-30 Now that we have added a miter joint, the hatching is contained within the counter top area. Only the counter top area will be priced. You will notice that the hatching overlaps in the miter area. The program calculates the pricing of the counter top before any miters are cut on a piece. If you will be pricing counter tops, it is very important that joints are identified where two or more counter tops join for the program to price correctly. Pricing Overrides Quantities and prices of counter tops can be overridden before a proposal is printed to accommodate for waste factors. 1. Select the Counter Top command from the View menu; or select the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. 2. Click on a counter top to select it. 3. Click the right mouse button to select the Pricing Overrides command from the Pop Up menu. 4. The following dialog now appears on the screen showing the current calculated price for the selected counter top: 5. Click on the Counter Top button to change the quantity and price of the counter top. 6. Continue this process for each item you wish to modify. 7. Click on the OK button when finished. 3-31 Sizing Counter Tops Counter tops can be shaped or re-sized. 1. Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. 2. Click on a counter top edge to select it. 3. Move the mouse pointer over the selected edge until the cursor changes to a four-directional arrow. 4. Click and hold the mouse button. 5. Move the mouse to resize the counter top. 6. When the counter top edge is at the desired size, release the mouse button. Moving Counter Tops Counter tops can be moved to a new location. 1. Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. 2. Click on a counter top until the complete counter is selected. 3. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the counter top until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 4. Click and hold the mouse button. 5. Move the mouse to move the counter top. 6. When the counter top is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Deleting Counter Tops Counter tops can be deleted from a room design. Select the Counter Top command from the View menu, or the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. Click on a counter top to select it. Press the Delete key. 3-32 Viewing Saved Images Views saved using the Export Saved Images BMP command can be viewed on the screen. This feature is useful for saving multiple room and perspective views to a file before a client arrives. You can then quickly display all saved views without having to regenerate them. Select the View Saved Images command from the View menu. Pick an image from the list of saved images. Select the OK button. The saved images are saved in a standard BMP file format. These files can be imported into many of the major paint programs for adding additional color, design or detail. Viewing Saved Render Images Views saved using the Export Saved VRML Images command can be viewed on the screen. This allows you to quickly display all saved views without having to regenerate them. Select the View Saved Render Images command from the View menu. Pick an image from the list of saved images. Select the OK button. Cut If you want to remove a cabinet from one location in a room and move it to another, you must first cut the cabinet. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Select the Cut command from the View menu; or select the Cut button from the Main toolbar. 3. The cabinet is removed from the room and stored into memory until the Paste option is selected to position the stored cabinet into a new location. Copy If you want to make a duplicate of a cabinet and place that duplicate in a new location, you must use the Copy option. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Select the Copy command from the View menu; or select the Copy button from the Main toolbar. 3. A copy of the cabinet is stored into memory until the Paste option is selected to position the stored cabinet into a new location. 3-33 Paste Once a cabinet has been cut or copied into memory, it can then be pasted into a new location within the same room on into a different room. 1. Select the Paste command from the View menu; or select the Paste button from the Main toolbar. 2. Click on a wall and location to place the cabinet. 3. Move the cabinet along the wall to the position the cabinet. 4. Click the mouse when the cabinet is at the desired location. 5. Continue this process for pasting the cabinet more than one time. Undo The Undo option restores the design back to its previous condition before the last modification. The Undo feature can be selected multiple times to remove more then one modification. • Select the Undo command from the View menu; or select the Undo button from the Main toolbar. Regenerating a View Regenerating a view redraws a design to its original size and location after zooming or panning has taken place. It can also be used to clear the screen of "dirt" left over after modifying a view. • Select the Regenerate command from the View menu, or select the Regenerate button from the Main toolbar. Zooming In a View Zooming in magnifies a view to allow a closer look at the detail of an object. Select the Zoom in command from the View menu, or select the Zoom in button from the Main toolbar. Click on the area of the view you want to zoom in on. Zooming in a View with a Window Select the Zoom in command from the View menu, or select the Zoom in button from the Main toolbar. Click and hold the mouse button over the upper left corner of the area to be magnified. Without releasing the mouse button, drag the cursor to the lower right corner of the area to be magnified. Release the mouse button when you are satisfied with the zoom window size. 3-34 Zooming Out a View Zooming out reduces the size of a view. Select the Zoom out command from the View menu, or select the Zoom out button from the toolbar. Real Zoom Zooming magnifies a view allowing a closer look at the design found in the current window. One of the ways to zoom in or out of a view is by the use of real zoom. Zooming In 1. Select the Real Zoom command from the View menu, or select the Real Zoom from the Main toolbar. button 2. Click and hold the mouse button over the center of the current view. 3. Without releasing the mouse button, drag the cursor down the screen to zoom in on the design. 4. Release the mouse button. 5. Continue this process until the desired zoom factor is achieved. Zooming Out 6. Select the Real Zoom command from the View menu, or select the Real Zoom from the Main toolbar. button 1. Click and hold the mouse button over the center of the current view. 2. Without releasing the mouse button, drag the cursor up the screen to zoom out of the design. 3. Release the mouse button. 4. Continue this process until the desired zoom factor is achieved. Rotate View Rotating allows a rendered cabinet or room to be spun around to view from different angles. 1. Select the Rotate button from the Main toolbar while in a rendered view. 2. Click and hold the mouse button over the area of the view to be rotated. 3. Without releasing the mouse button, move the cursor to rotate the current rendered object(s). 4. Release the mouse button when the design is at the desired rotation. 3-35 Pan View Panning allows a view to be moved to a new location on the screen. 1. Select the Pan command from the View menu, or select the Pan toolbar. button from the Main 2. Click and hold the mouse button over the area of the view to be moved. 3. Without releasing the mouse button, move the cursor to drag the design to a new location on the screen. 4. Release the mouse button when the design is at the desired location. Moldings User-created molding can be selected for placement on the top of all upper cabinets, on single cabinets, and on walls. Picking Moldings for Upper Cabinets 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Molding command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Upper Room tab from the Molding dialog. 4. Select a molding design from the list. 5. Select the OK button. Upper room molding is displayed on all upper cabinets, and any pantry and special cabinets that are within 18" of the ceiling. 3-36 Picking Moldings for Placement on Cabinets 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Molding command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Cabinet tab from the Molding dialog. 4. Select a molding design from the list. 5. Select whether you will be referencing the molding from the top or bottom of the cabinet. 6. Enter the distance from the bottom of the molding to the reference. 7. Select which sides of the molding will be finished. 8. Select the OK button. 9. Select a cabinet to receive the molding. Cabinet molding remains active and can be placed on more than one cabinet. Picking Moldings for Placement on Walls 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Molding command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Wall tab from the Molding dialog. 4. Select a molding design from the list. 5. Enter the distance from the floor to the bottom of the molding. 6. Select the Place command. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the molding width. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall and location on which to place the molding. Wall molding remains active and can be placed on more than one wall location. 3-37 Picking Moldings to Fill on Walls 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Molding command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Wall tab from the Molding dialog. 4. Select a molding design from the list. 5. Enter the distance from the floor to the bottom of the molding. 6. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Click on the wall and location to fill moldings. Wall molding remains active and can be filled on more than one wall location. Modifying Moldings Cabinet and wall moldings can be modified. 1. Select the Molding command from the Modify menu. This places you in the molding modify mode. While in this mode, nothing other than moldings can be selected and modified. 2. Double click on a molding; or single click on a molding to select it and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Make all necessary changes. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Select the Close button on the Main toolbar to exit the molding modify mode. Moving Moldings Cabinet and wall moldings can be moved to new locations. 1. Select the Molding command from the Modify menu. This places you in the molding modify mode. 2. Click on a molding to select it. 3. Move the cursor over the top or bottom of the molding until the cursor changes to a twodirectional arrow. 4. Click and drag the molding to a new location. 5. Select the Close button on the Main toolbar to exit the molding modify mode. 3-38 Deleting Moldings User-selected molding can be removed from cabinets. Deleting Upper Cabinet Moldings This will remove all moldings selected for the top of your upper cabinets. 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Molding command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Upper Room tab from the Molding dialog. 4. Select the None button. If you would like to remove upper cabinet moldings from individual cabinets, follow the steps found in the selection called Deleting Cabinet and Wall Moldings. Deleting Cabinet and Wall Moldings 1. Select the Molding command from the Modify menu. This places you in the molding modify mode. 2. Click on a molding to select it. 3. Press the Delete key on the keyboard; or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. 4. Select the Close button on the Main toolbar to exit the molding modify mode. Flooring User-created flooring can be selected for placement in a room design. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. Select the Flooring command from the Pick User Graphics menu. Select a floor design from the list. Select the OK button. Deleting Flooring User-selected floor patterns can be removed from a room design. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. Select the Flooring command from the Pick User Graphics menu. Select the None button. 3-39 Picking Colors A user-created color palette can be selected for a quick change of room colors. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. Select the Colors command from the Pick User Graphics menu. Select a color palette from the list. Select the OK button. Picking Grain A variety of different wood grain patterns can be selected for cabinets. By picking and combining different wood grain patterns with different color palettes, there are an unlimited variety of possible cabinet colors and grain combinations. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. Select the Grain command from the Pick User Graphics menu. Select a grain palette from the list. Select the OK button. 3D Objects There are a variety of supplied 3-dimensional objects (i.e.; tables, chairs, plants, books, lighting, etc.) that can be selected to enhance a room design. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. Select the 3D Objects command from the Pick User Graphics menu. Select a 3D-object category. Select a 3D object from the list. Select the OK button. Select whether the object will be placed on the wall, referenced from the wall, or placed free hand within the room. Enter the distance the object will be located off the floor. Place the item according to the method of placement selected. Modifying 3D Objects The height, location, and the direction a 3-dimensional object is facing can be modified. 1. Double click on a 3D object, or single click on a 3D object and click the right mouse button and choose the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Rotate or move the object by changing the values in the dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. 3-40 Moving 3D Objects 3-dimensional objects can be moved to a new location on the view. 1. Click on a 3D object in floor plan view to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the 3D object until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the object. 5. When the object is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Deleting 3D Objects 3-dimensional objects can be deleted from a view. • Click on a 3D object to select it and press the Delete key. • Click on a 3D object to select it, click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. Pulls and Handles There are a variety of pulls and handles that can be selected for placement on doors and drawer fronts. 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select Door Pulls/Handles or Drawer Pulls/Handles from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select a pull or handle from the list. 4. Select the OK button. Pulls and handles are only displayed on doors and drawer fronts if a pull or handle marker was placed on the door and drawer design when created. Deleting Pulls and Handles Pulls and handles can be deleted from doors and drawers. 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select Door Pulls/Handles or Drawer Pulls/Handles from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the None button. 3-41 Wallpaper A large number of wallpaper patterns have been supplied with the program to place on walls. 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Wallpaper command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select a wallpaper pattern from the list. 4. Select the OK button. Deleting Wallpaper User-selected wallpaper can be removed from a room design. 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Wallpaper command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the None button. 3-42 Pick Render Lighting Before a room design can be rendered, lighting effects must be placed in the room. 1. From a floorplan view, select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Render Lighting command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select a lighting effect from the Pick Lighting dialog. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the floorplan on the location in which you want the selected lighting effect to be placed. 6. After you have the desired lighting effect placed, click the right button and choose the Quit command from the Pop-Up menu to quit light placement, or choose the End Light command to return to the Pick Lighting dialog to place another type of lighting effect. If your lighting symbols do not display on the floorplan view when placed, they will need to be turned on from the Display Options dialog found on the View menu. Only seven lights can be placed in a room at one time. Modifying Render Lighting The properties for lights that are placed in a room design can be modified. 1. From a floorplan view, double click on a lighting symbol; or single click on a lighting symbol to select it and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Make all necessary changes. 3. Select the OK button. Moving Render Lighting Lights that are placed in a room design can be moved to new locations. 1. From a floorplan view, click on a lighting symbol to select it. 2. Move your cursor over the edge of the lighting symbol until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 3. Click and drag the symbol to a new location. 4. Continue this process for each light you want to move. 3-43 Delete Render Lighting Lights that are placed in a room design can be deleted. 1. From a floorplan view, click on a lighting symbol to select it. 2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard; or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. Pick Render Textures Before a room design can be rendered, material textures must be selected for the room. Picking Material Textures for Room Rendering 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Render Textures command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Cabinets button from the Room Textures dialog box. 4. Select a texture category from the Render Textures dialog box. 5. Select a texture for cabinets. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Continue this process for all buttons on the Room Textures dialog box. 8. When you have finished selecting materials for all items in the room, select the OK button. Selecting the Wood Grains button will select a texture for Cabinets, Face Frames, Door Panels, Door Frames, Moldings, and Casings all at one time. The Counter and Walls button is also used for multiple selections. Picking Appliance Textures for Rendering 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Render Textures command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Appliance button from the Room Textures dialog box. 4. Select the Appliances button from the Appliance Texture dialog box. This will select a texture for all appliances. 5. Select a texture category from the Render Textures dialog box. 6. Select a texture for appliances. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Continue this process for all appliances that you wish to select material textures for. 9. When you have finished selecting appliance textures, select the OK button. 10. Select the OK button from the Room Textures dialog box. 3-44 Picking Appliance Front Textures for Room Rendering Material textures can be selected for an appliance front before a room is rendered. This would be the case if you had a bitmap image that you imported as a texture that was an image of an appliance front. If you have a computer scanner, images for appliance fronts can be scanned in from appliance catalogs. 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Render Textures command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Appliance button from the Room Textures dialog box. 4. Select a Front button for an appliance from the Appliance Texture dialog box. 5. Select a texture category from the Render Textures dialog box. 6. Select a texture for the appliance front. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Continue this process for all appliances that you wish to select front textures for. 9. Select the OK button, when you have finished selecting appliance front textures. 10. Select the OK button from the Room Textures dialog box. Remember to set the X Y scale factor for an appliance front to “1” in the texture setup screen. This will cause the texture to stretch to fit the appliance front. 3-45 Display Options Display options allow the user to turn on or off such display features as dimensions, door overlaps, wood grain, color, etc., for the current room design. Select the Display Option command from the View menu. Click on the options you want displayed; or click off the options you do not want displayed. Select the OK button. The display options may change for certain views. These changes only affect the view of the current room and have no effect on the default preference setting for the program. Counter Top Display Options A counter top view has its own unique set of display options. Counter top display options allow the user to turn on or off such display features as dimensions, CAD text, walls, cabinets, and break points. Select the Counter Top command from the View menu. Select the Display Option command from the View menu. Click on the options you want displayed; or click off the options you do not want displayed. Select the OK button. Floating Toolbars Toolbars contain buttons that give quick access to many program commands and features. The two types of toolbars found in the program are the Main toolbar and Floating toolbars. The Main toolbar is displayed at the top of the window just under the pull-down menus. Floating Toolbars can be dragged and placed at any location on the screen. Displaying Floating Toolbars 1. Select the Toolbar command from the View menu. 2. Select the toolbars you want displayed. 3. Select the OK button. Closing Floating Toolbars • Select the Close command from the Control menu on the toolbar. • Double-click on the Control menu. Moving Floating Toolbars 1. Click and hold the mouse on the title bar of the toolbar. 2. Drag the toolbar to a new position and release the mouse button. 3-46 Resizable Toolbars Toolbars can be resized on the screen to any width or length. To resize a toolbar, simply move the cursor to the left or right side of a toolbar until the cursor changes to a two-directional arrow. Click and drag the cursor left or right until the toolbar is the desired size and shape, then release the mouse button. Docking Toolbars When a toolbar is moved to the edge of the program window it becomes a docking toolbar. You can dock a toolbar below the program’s title bar or to the left, right, or bottom edge of the program window. When a toolbar becomes docked, the buttons will automatically run the length of the side. To undock a toolbar, simply click on the edge of the docked toolbar and drag it towards the center of the program window. Creating Custom Toolbars Any number of custom toolbars can now be created with only the icon buttons that you would like to access on a regular basis. 1. Select the Toolbar command from the View menu. 2. Select the New button from the Toolbar dialog box. 3. The Custom Toolbar dialog box now appears on the screen: 4. First enter the name of your new Toolbar in the left-upper edit box. In my example, I will create an Edit Toolbar with buttons to Cut, Copy, Paste, and Undo. 5. Select the Main Toolbar option from the Toolbar combo box. 6. Click on the Cut icon from the Main Toolbar. 7. Click on the Left Arrow button to move the Cut icon to the left window. 8. Click on the Copy icon from the Main Toolbar. 9. Click on the Left Arrow button to move the Copy icon to the left window. 10. Click on the Paste icon from the Main Toolbar. 3-47 11. Click on the Left Arrow button to move the Paste icon to the left window. 12. Click on the Undo icon from the Main Toolbar. 13. Click on the Left Arrow button to move the Undo icon to the left window. 14. The Custom Toolbar dialog should now appear as follows: 15. If you want to rearrange the icon buttons in a certain order, click on an icon button in the left window and use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow buttons to move the button to a new location. 16. Select the OK button, now that the Edit toolbar contains all the icon buttons we require. 17. Verify that your new Edit Toolbar has a check in the checkbox. 18. Select the OK button on the Toolbars dialog to display the Edit toolbar on the screen as shown below. 3-48 19. Place your mouse cursor over the Edit toolbar title bar and press the left mouse button. 20. While holding down the left mouse button, drag the toolbar to a desired location. 21. Release the mouse button to drop the toolbar. Displaying Grids A grid is the same as having lines on graph paper. It can be displayed on floor plan or elevation views to assist with wall, appliance, and cabinet layout. A grid can also be displayed on other views to help with the CADing of additional details. From the current view, select the Grids command from the View menu. Select the Solid Grid, Dashed Grid, or Dot Grid radio button. Enter a grid size. Select the OK button. The grid type and size are stored for each view. This allows you to have a different grid type and size for each view. Removing a Grid 1. From the current view, select the Grids command from the View menu. 2. Select the No Grid radio button. 3. Select the OK button. Changing the Grids Origin The grid is displayed on the current view from a point of origin. A small circle displays the grids origin point. The point of origin can be changed to show the grid at a new location. 1. From the current view, select the Origin command from the CAD menu. 2. Select the Set Origin command from the Origin menu. 3. Click on the view at the point where you want the new origin. Snapping allows you to precisely connect a new point of origin on an existing wall or cabinet line or intersection. 3-49 Entering Walls Entering walls is one of the first steps in identifying the room layout before cabinets and appliances can be entered. The first wall entered is always designated as Wall A. Succeeding walls are lettered in ascending order in a clockwise rotation. Walls drawn in succession automatically join when the beginning of the new wall segment is in close proximity to the end of the last wall. Be sure to plan the layout of walls so that they are entered in a clockwise direction, moving around the room. This is very important since the program makes a distinction between the inside and outside of exterior walls. This insures that cabinets are always positioned inside the room. Entering Exterior Walls 1. Select the Exterior command from the Wall menu, or select the Exterior button from the Wall toolbar. 2. Click on the screen to represent a starting location. 3. Move the mouse in the direction you wish to draw the wall. 4. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse. Pressing the Shift key while moving the mouse fractions the length of a wall segment. Pressing the right mouse button after marking the starting location of a wall segment displays the Pop Up menu, allowing you to manually enter information about the wall length and angle. Entering Interior Walls 1. Select the Interior command from the Wall menu, or select the Interior button from the Wall toolbar. 2. Click on an existing wall to mark the connecting point of the interior wall. 3. Move the mouse back and forth along the existing wall to mark an attachment point and click the mouse. 4. Move the mouse in the direction in which you wish to draw the wall. 5. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse. Entering Island Walls 1. Select the Island/Peninsula command from the Wall menu, or select the Island/Peninsula button from the Wall toolbar. 2. Click on the screen within the room to represent your starting location. 3. Move the mouse in the direction in which you wish to draw the wall. 4. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse. 3-50 Entering Peninsula Walls 1. Select the Island/Peninsula command from the Wall menu, or select the Island/Peninsula button from the Wall toolbar. 2. Click on an existing wall to mark the connecting point of the peninsula wall. 3. Move the mouse back and forth along the wall to mark an attachment point and click the mouse. 4. Move the mouse in the direction in which you wish to draw the wall. 5. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse. Entering Free Form Walls Free form wall allow for an alternative way of designing freestanding island cabinets. Free Form walls allow the user to define the outside perimeter of cabinets filled or placed on the island instead of the back of the cabinets as in using regular island walls. 1. Select the Free Form Cabinets command from the Walls menu. 2. Click on the screen within the room to represent your starting location for drawing a free form wall. 3. In a counter clockwise direction on the screen, move the mouse in the direction you wish to draw the wall. 4. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse. 5. To draw the second wall segment, click your mouse at the end of the previous wall segment. 6. In a counter clockwise direction on the screen, move the mouse in the direction you wish to draw the second wall segment. 7. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse. 8. Repeat this process for each wall segment until the perimeter of the island is defined. 9. Cabinets and appliances can now be placed or filled in the island space to complete the island design. Be sure to enter free form walls in a counter clockwise direction, moving around the space for the island. This is very important since the program makes a distinction between the inside and outside of free form walls. This ensures that cabinets are always positioned inside the island perimeter drawn. 3-51 The following is an example of the perimeter of an island space drawn with the Free Form wall feature. The following is an example of base cabinets filled within the free form wall perimeter. 3-52 Angle Walls Angled walls can be drawn as either inside or outside angles. Wall Layout Method This method is the quickest way to design angle walls with standard angles. 1. Click a starting location for beginning a new wall segment. 2. Move the mouse in the desired direction to achieve the desired angle. 3. With the wall at the desired angle and length, click the mouse. Angle Command Method 1. Select the Angle command from the Wall menu before starting your next wall segment; or click the right button and select the Angle command from the Pop Up menu after marking your starting point for your new wall. 2. Select the Angle radio button. 3. Enter the wall angle in the Angle edit box. 4. Select the OK button. The wall is now locked into the entered angle. 5. Pull the wall to the desired length and click the mouse. Angle Calculator Method Select the Angle command from the Wall menu before starting your next wall segment; or click the right button and select the Angle command from the Pop Up menu after marking your starting point for your new wall. Select either the Inside Angle Calculator or Outside Calculator radio button. Enter the wall measurements taken from the job site for A, B and C. Select the OK button. The wall is now locked into the calculated angle. Pull the wall to the desired length and click the mouse. 3-53 Radius Walls Radius walls can be drawn as either inside or outside radiuses. Angle/Radius Method This is the most common method used for designing radius walls. 1. Select the Radius command from the Wall menu after completing your last wall segment; or click the right button and select the Radius command from the Pop Up menu after marking your starting point for your new wall. 2. Select either the Inside Radius or Outside Radius wall radio button. 3. Select the Angle/Radius Method radio button. 4. Enter the Arc of the radius. 5. Enter the Radius. 6. Select the OK button. Cord Method Select the Radius command from the Wall menu after completing your last wall segment; or click the right mouse button and select the Radius command from the Pop Up menu after marking your starting point for your new wall. Select either the Inside Radius or Outside Radius wall radio button. Select the Cord Method radio button. Enter the Cord Length. Enter the Cord to Arc distance. Select the OK button. 3-54 Modifying Walls The type, size, angle, location, and radius of a wall can be modified after a room layout is complete. 1. Double click on a wall; or single click on a wall to select it and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Change the current wall settings on the Wall Modify dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. Sizing Walls Walls can be re-sized from a floor plan or elevation view. 1. Click on a wall to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to resize the wall. 5. When the wall is the desired size, release the mouse button. Moving Walls Walls can be moved to a new location on the floor plan view. 1. Click on a wall in floor plan view to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the wall until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the wall. 5. When the wall is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Deleting Walls Walls can be deleted from the floor plan view. Click on a wall to select it. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. 3-55 Entering Entrance Doors Entrance doors can be entered in succession while laying out walls, or entered in a wall after the layout is complete. Entering Entrance Doors in Succession 1. After laying out a wall segment before the location of a door, select the Entrance Door command from the Wall menu, or select the Entrance Door button from the Wall toolbar. 2. Enter the size, style, and graphics used for the door in the Entrance Door dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. 4. The door is entered and you are automatically placed back in a wall layout mode. Continue entering wall segments. A wall segment must be entered after placing an entrance door for the program to function properly. Entering Entrance Doors into Walls 1. After completing a room layout and exiting the wall mode, select the Entrance Door command from the Wall menu, or select the Entrance Door button from the Wall toolbar. 2. Enter the size, location, and graphics for the door on the Entrance Door dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. 4. Select a wall on which to place the door. 5. Move the door to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-56 Modifying Entrance Doors The type, size, and location of an entrance door can be modified after a room layout is complete. 1. Double click on a door; or single click on a door to select it and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Change the current door settings on the Entrance Door dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. Sizing Doors Entrance doors can be re-sized from a floor plan or elevation view. 1. Click on a door to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to resize the door. 5. When the door is the desired size, release the mouse button. Moving Doors Entrance doors can be moved from a floor plan or elevation view. 1. Click on a door to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the door until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the door. 5. When the door is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Deleting Doors Entrance doors can be deleted from a floor plan or elevation view. 1. Click on a door to select it. 2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. 3-57 Entering Windows Windows can be entered in succession while laying out walls, or entered in a wall after the layout is complete. Entering Windows in Succession 1. After laying out a wall segment before the location of a window, select the Window command from the Wall menu, or select the Window button from the Wall toolbar. 2. Enter the size and graphics used for the window in the Windows dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. 4. The window is entered and you are automatically placed back in a wall layout mode. Continue entering wall segments. A wall segment must be entered after placing a window for the program to function properly. Entering Windows into Walls 1. After completing a room layout and exiting the wall mode, select the Window command from the Wall menu, or select the Window button from the Wall toolbar. 2. Enter the size and graphics used for the window in the Windows dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. 4. Select a wall on which to place the window. 5. Move the window to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-58 Modifying Windows The type, size, and location of a window can be modified after a room layout is complete. 1. Double click on a window; or single click on a door to select it and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Change the current window settings in the Windows dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. Sizing Windows Windows can be re-sized from floor plan or elevation view. 1. Click on a window to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to resize the window. 5. When the window is the desired size, release the mouse button. Moving Windows Windows can be moved from floor plan or elevation view. 1. Click on a window to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the window until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the window. 5. When the window is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Deleting Windows Windows can be deleted from floor plan or elevation view. 1. Click on a window to select it. 2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. 3-59 Wall Preferences Wall preferences control the default setting for the type of wall being designed. Both wall height and wall thickness can be changed at any time during the wall layout. If you are laying out a wall and you want to lower the wall height for a pony wall, you should make that change here and continue laying out the walls. If one wall in the room design is thicker than another, change the wall thickness and continue with the wall layout. 1. Select the Preferences command from the Wall menu. 2. Change the current wall preference settings. 3. Select the OK button. Warning: Once you have changed the wall preferences, the program holds those values for all future wall and room layouts. When you have finished with any special changes to the Preference dialog, be sure to change them back when you are finished. Automatic Wall Snapping Automatic wall snapping allows the program automatically close off a room by precisely connecting the beginning of the first wall with the end of the last wall. • When drawing the final exterior wall of the room, click the mouse at a point close to the beginning of the room’s first wall. The program automatically calculates the proper angle and length required, snapping the final wall to the first wall to close the room. Wall Snapping Snapping allows you to precisely connect the beginning of the first wall with the ending of the last wall when a room is to be closed off. 1. While pulling the length of the last wall that you wish to connect to the beginning of the first wall, click the right mouse button. 2. Select the Snap command from the Pop Up menu. The program searches the current wall direction until it finds an existing wall to connect to. Snapping can also be used to connect the end of an interior wall with an existing exterior wall. 3-60 Entering Appliances Appliances are usually placed after the wall layout is complete and before cabinets have been entered. Appliances can be placed in either a floor plan or elevation view. Placing Appliances from a Catalog Appliances entered in the appliance catalog can be retrieved and placed in a room design. 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select an appliance type (i.e.; Refrigerator, Cooktop, Sink, Dishwasher, etc.) command from the Appliance menu; or select the appliance type button from the Appliance toolbar. 3. Select an appliance from the list box. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Select a wall to place the appliance. 6. Move the appliance to the desired location and click the mouse. Bumping Appliances to the Right from a Catalog Appliances entered in the appliance catalog can be retrieved and slid down the wall to the right until they bump into another appliance or object. 1. Select the Bump Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select an appliance type (i.e.; Refrigerator, Cooktop, Sink, Dishwasher, etc.) command from the Appliance menu; or select the appliance type button from the Appliance toolbar. 3. Select an appliance from the list box. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall to the left of another appliance or object the appliance will bump into. Bumping Appliances to the Left from a Catalog Appliances entered in the appliance catalog can be retrieved and slid down the wall to the left until it bumps into another appliance or object. 1. Select the Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select an appliance type (i.e.; Refrigerator, Cooktop, Sink, Dishwasher, etc.) command from the Appliance menu; or select the appliance type button from the Appliance toolbar. 3. Select an appliance from the list box. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall to the right of another appliance or object the appliance will bump into. 3-61 Entering Custom Appliances A new appliance can be entered in a room design without placing it in your Appliance catalog. 1. Select an appliance type (i.e.; refrigerator, cooktop, sink, dishwasher, etc.) command from the Appliance menu; or select the appliance type button from the Appliance toolbar. 2. Select the Custom button. 3. Enter the appliance and opening sizes in the selected appliance dialog box. 4. Select any special graphic or construction considerations. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Select a wall to place the appliance. 7. Move the appliance to the desired location and click the mouse. Entering Appliances with a Finished Back Appliances placed on peninsula and island walls sometimes require a finished back to cover up the back of the appliance. 1. Select the Finished Back command from the Appliance menu. 2. Select an appliance type (i.e.; refrigerator, cooktop, sink, dishwasher, etc.) command from the Appliance menu. 3. Select an appliance from the list box. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on a peninsula or island wall to place the appliance. 6. Move the appliance to the desired location and click the mouse. Entering Cabinet Catalog Appliances If designing using a cabinet catalog, some appliances that are built into cabinets; i.e., refrigerator cabinets, wall oven cabinets, etc., will be located in the cabinet catalog. Selecting the Catalog command removes those appliance types from the Appliance menu. 1. Select the Appliance menu. 2. Select the Catalog command. 3. Select an appliance type (i.e.; refrigerator, cooktop, sink, dishwasher, etc.) command from the Appliance menu. 4. Select an appliance from the list box. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Select a wall on which to place the appliance. 7. Move the appliance to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-62 Modifying Appliances Appliances can be modified after being placed in a room. 1. Double click on an appliance; or single click on an appliance and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Change the current appliance location. 3. Select the OK button. Moving Appliances 1. Click on an appliance to select it. 2. Move the cursor over one edge of the appliance until the cursor changes to a four-directional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the appliance. 5. When the appliance is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Overlap appliances placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the appliance to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends for cabinets correctly for the layout situation. If you want to override the programs automatic bump feature while moving an appliance, hold down the CTRL key while moving the appliance. Deleting Appliances 1. Click on an appliance to select it. 2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button to select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. Appliance Graphics Additional CAD lines can be drawn on an appliance in a room design to represent a decorative detail. 1. Click on an appliance to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Appliance Graphics command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Select either the Front, Back, Left, Right, or Top button from the Main Toolbar to select the side of the appliance you wish to add additional CAD to. 4. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, add additional CAD to the view. 5. Select the Close button. 3-63 Entering Custom Cabinets Custom cabinets are usually placed after the wall layout is complete and appliances have been entered. Cabinets can be placed or filled in either a floor plan or elevation view. Placing Custom Cabinets 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, Corner, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall and location of the cabinet. 6. Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Bumping Custom Cabinets to the Right 1. Select the Bump Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall to the left of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. Bumping Custom Cabinets to the Left 1. Select the Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall to the right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump the cabinets to the side of the existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-64 Filling Custom Cabinets Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, Corner, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets. Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than one location. Entering Catalog Cabinets Catalog cabinets are usually placed after the wall layout is complete and appliances have been entered. Cabinets can be placed or filled in either a floor plan or elevation view. Placing Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, Corner, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. Select a cabinet. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the cabinet. Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Bumping Catalog Cabinets to the Right 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the left of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. 3-65 Bumping Catalog Cabinets to the Left 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, Corner, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu; or select a cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select one or more cabinet categories from the Categories list. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location where cabinets are to be filled in. 7. Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Up to four categories can be selected when filling cabinets on a wall. The program searches through these selected categories to find the best cabinets to fill the wall space. This would be the case when filling upper cabinets on a wall that might have a refrigerator, where the upper cabinet over the appliance would be a different height than all other upper cabinets located on the wall. 3-66 Entering Quick Job Cabinets A quick job allows the entering of saved catalog cabinets, custom cabinets, and accessories into a job without designing a room. The selected cabinets and accessories can then be used to generate a proposal, quote, or order form. Entering Custom Cabinets Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, Corner, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. Select the OK button. Entering Catalog Cabinets Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet type (i.e.; Base, Upper, Special, Corner, etc.) command from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. Select a cabinet. Select the OK button. Entering Base Cabinets Base cabinets can be entered in a room as custom cabinets, or as stock cabinets pulled from a catalog. Placing Custom Base Cabinets Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Base button from the Cabinet toolbar. Enter the base cabinet width when prompted. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the base cabinet. Move the base cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-67 Bumping Custom Base Cabinets 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Base button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Custom Base Cabinets Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Base button from the Cabinet toolbar. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on. Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than one location until another cabinet type is selected. Placing Base Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Base button from the Cabinet toolbar. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. Select a cabinet. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the cabinet. Move the base cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-68 Bumping Base Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Base button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Base Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Base button from the Cabinet toolbar. Select one or more cabinet categories from the Categories list. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on. Move the base cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Up to four categories can be selected when filling cabinets on a wall. The program searches through these selected categories to find the best cabinets with which to fill the wall space. This would be the case when filling upper cabinets on a wall that might have a refrigerator, where the upper cabinet over the appliance would be a different height than all other upper cabinets located on the wall. 3-69 Entering Upper Cabinets Upper or wall cabinets can be entered in a room as custom cabinets, or as stock cabinets pulled from a catalog. Placing Custom Upper Cabinets Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Upper button from the Cabinet toolbar. Enter the upper cabinet width when prompted. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the upper cabinet. Move the upper cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or cabinet. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Bumping Custom Upper Cabinets 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Upper button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Custom Upper Cabinets Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Upper button from the Cabinet toolbar. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on. Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than one location until another cabinet type is selected. 3-70 Placing Upper Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Upper button from the Cabinet toolbar. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. Select a cabinet. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the upper cabinet. Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Bumping Upper Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Upper button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-71 Filling Upper Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Upper button from the Cabinet toolbar. Select one or more cabinet categories from the Categories list. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on. Move the upper cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Up to four categories can be selected when filling cabinets on a wall. The program searches through these selected categories to find the best cabinets to fill the wall space. This would be the case when filling upper cabinets on a wall that might have a refrigerator, where the upper cabinet over the appliance would be a different height than all other upper cabinets located on the wall. Entering Pantry Cabinets Pantry cabinets can be entered in a room as custom cabinets, or as stock cabinets pulled from a catalog. Placing Custom Pantry Cabinets 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Pantry command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Pantry button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the pantry cabinet width when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall and location of the pantry cabinet. 6. Move the pantry cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-72 Bumping Custom Pantry Cabinets 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Pantry command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Pantry button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Custom Pantry Cabinets 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Pantry command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Pantry button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on. Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than one location until another cabinet type is selected. Placing Pantry Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Pantry command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Pantry button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall and location of the cabinet. 8. Move the pantry cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-73 Bumping Pantry Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Pantry command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Pantry button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Pantry Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Pantry command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Pantry button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select one or more cabinet categories from the Categories list. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on. 7. Move the pantry cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Up to four categories can be selected when filling cabinets on a wall. The program searches through these selected categories to find the best cabinets to fill the wall space. This would be the case when filling upper cabinets on a wall that might have a refrigerator, where the upper cabinet over the appliance would be a different height than all other upper cabinets located on the wall. 3-74 Entering Special Cabinets Special cabinets can be cabinets of any nature. They can be bookcases, entertainment centers, uppers, bases, or stacking cabinets. Special cabinets also give the greatest control over adding vertical or horizontal sections to a cabinet, as you might see in a complicated entertainment center. Placing Custom Special Cabinets 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Special button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the information necessary to create your special cabinet in the Special Cabinet dialog box. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Enter the special cabinet width when prompted. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall and location of the special cabinet. 8. Move the special cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Bumping Custom Special Cabinets 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Special button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the information necessary to create your special cabinet in the Special Cabinet dialog box. 4. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-75 Filling Custom Special Cabinets 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Special button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the information necessary to create your special cabinet in the Special Cabinet dialog box. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall and location to fill special cabinets on. Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than one location. Placing Special Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Special button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall and location of the special cabinet. 8. Move the special cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-76 Bumping Special Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Special button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Entering Fillers Base, Upper, Special, Corner Base, Corner Upper, and Corner Special fillers can be placed on a wall or fast filled between cabinets and walls. Placing Base or Upper Fillers Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu. Select either the Base or Upper command from the Filler menu. Enter the width of the filler when prompted. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the filler. Move the filler to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap fillers placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the filler to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-77 Bumping Base or Upper Fillers 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select either the Base or Upper command from the Filler menu. 4. Enter the width of the filler when prompted. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the filler will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump fillers to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Base or Upper Fillers Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu. Select either the Base or Upper command from the Filler menu. Click on the wall and location to fill the filler on. Filled cabinet fillers remain active for the selected filler type and can be filled in more than one location. Placing Special Fillers Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Special Filler command from the Filler menu. Enter the information necessary to create your special filler in the Special Cabinet dialog box. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the filler. Move the filler to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-78 Bumping Special Fillers 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Special command from the Filler menu. 4. Enter the width of the filler when prompted. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the filler will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump fillers to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Special Fillers Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Special Filler command from the Filler menu. Enter the information necessary to create your special filler in the Special Cabinet dialog box. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location to fill the filler on. Placing Corner Fillers Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Base Corner Filler, Upper Corner Filler, or Special Corner Filler command from the Filler menu. Enter the information necessary to create your filler in the Corner Filler dialog box. Select the OK button. Select the corner of the room where the corner filler will be placed. 3-79 Diagonal Corner Cabinets A diagonal corner cabinet is an angled face cabinet placed in the corner of the room. Placing a Diagonal Corner Base Cabinet 1. Select the Place command from the cabinet menu. 2. Select the Corner command from the Cabinets menu. 3. Select the Diagonal Base option from the Corner menu. 4. Enter the width and depth for the left end of the diagonal corner cabinet. 5. Enter the width and depth for the right end of the diagonal corner cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click in the corner of the room where the diagonal corner cabinet will be located. Diagonal corner upper and special cabinets are placed in the same manner. Placing Diagonal Corner Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the Diagonal Base command from the Corner menu, or select the Diagonal Base button from the Cabinet toolbar. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. Select a cabinet. Select the OK button. Click in the corner of the room where the diagonal corner cabinet will be located. Diagonal upper and diagonal special cabinets are placed in the same manner. 3-80 Entering End Cabinets Upper, base, and special end cabinets can be placed on a wall. Placing Base End Cabinets Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the End command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Base command from the End menu. Enter the base end cabinet width when prompted. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the base end cabinet. Move the base end cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlapping the end cabinet placed next to another existing cabinet causes the program to automatically bump the end cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet. This allows the program to identify which side of the end cabinet will be opened for the layout situation. Bumping Base End Cabinets 1. Select the Bump Left or Bump Right command from the Cabinets menu. 2. Select the End command from the Cabinets menu. 3. Select the Base command from the End menu. 4. Enter the width of the upper end cabinet when prompted. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet that the baser end cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump end cabinets to the side of existing cabinets permits the program to identify which side of the end cabinet will be opened for the layout situation. Placing Upper End Cabinets Upper End cabinets are placed in the same manner a Base End cabinets. Bumping Upper End Cabinets Upper End cabinets are bumped in the same manner a Base End cabinets. Placing Special End Cabinets Special End cabinets are placed in the same manner a Base End cabinets. Bumping Special End Cabinets Special End cabinets are bumped in the same manner a Base End cabinets. 3-81 Entering Lazy Susan Cabinets A lazy susan cabinet is an L-shape corner cabinet with a single section or opening on each leg. Placing Custom Lazy Susan Cabinets 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the Lazy Susan Base command from the Corner menu, or select the Lazy Susan Base button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the length and depth of each end of the lazy susan cabinet when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click in the corner of the room where the lazy susan cabinet will be located. Placing Lazy Susan Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the Lazy Susan Base command from the Corner menu, or select the Lazy Susan Base button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click in the corner of the room where the lazy susan cabinet will be located. Lazy susan upper and lazy susan special cabinets are placed in the same manner. Entering L-Shape Cabinets L-shape corner cabinets are very similar to lazy susan cabinets except that they can have more than one section or opening on each leg or side. Placing Custom L-Shape Cabinets 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the L-Shape Base command from the Corner menu. 3. Enter the length and depth of each end of the L-shape cabinet when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click in the corner of the room where the L-shape cabinet will be located. 3-82 Placing L-Shape Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the L-Shape Base command from the Corner menu. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. Select a cabinet. Select the OK button. Click in the corner of the room where the L-shape cabinet will be located. L-shape upper cabinets are placed in the same manner. Entering Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets A corner sink cabinet is very similar to a diagonal corner cabinet except that it is designed with two wing panels on each side of the cabinet according to the values set in the parameters. A sink is automatically placed in the cabinet. Placing Custom Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the Diagonal Corner Sink command from the Corner menu. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. Select the OK button. Click in the corner of the room where the diagonal corner sink cabinet will be located. Placing Diagonal Corner Sink Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Corner command from the Cabinet menu and the Diagonal Corner Sink command from the Corner menu. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. Select a cabinet. Select the OK button. Click in the corner of the room where the diagonal corner sink cabinet will be located. 3-83 Entering Split-Level Cabinets A split-level cabinet is a two-section cabinet in height with each section being of a different depth. A good example of a split-level cabinet is a reception counter. Placing Custom Split-Level Cabinets Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Split Level command from the Cabinet menu. Enter the split-level cabinet width when prompted. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the split-level cabinet. Move the split-level cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Bumping Custom Split-Level Cabinets 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Split Level command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Split Level button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Custom Split-Level Cabinets Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Split Level command from the Cabinet menu. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on. Filled cabinets remain active for the selected cabinet type and can be filled in more than one location. 3-84 Placing Split-Level Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Split Level command from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. Select a cabinet. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the cabinet. Move the split-level cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Bumping Split-Level Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Split Level command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Split Level button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 5. Select a cabinet. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-85 Filling Split Level Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Split Level command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select one or more cabinet categories from the Categories list. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location to fill cabinets on. 7. Move the split-level cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Up to four categories can be selected when filling cabinets on a wall. The program searches through these categories to find the best cabinets to fill the wall space. This would be the case when filling upper cabinets on a wall that might have a refrigerator, where the upper cabinet over the appliance would be a different height than all other upper cabinets located on the wall. Entering Wainscot Paneling Base, upper, and special wainscot paneling can be placed or fast filled on walls. Placing Base or Upper Wainscot Panels 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Wainscot Paneling command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select either the Base Wainscot Paneling or Upper Wainscot Paneling command from the Wainscot Paneling menu. 4. Enter the width of the wainscot paneling when prompted. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location of the wainscot panel. 7. Move the wainscot panel to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap wainscot paneling placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the wainscot panel to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or other wainscot panels. 3-86 Filling Base or Upper Wainscot Panels 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Wainscot Paneling command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select either the Base Wainscot Paneling or Upper Wainscot Paneling command from the Wainscot Paneling menu. 4. Click on the wall and location to fill the wainscot paneling on. Filled wainscot paneling remains active for the selected paneling type and can be filled in more than one location. Placing Special Wainscot Paneling 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Wainscot Paneling command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Special Wainscot Paneling command from the Wainscot Paneling menu. 4. Enter the information necessary to create your special wainscot paneling in the Special Wainscot Paneling dialog box. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location of the wainscot paneling. 7. Move the wainscot paneling to the desired location and click the mouse. Filling Special Wainscot Paneling 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Wainscot Paneling command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Special Wainscot Paneling command from the Wainscot Paneling menu. 4. Enter the information necessary to create your special wainscot paneling in the Special Wainscot Paneling dialog box. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location to fill the wainscot paneling on. 3-87 Entering Closet Vertical Panels Closet vertical panels can be placed on walls. Placing Custom Closet Vertical Panels 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Vertical Panel command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the information necessary to create your vertical panel in the Vertical Panel dialog box. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location of the vertical panel. 7. Move the vertical panel to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap vertical panels placed next to other shelves, cabinets, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new vertical panel to the side of the existing shelf, cabinet, or wall. Placing Closet Vertical Panels from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Vertical Panel command from the Closet Component menu. 5. Select a Vertical Panel category from the Categories list. 6. Select a vertical panel. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Click on the wall and location of the vertical panel. 9. Move the vertical panel to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-88 Entering Closet Shelves Closet shelves can be placed or filled on walls. Placing Custom Closet Shelves 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Shelf command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the distance of the shelf off the floor in the Shelf dialog. 5. Enter the shelf width. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall and location of the shelf. 8. Move the shelf to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap shelves placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new shelf to the side of the existing vertical panel, cabinet, or wall. Bumping Custom Closet Shelves 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Shelf command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Shelf button from the Closet toolbar. 4. Enter the distance of the shelf off the floor in the Shelf dialog. 5. Enter the shelf width. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the shelf will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-89 Filling Custom Closet Shelves 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Shelf command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the distance of the shelf off the floor in the Shelf Height dialog. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location to fill the shelf on. Filled shelves remain active for the selected shelf type and can be filled in more than one location until another closet component is selected. Placing Closet Shelves from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Shelf command from the Closet Component menu. 5. Select a Shelf category from the Categories list. 6. Select a shelf. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the shelf off the floor in the Shelf Height dialog. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall and location of the shelf. 11. Move the shelf to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-90 Bumping Closet Shelves from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Shelf command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Shelf button from the Closet toolbar. 5. Select a Shelf category from the Categories list. 6. Select a shelf. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the shelf off the floor in the Shelf Height dialog. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the shelf will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Entering Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves Diagonal corner closet shelves can be placed in the corner of a room. Placing Custom Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Diagonal Corner Shelf command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the distance of the diagonal corner shelf off the floor in the Diagonal Corner Shelf dialog. 5. Enter the diagonal corner shelf width. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click in the corner of the room where the diagonal corner shelf will be located. 3-91 Placing Closet Diagonal Corner Shelves from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Diagonal Corner Shelf command from the Closet Component menu. 5. Select a diagonal corner shelf category from the Categories list. 6. Select a diagonal corner shelf. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the diagonal corner shelf off the floor in the Diagonal Corner Shelf Height dialog. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click in the corner of the room where the diagonal corner cabinet will be located. Entering Closet L-shape Corner Shelves L-shape corner closet shelves can be placed in the corner of a room. Placing Custom Closet L-Shape Corner Shelves 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the L-Shape Corner Shelf command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the distance of the l-shaped corner shelf off the floor in the L-Shape Corner Shelf dialog. 5. Enter the L-shape corner shelf width. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click in the corner of the room where the L-shape corner shelf will be located. Placing Closet L-Shape Corner Shelves from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the L-Shape Corner Shelf command from the Closet Component menu. 5. Select an L-shape corner shelf category from the Categories list. 6. Select an L-shape corner shelf. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the L-shape corner shelf off the floor in the L-Shape Corner Shelf Height dialog. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click in the corner of the room where the L-shape corner cabinet will be located. 3-92 Entering Closet Units Closet cabinet units can be placed or filled on the wall. Placing Custom Closet Units 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Unit command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet unit cabinet in the Closet Unit dialog. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Enter the closet unit width. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Click on the wall and location of the closet unit. 9. Move the closet unit to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap closet units placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the closet unit to the side of the existing vertical panel, cabinet, or wall. Bumping Custom Closet Units Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Closet Unit command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet Unit button from the Closet toolbar. Enter the information necessary to create your closet unit cabinet in the Closet Unit dialog. Select the OK button. Enter the closet unit width. Select the OK button. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the closet unit will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump closet units to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-93 Filling Custom Closet Units 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Unit command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet unit cabinet in the Closet Unit dialog. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location to fill the closet unit on. Filled closet unit remains active for the selected closet unit type and can be filled in more than one location until another closet component is selected. Placing Closet Units from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Closet Unit command from the Closet Component menu. 5. Select a Closet Unit category from the Categories list. 6. Select a closet unit. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the closet unit off the floor. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall and location of the closet unit. 11. Move the closet unit to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-94 Bumping Closet Units from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Closet Unit command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet Unit button from the Closet toolbar. 5. Select a Closet Unit category from the Categories list. 6. Select a closet unit. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the closet unit off the floor. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the closet unit will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump closet units to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Entering Closet Doors Closet doors can be placed or filled on a wall. Filling Custom Closet Doors 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Door command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet door in the Closet Door dialog. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location to fill the closet door on. Filled closet door remains active for the selected closet door type and can be filled in more than one location until another closet component is selected. 3-95 Placing Custom Closet Doors 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Door command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet door in the Closet Door dialog. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location of the closet door. 7. Move the closet door to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap closet doors placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the closet door to the side of the existing vertical panel, cabinet, or wall. Placing Closet Doors from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Closet Door command from the Closet Component menu. 5. Select a Closet Door category from the Categories list. 6. Select a closet door. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the closet door off the floor. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall and location of the closet door. 11. Move the closet door to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-96 Entering Closet Drawers Closet drawers can be placed or filled on a wall. Filling Custom Closet Drawers 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Drawer command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet drawer in the Closet Drawer dialog. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location to fill the closet drawer on. Filled closet drawer remains active for the selected closet drawer type and can be filled in more than one location until another closet component is selected. Placing Custom Closet Drawers 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Drawer command from the Closet Component menu. 4. Enter the information necessary to create your closet drawer in the Closet Drawer dialog. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and location of the closet drawer. 7. Move the closet drawer to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap closet drawers placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the closet drawer to the side of the existing vertical panel, cabinet, or wall. 3-97 Placing Closet Drawers from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Closet Drawer command from the Closet Component menu. 5. Select a Closet Drawer category from the Categories list. 6. Select a closet drawer. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the closet drawer off the floor. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall and location of the closet drawer. 11. Move the closet drawer to the desired location and click the mouse. Entering Closet Rods Closet rods can be placed or filled on walls. Placing Custom Closet Rods Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Closet Rod command from the Closet Component menu. Enter the distance of the closet rod off the floor in the Closet Rod Height dialog. Enter the closet rod width. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the closet rod. Move the closet rod to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap closet rod placed next to vertical panels, cabinets, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new closet rod to the side of the existing vertical panel, cabinet, or wall. 3-98 Bumping Custom Closet Rods 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Rod command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet Rod button from the Closet toolbar. 4. Enter the distance of the closet rod off the floor in the Closet Rod Height dialog. 5. Enter the closet rod width. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the closet unit will bump into. Filling Custom Closet Rods Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Closet Rod command from the Closet Component menu. Enter the distance of the closet rod off the floor in the Closet Rod Height dialog. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location to fill the rod on. Filled closet rods remain active for the selected rod type and can be filled in more than one location until another closet component is selected. Placing Closet Rods from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Closet Rod command from the Closet Component menu. 5. Select a Closet Rod category from the Categories list. 6. Select a closet rod. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the closet rod off the floor in the Closet Rod Height dialog. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall and location of the closet rod. 11. Move the closet rod to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-99 Bumping Closet Rods from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Closet Component command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Closet Rod command from the Closet Component menu, or select the Closet Rod button from the Closet toolbar. 5. Select a Closet Rod category from the Categories list. 6. Select a closet rod. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Enter the distance of the closet rod off the floor. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the closet rod will bump into. Face Frame Only Cabinet Face frames without cabinet boxes can be placed or filled on walls. Placing Face Frame Only (Frame Only) 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinets menu. 2. Select the Base command from the Face Frames menu. 3. Enter the width of the face frame when prompted. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Click on the wall and location of the face frame. 6. Move the face frame to the desired location and click the mouse. Upper and Special Face frames are placed in the same manner. 3-100 Valances Custom valance sizes can be entered in a room, or they can be pulled from a catalog with stock sizes. Placing Custom Valances Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Valance command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Valance button from the Cabinet toolbar. Select a valance shape. Enter the location of the valance from the ceiling. Enter the valance height. Select the OK button. Enter the valance width when prompted. Select the OK button. Click on the wall and location of the valance. Move the valance to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap valances placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This allows the program to automatically bump the valance to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall permitting the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Bumping Custom Valances 1. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Valance command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Valance button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Select a valance shape. 4. Enter the location of the valance from the ceiling. 5. Enter the valance height. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Enter the valance width when prompted. 8. Select the OK button. 9. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the valance unit will bump into. . Allowing the program to automatically bump cabinets to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-101 Filling Custom Valances 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Valance command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Valance button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Click on the wall and location to fill the valance on. A filled valance remains active and can be filled in more than one location until another cabinet type is selected. Placing Valances from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Valance command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Valance button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a valance category from the Categories list. 5. Select a valance. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall and location of the valance. 8. Move the valance to the desired location and click the mouse. 9. Enter the distance the valance is pulled from the ceiling. 10. Select the OK button. Overlap valances placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This allows the program to automatically bump the valance to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall permitting the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-102 Bumping Valances from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Bump Right or Bump Left command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Valance command from the Cabinet menu, or select the Valance button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Select a valance category from the Categories list. 5. Select a valance. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall to the left or right of the cabinet or object the cabinet will bump into. 8. Enter the distance the valance is pulled from the ceiling. 9. Select the OK button. . Allowing the program to automatically bump valances to the side of existing cabinets, appliances, or walls permits the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 3-103 Entering Island Cabinets Island cabinets must be placed on island walls. Placing Island Cabinets 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu. 4. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the island wall and location of the cabinet. 7. Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Island Cabinets Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu. Click on the island wall and location to fill cabinets on. Filled island cabinets remain active and can be filled in more than one location. Placing Island Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. Select a cabinet. Select the OK button. Click on the island wall and location of the cabinet. Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. 3-104 Filling Island Cabinets from the Catalog Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu. Select one or more cabinet categories from the Categories list. Select the OK button. Click on the island wall and location to fill cabinets on. If you are placing or filling island cabinets on both sides of the island wall to design backto-back cabinets, turn the Finished Back command option off before entering cabinets. Entering Peninsula Cabinets Peninsula cabinets must be placed on peninsula walls. Placing Peninsula Cabinets Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu. Enter the cabinet width when prompted. Select the OK button. Click on the peninsula wall and location of the cabinet. Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. Filling Peninsula Cabinets 1. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu. 4. Click on the peninsula wall and location to fill cabinets on. Filled peninsula cabinets remain active and can be filled in more than one location. 3-105 Placing Peninsula Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu. 5. Select a cabinet category from the Categories list. 6. Select a cabinet. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Click on the peninsula wall and location of the cabinet. 9. Move the cabinet to the desired location and click the mouse. Filling Peninsula Cabinets from the Catalog 1. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Fast Fill, Fill Left, or Fill Right command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select a cabinet type from the Cabinet menu. 5. Select one or more cabinet categories from the Categories list. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the peninsula wall and location to fill cabinets on. If you are placing or filling peninsula cabinets on both sides of the peninsula wall to design back-to-back cabinets, turn the Finished Back command option off before entering cabinets. 3-106 Entering Rotated Cabinets A basic cabinet can be rotated into the corner of a room. This feature is useful for rotating a sink or cooktop cabinet into the corner of a room. 1. Select the Rotate command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Base, Upper, or Special command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Base, Upper, or Special button from the Cabinet toolbar. 3. Enter the cabinet width. 4. Enter the cabinet depth. 5. Enter the cabinet setback. Entering a value here drops back the rotated cabinet from adjacent cabinets. A setback filler is placed along each side of the cabinet. 6. Enter the angle of rotation from the left wall. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Click in the corner of the room where the rotated cabinet will be located. Entering Angle Wall Cabinets A dialog box appears when two cabinets meet on an inside angle of less than 90 degrees. The options are Empty Space, Miter, and Return. • Select the Empty Space button if you want the two adjoining cabinets to touch on the front edges and keep the ends square. This creates an empty or dead space. • Select the Miter button if you want the two adjoining cabinets mitered with angled ends. • Select the Return button if you want the first cabinet placed to create a return panel and the second cabinet to butt into it. Deleting Cabinets Single or multiple cabinets can be deleted at one time. Select the Floor Plan or Elevation option from the View menu, or select the Floor Plan or Elevation button from the View toolbar. Click on a wall if you choose to view an elevation. Hold down the Control key while clicking on each cabinet you wish to delete. Click the Right button on the mouse after selecting the desired cabinets. Select the Delete option from the Pop Up menu. 3-107 Cabinet Graphics Additional CAD lines can be drawn on a cabinet in a room design to represent a decorative or constructional detail. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Cabinet Graphics command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Select either the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main Toolbar to select the side of the cabinet on which you wish to add additional CAD. 4. Using the commands found on the CAD menu, add additional CAD to the view. 5. Select the Close button. Saving a cabinet to the catalog will save any CAD design work with the cabinet. 3-108 Entering Lines A line has a starting point and an ending point. Lines can be drawn on selected views to create a design or further enhance a drawing. Select a line color from the CAD Preference dialog box. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. Select the Line command on the CAD menu. Select the Solid, Dashed, Center, or Pointer command from the Line menu, or select the Solid Line, Dashed Line, Center Line, or Pointer Line button from the CAD toolbar. Move the cursor into the drawing area. Click to anchor a starting point for the line. Move the flexible line with the mouse to an ending location. When you are satisfied with the length and direction of the line, click the mouse button. Tip: Using the Snap options allows you to connect a new line to an existing line, line end points, line mid points, or intersecting lines. Modifying Lines A single line can be changed into an arc, curve, or s-curve. 1. Click on a line to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Modify Shape command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Select either arc, curve, or s-curve from the dialog. 4. Select the OK button. Entering Parallel Lines The parallel lines allow the drawing of a series of multiple lines that parallel each other. 1. Select a line color from the CAD Preference dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Parallel Lines command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the Solid, Dashed, Center, or Pointer command from the Parallel Line menu, or select the Solid Parallel Line, Dashed Parallel Line, Center Parallel Line, or Pointer Parallel Line button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a starting point for the first parallel line. 7. Move the flexible line with the mouse to an ending location. 8. Click the button when you are satisfied with the length and direction of the first line. 9. Move the cursor perpendicular to the first line. 3-109 10. Click the button again when you are satisfied with the spacing distance for the second line from the first line. 11. Continue this process for each additional parallel line. 12. When the last parallel line is complete, click the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu. Entering Polylines A polyline is a series of two or more connecting lines. Polylines can be drawn on selected views to further enhance a drawing. 1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Polyline command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the Solid, Dashed, Center, or Pointer command from the Polyline menu, or select the Solid Polyline, Dashed Polyline, Center Polyline, or Pointer Polyline button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a starting point for the polyline. 7. Move the flexible line with the mouse to a second location. 8. When you are satisfied with the length and direction of the first line, click the mouse button. 9. Move the flexible line with the mouse to a third location. 10. When you are satisfied with the length and direction of the second line, click the mouse button. 11. Continue with this process to add additional connecting polylines. 12. When the last polyline is complete; press the ESC key, or click the right mouse button and select the End Polyline command from the Pop Up menu. Tip: The Snap option allows you to connect a new line to an existing line, line end points, line mid points, or intersecting lines. 3-110 Entering Squares A square is a box with four equal sides. Square boxes can be drawn on selected views to further enhance a drawing. 1. Select a color from the CAD Preferences dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Square command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the Solid, Dashed, or Filled command from the Square menu, or select the Solid Square, Dashed Square, or Filled Square button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a starting point for the box. 7. Move the flexible box with the mouse to an opposite end location. 8. When you are satisfied with the box size and location, click the mouse button. Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a new square to an existing line, line end points, line mid points, or intersecting lines. Entering Rectangles A rectangle is a box with equal opposing sides. Rectangles can be drawn on selected views to further enhance a drawing. 1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Rectangle command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the Solid, Dashed, or Filled command from the Rectangle menu, or select the Solid Rectangle, Dashed Rectangle, or Filled Rectangle button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a starting point for the rectangle. 7. Move the flexible box with the mouse to an opposite end location. 8. When you are satisfied with the rectangle size and location, click the mouse button. Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a new rectangle to an existing line, line end points, line mid points, or intersecting lines. 3-111 Entering Polygons A polygon is a series of three or more connecting lines that form a shape by connecting the ending point with the starting point. Examples of polygons are triangles, hexagons, octagons, trapezoids, etc. Almost any straight line polygon shape can be drawn on selected views to further enhance a drawing. 1. Select a line type and color from the CAD Preference dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Polygons command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the Solid or Filled command from the Polygons menu, or select the Solid Polygons or Filled Polygons button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a starting point for the polygon. 7. Move the mouse in a clockwise direction to mark the second point of the polygon. 8. When you are satisfied with the first line length and direction, click the mouse button. 9. Move the flexible line with the mouse to a third location. 10. When you are satisfied with the second line length and direction, click the mouse button. 11. Continue with this process to add more lines to the polygon. 12. When all but the last line is complete, click the right mouse button and select the End Polygon command from the Pop Up menu. The program automatically returns the last line back to the starting point. Drawing a Hatched-Filled Polygon 1. Select a color, a Hatch Pattern button, and hatching spacing from the CAD Preferences dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Polygons command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the Filled command from the Polygons menu, or select the Filled Polygons button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a starting point for the polygon. 7. Move the mouse in a clockwise direction to mark the second point of the polygon. 8. When you are satisfied with the first line length and direction, click the mouse button. 9. Move the flexible line with the mouse to a third location. 10. When you are satisfied with the second line length and direction, click the mouse button. 11. Continue with this process to add more lines to the polygon. 12. When all but the last line is complete; click the right mouse button and select the End Polygon command from the Pop Up menu. The program automatically returns the last line back to the starting point and fills the polygon with the selected color and hatch pattern. 3-112 Entering Circles Circles can be drawn on selected views to further enhance a drawing. 1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Circle command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the Solid or Dashed command from the Polygons menu, or select the Solid Circle or Dashed Circle button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor the center of the circle. 7. Move the flexible circle with the mouse to form the circle. 8. When you are satisfied with the circle size, click the mouse button. Entering Curves Arcs, curves, and s-curves can be drawn on selected views to further enhance a drawing. Drawing Arcs 1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Curves command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the Arc command from the Curve menu, or select the Arc button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a starting point for the arc. 7. Move the flexible arc with the mouse to an ending location. 8. When satisfied with the size and direction of the arc, click the mouse button. Drawing Curves 1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Curves command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the Curve command from the Curves menu, or select the Curve button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a starting point for the curve. 7. Move the flexible curve with the mouse to an ending location. 8. When satisfied with the size and direction of the curve, click the mouse button. 3-113 Drawing S Curves 1. Select a color from the CAD Preference dialog box. 2. Select a cursor type and control from the Cursor Control dialog box. 3. Select the Curves command from the CAD menu. 4. Select the S Curve command from the Curve menu, or select the S Curve button from the CAD toolbar. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a starting point for the s-curve. 7. Move the flexible s-curve with the mouse to an ending location. 8. When satisfied with the size and direction of the s-curve, click the mouse button. Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a curved line to an existing line, line end points, line mid points, or intersecting lines. Modifying Curves The direction of arcs, curves, and s-curves can be reversed, or the shape modified. Reversing Curves 1. Click on an arc, curve, or s-curve to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Reverse Curve command from the Pop Up menu. Shaping Curves 1. Click on an arc, curve, or s-curve to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the handles of the curve until the cursor changes to a four-directional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to reshape the curve. 5. When the curve is at the desired shape, release the mouse button. 3-114 Entering Text Text can be entered on most views to further enhance a drawing. 1. Select the Text command from the CAD menu, or select the Text button from the CAD toolbar. 2. Select the Enter command from the Text menu, if you are using the menus. 3. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 4. Click to anchor a starting point for a text box. 5. Move the flexible text box with the mouse to an opposite end location. 6. When you are satisfied with the text box size, click the mouse button again. 7. Enter your text in the CAD Text dialog. 8. Select any text options and the text color. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Resize the text box to the correct size. Modifying Text Text wording, configuration, size, and color can be modified by the user. 1. Double click on a text block, or single click on a text block and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Modify the text, its configuration, size, or color. 3. Select the OK button. Moving Text Text can be moved to any location on the design. 1. Click on a text box to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the text box until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the text box. 5. When the text box is at the desired location, release the mouse button. 3-115 Sizing Text A text box can be re-sized in a design. 1. Click on a text box to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to resize the text box. 5. When the text box is the desired size, release the mouse button. Deleting Text A text box can be deleted from a design. 1. Click on a text box to select it. 2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. Saving Text A text box can be saved to a file for future retrieval. This is useful for text used frequently. 1. Click on a text box to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Save command from the Pop Up menu, or select the Save command from the Text menu. 3. Enter a description for the saved text. 4. Select the OK button. Retrieving Text Text saved to a file can be retrieved and placed in a drawing. 1. Select the Text command from the CAD menu. 2. Select the Retrieve command from the Text menu, or the Retrieve Text button from the CAD toolbar. 3. Select the desired text from the list box. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click to anchor a position for the retrieved text box. 3-116 Erasing CAD Any CAD or program-generated lines can be erased from a design. Erasing CAD Lines Use this method for erasing user-created CAD lines only. 1. Select the Erase command from the CAD menu, or the Erase button from the CAD toolbar. 2. Click to anchor a starting point for an erase box. 3. Move the flexible erase box with the mouse to encompass any portion of the CAD lines you wish to erase. 4. When you are satisfied with the size and location of the erase box, click the mouse button again. All CAD lines within the box are erased. Erasing Any Lines Use this method to erase any program-generated or user-created CAD lines. 1. Select the Erase Any Line check box from the CAD Preference dialog box. 2. Select the Erase command from the CAD menu. 3. Click to anchor a starting point for an erase box. 4. Move the flexible erase box with the mouse to encompass any portion of any lines you wish to erase. 5. When you are satisfied with the size and location of the erase box, click the mouse button again. All cabinet, counter, appliance, 3D object, window, door, wall, and CAD lines within the box will be erased. Selecting CAD lines to Delete 1. Click on a CAD line to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu, or press the Delete key. Warning: Once you have erased lines using the Erase Any Line option; there are no bringing back lines of cabinets, counters, appliances, 3D objects, windows, doors, or walls without re-entering the items. 3-117 Entering Callouts Callouts are symbols used on drawings to reference other views. 1. Select the Callouts command from the CAD menu, or select the Callouts button from the CAD toolbar. 2. Select the direction of the callout on the Callouts dialog. 3. Enter the letters or numbers that are to appear in the callout. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Move the cursor into the drawing area. 6. Click on the callout’s location. Entering Dimensions Dimensions can be added to selected views. 1. Select the Dimensions command from the CAD menu, or select the Dimensions button from the CAD toolbar. 2. Click on the view to mark a starting point of the dimension line. 3. Click on an ending point for the dimension line. 4. Enter a dimension value and a step value. 5. Select any of the dimension options. 6. Select the OK button. Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a dimension to an existing line, line end points, line mid points, or intersecting lines. Modifying Dimensions Dimension values, locations, extension lines, and pointers can be modified on selected views. 1. Double click on a dimension line, or single click on a dimension line and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Modify the current settings in the Dimensions dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. 3-118 Deleting Dimensions Dimensions can be deleted from selected views. 1. Click on a dimension to select it. 2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. Entering Mechanical Symbols Mechanical symbols, such as electrical symbols, can be added to a floor plan view. 1. Select the Mechanical command from the CAD menu, or select the Mechanical button from the CAD toolbar. 2. Select a mechanical symbol from the list box. 3. Select the OK button. 4. Click on a floor plan location for the mechanical symbol. 5. Continue clicking on the floor plan view to locate more of the same symbols. 6. When finished, click the right mouse button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu. Wiring Mechanical Symbols Wiring can be displayed on the floor plan view for connecting one electrical symbol to another. 1. Click on a mechanical symbol to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Wiring Connect command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Click on the second mechanical symbol to wire the first to the second. 4. Continue selecting mechanical symbol, to wire together as desired. 5. When finished, click the right mouse button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu. 3-119 Modifying Mechanical Symbols Mechanical symbols can be moved and deleted from a view. Moving Mechanical Symbols 1. Click on a mechanical symbol to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the symbol until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the symbol. 5. When the symbol is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Deleting Mechanical Symbols Mechanical symbols can be deleted from a view. Click on a mechanical symbol to select it. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. DXF Importing Small two-dimensional DXF symbols can be imported and placed in selected views. 1. Select the DXF Import command from the CAD menu. 2. Select the drive where the DXF file is located. 3. Select the directory where the DXF file is located. 4. Select the DXF file. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Select the direction of the DXF symbol. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Click on the view to identify the DXF symbol location. CAD Preferences CAD preferences allow the user to choose the default setting for CAD work. 1. Select the Preference command from the CAD menu, or the Preference button from the CAD toolbar. 2. Select the desired preferences. 3. Select the OK button. 3-120 Cursor Control Cursor control allows the user to control the type and movement of the mouse cursor during CAD. Cursor control is useful if you are having problems drawing lines to specific lengths and angles. 1. Select the Cursor Control command from the CAD menu. 2. Select the desired setting. 3. Select the OK button. Origin Readouts are displayed on the screen for the cursor location from your point of origin when entering CAD lines and objects. Each view has its own default point of origin. A small circle on each view represents the point of origin. A new point of origin can be set to better help you with adding CAD to a view. A new origin might be set for an end of a wall, or the corner of a cabinet. Setting an Origin 1. Select the Origin command from the CAD menu. 2. Select the Set Origin command from the Origin menu. 3. Click on the view to locate the new origin point. Tip: The Snap options allow you to connect a new point of origin to an existing line, line end points, line mid points, or intersecting lines. Unsetting an Origin Unsetting an Origin returns the point of origin back to its default location. 1. Select the Origin command from the CAD menu. 2. Select the Unset Origin command from the Origin menu. 3-121 Snapping Snapping allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box, rectangle, dimensions, etc.) to an existing CAD object. Snapping is also a very effective way of marking a new origin point, or for connecting walls. Manual Snap The manual snap method has the same functions as the Nearest Snap mode, but doesn’t remain active after its use. 1. After selecting a CAD object, move the cursor as close as possible to an existing line, line end point, or line intersection. 2. Press the S key on the keyboard to snap the object to an existing line. 3. Without moving the mouse, click the mouse to start the CAD object. 4. Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with snap by moving the cursor again as close as possible to an existing line, line end point, or line intersection and press the S key. 5. Without moving the mouse, click the mouse to anchor the CAD object. Nearest Snap Mode The Nearest Snap mode allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box, rectangle, dimensions, etc.) to an existing CAD object at its nearest point or intersection. 1. After selecting a CAD object, click the right mouse button and select the Nearest Snap command from the Pop Up menu to place the program in the nearest snap mode. 2. Move the cursor as close as possible to an existing line, line end point, or line intersection. 3. Click the button to start the new object. The program automatically starts and snaps the beginning of the new CAD object onto the nearest existing line, line end point, or line intersection 4. Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with nearest snap by moving the cursor again as close as possible to an existing line, line end point, or line intersection and clicking the button. As long as the nearest snap mode is turned on, the program continues to begin and end CAD objects by snapping to existing lines, line end points, or line intersections. To turn off the nearest snap mode, click the right mouse button and select the Snap Off command from the Pop Up menu. 3-122 Endpoint Snap Mode The Endpoint Snap mode allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box, rectangle, dimensions, etc.) to an existing CAD object at its endpoint. 1. After selecting a CAD object, click the right mouse button and select the Endpoint Snap command from the Pop Up menu to place the program in the endpoint snap mode. 2. Move the cursor as close as possible to the end of an existing line. 3. Click the button to start the new object. The program automatically starts and snaps the beginning of the new CAD object onto the end of the existing line. 4. Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with the endpoint snap by moving the cursor again as close as possible to the end of an existing line and clicking the button. As long as the endpoint snap mode is turned on, the program continues to begin and end CAD objects by snapping to the end of existing lines. To turn off the endpoint snap mode, click the right mouse button and select the Snap Off command from the Pop Up menu. Midpoint Snap Mode The Midpoint Snap mode allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box, rectangle, dimensions, etc.) to an existing CAD object at its midpoint. 1. After selecting a CAD object, click the right mouse button and select the Midpoint Snap command from the Pop Up menu to place the program in the midpoint snap mode. 2. Move the cursor as close as possible to the middle of an existing line. 3. Click the button to start the new object. The program automatically starts and snaps the beginning of the new CAD object onto the middle of the existing line. 4. Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with the midpoint snap by moving the cursor again as close as possible to the middle of an existing line and clicking the button. As long as the midpoint snap mode is turned on, the program continues to begin and end CAD objects by snapping to the middle of existing lines. To turn off the midpoint snap mode, click the right mouse button and select the Snap Off command from the Pop Up menu. 3-123 Intersection Snap Mode The Intersection Snap mode allows you to precisely connect a new CAD object (i.e.; line, box, rectangle, dimensions, etc.) to existing CAD objects at their intersecting points. 1. After selecting a CAD object, click the right mouse button and select the Intersection Snap command from the Pop Up menu to place the program in the intersection snap mode. 2. Move the cursor as close as possible to the intersection of two or more existing lines. 3. Click the button to start the new object. The program automatically starts and snaps the beginning of the new CAD object onto the intersection of the existing lines. 4. Draw the next CAD segment, or end the CAD object with the intersection snap by moving the cursor again as close as possible to the intersection of two or more existing lines and clicking the button. As long as the intersection snap mode is turned on, the program continues to begin and end CAD objects by snapping to the intersecting points of existing lines. To turn off the intersection snap mode, click the right mouse button and select the Snap Off command from the Pop Up menu. 3-124 Modifying Cabinets The size, configuration, and location of a cabinet can be modified. 1. Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select the Cabinet command from the Modify menu. 2. Select the desired tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 3. Select the OK button. Sizing Cabinets Cabinets can be re-sized from the floor plan, elevation, and cabinet view. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to resize the cabinet. 5. When the cabinet is the desired size, release the mouse button. Pressing the Shift key while moving the mouse fractions the size of a cabinet. Moving Cabinets Cabinets can be moved to a new location on a wall. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the cabinet until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the cabinet. 5. When the cabinet is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Overlap cabinets placed next to other cabinets, appliances, or walls. This causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet, appliance, or wall. This also allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. If you want to override the programs automatic bump feature while moving a cabinet, hold down the CTRL key while moving the cabinet. 3-125 Adding Cabinets One or more cabinets can be added to a group of connecting cabinets. Each time a cabinet is added to a group of connecting cabinets, all cabinets are re-sized and equally divided in width to occupy the same space. 1. Click on one cabinet in a group of connecting cabinets. 2. Select the Vertical Add button from the Main toolbar. Each time the Vertical Add button is selected; one additional cabinet is added to the group of cabinets. Deleting Cabinets Cabinets can be deleted from a room design. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. When deleting custom cabinets from a group of connecting cabinets, the program prompts you to re-size adjacent cabinets. Selecting Yes causes any adjacent cabinets to re-size to fill the available space left by the deleted cabinet. Modifying Quick Job Cabinets Cabinets selected in Quick Job can be modified. Modifying from the List The quantity, width, height, depth, finished end, door hinging, and door style can be modified from the Quick Job list. 1. Click on a field that you wish to edit and change the value; or click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Select the desired tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 3. Select the OK button. 3-126 Modifying from a Cabinet View The size and configuration of a cabinet and cabinet section can be modified from a cabinet view. 1. With a cabinet selected, choose the Cabinet command from the View menu, or click the right mouse button to select the Cabinet View command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Double click on the cabinet, or single click on the cabinet and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu; or single click on the cabinet and select the Cabinet command from the Modify menu. 3. Select the desired tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 4. Select the OK button. Deleting Cabinets Cabinets can be deleted from the Quick Job list. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. Modifying Cabinet Sections The size and configuration of a cabinet section can be modified. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Wait a second, and then click on the selected cabinet’s section. 3. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 4. Select the desired tab from the Section Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 5. Select the OK button. Adding Vertical Cabinet Sections One or more sections can be added vertically to cabinets. Each time a cabinet section is added to a cabinet, all sections are re-sized and equally divided. 1. Click on one section of a cabinet. 2. Select the Vertical Add button from the Main toolbar. A new section is added to the left of the selected section. 3-127 Adding Horizontal Cabinet Sections One or more sections can be added horizontally to cabinets. Each time a cabinet section is added to a cabinet, all sections are re-sized and equally divided. 1. Click on one section of a cabinet. 2. Select the Horizontal Add button from the Main toolbar. A new section is added below the selected section. Each time the Vertical Add or Horizontal Add button is selected, one additional section is added to the cabinet. Deleting Cabinet Sections Sections can be deleted from a cabinet. Each time a cabinet section is deleted, all remaining sections are re-sized and equally divided. 1. Click on a cabinet section to select it. 2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. Modifying Quick Job Sections Cabinet sections selected in Quick Job can be modified. 1. With a cabinet selected, choose the Cabinet command from the View menu; or click the right mouse button to select the Cabinet View command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Click on the cabinet to select it. 3. Wait a second, and then click on the selected cabinet’s section. 4. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 5. Select the desired tab from the Section Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 6. Select the OK button. Modifying Section Ends and Backs Section ends and backs are added to a cabinet when you want to create an access opening on the cabinet ends and back. Creating Section Ends 1. Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select the Cabinet command from the Modify menu. 2. Select the Left End or Right End tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box. 3. Select Section from the Section Type option. 4. Select the Close button. 3-128 Creating Section Backs Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select the Cabinet command from the Modify menu. Select the Backs tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box. Select Sections from the Back Type option. Select the Close button. Modifying Section Ends and Backs 1. Select the Cabinet command from the View menu, or the Cabinet button from the View toolbar. 2. Select the cabinet to be modified. 3. Select the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main toolbar to choose the appropriate cabinet face to view and modify the sections. 4. Click on the cabinet’s section to select it. 5. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu. 6. Select the desired tab from the Section Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 7. Select the Close button. Modifying Paneled Ends and Backs Paneled ends and backs are added to a cabinet when you want to create raised panel or flat panel ends and backs on a cabinet. Creating Paneled Ends 1. Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select the Cabinet command from the Modify menu. 2. Select the Left End or Right End tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box. 3. Select Paneled from the Section Type option. 4. Select the Close button. Creating Paneled Backs 1. Double click on a cabinet, or single click on a cabinet and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu; or single click on a cabinet and select the Cabinet command from the Modify menu. 2. Select the Backs tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box. 3. Select Paneled from the Back Type option. 4. Select the Close button. 3-129 Modifying Paneled Ends and Backs 1. Select the Cabinet command from the View menu, or the Cabinet button from the View toolbar. 2. Select the cabinet to be modified. 3. Select the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main toolbar to choose the appropriate cabinet face to view and modify the panels. 4. Click on the cabinet’s paneled end or back to select it. 5. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop-Up menu. 6. Select the desired tab from the Panel Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 7. Select the Close button. Adding Additional Vertical Panels 1. In the cabinet view, click on one panel of the cabinet. 2. Select the Vertical Add button from the Main toolbar. A new panel is added to the left of the selected panel. Adding Additional Horizontal Panels 1. In the cabinet view, click on one panel of the cabinet. 2. Select the Horizontal Add button from the Main toolbar. A new panel is added below the selected panel. Each time the Vertical Add or Horizontal Add button is selected, one additional panel is added to the cabinet. Modifying Wainscot Paneling The size, configuration, and location of wainscot paneling can be modified. 1. Double click on a wainscot panel, or single click on a wainscot panel and click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Select the desired tab from the Panel Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 3. Select the OK button. 3-130 Sizing Wainscot Paneling Wainscot paneling can be re-sized from the floor plan, elevation, or cabinet view. 1. Click on a wainscot panel to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to resize the wainscot panel. 5. When the wainscot panel is the desired size, release the mouse button. Moving Wainscot Paneling Wainscot paneling can be moved to a new location on a wall. 1. Click on a wainscot panel to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the wainscot panel until the cursor changes to a four-directional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the wainscot panel. 5. When the wainscot panel is at the desired location, release the mouse button. Deleting Wainscot Paneling Wainscot Paneling can be deleted from a room design. 1. Click on a wainscot panel to select it. 2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. 3-131 Modifying Wainscot Sub Panels The size and configuration of a sub panel of the wainscot paneling can be modified. Modifying Wainscot Sub Panels 1. Click on a wainscot panel to select it. 2. Wait a second, and then click on one of the selected wainscot sub panels. 3. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 4. Select the desired tab from the Sub Panel Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 5. Select the OK button. Adding Vertical Wainscot Sub Panels One or more sub panels can be added vertically to wainscot paneling. Each time a sub panel is added to a wainscot panel, all sub panels are re-sized and equally divided. 1. Click on one sub panel of the wainscot paneling. 2. Select the Vertical Add button from the Main toolbar. A new sub panel is added to the left of the selected sub panel. Adding Horizontal Wainscot Sub Panels One or more sub panels can be added horizontally to wainscot paneling. Each time a sub panel is added to a wainscot panel, all sub panels are re-sized and equally divided. 1. Click on one sub panel of the wainscot paneling. 2. Select the Horizontal Add button from the Main toolbar. A new sub panel is added below the selected sub panel. Each time the Vertical Add or Horizontal Add button is selected, one additional sub panel is added to the wainscot paneling. Deleting Wainscot Sub Panels Sub panels can be deleted from wainscot paneling. 1. Click on a wainscot sub panel to select it. 2. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. 3-132 Entering Partitions and Dividers Partitions and dividers can be added to any cabinet opening to sub-divide that section. Shelves and pullouts can also be added to a cabinet section. Adding Partitions 1. From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu. 2. Select either the H. Partition button to enter horizontal partitions, or the V. Partition button to enter vertical partitions. 3. Click on a cabinet section to enter a partition. 4. Continue clicking on any cabinet section requiring partitions. Tip: Adding a combination of both horizontal and vertical partitions to a cabinet section allows you to divide a cabinet opening into cubbyholes or mail slots. Adding Dividers 1. From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu. 2. Select either the H. Divider button to enter horizontal dividers, or the V. Partition button to enter vertical dividers. 3. Click on a cabinet section to enter a divider. 4. Continue clicking on any cabinet sections requiring dividers. Adding Shelves 1. From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu. 2. Select the Shelf button from the main toolbar. 3. Click on a cabinet section on which you wish to enter a shelf. 4. Continue clicking on any cabinet sections requiring shelves. Adding Pull-outs 1. From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu. 2. Select the Pullout button from the main toolbar. 3. Click on a cabinet section to enter a pullout. 4. Continue clicking on any cabinet sections requiring pullouts. Make sure all cabinet and section changes are made before adding partitions or dividers. Also, delete any shelves or pullout shelves in section modify before adding any partitions or dividers. Shelves and pullouts can also be added using the Partitions/Dividers command. This is important because once partitions and dividers have been added to a cabinet section, you cannot go back and make cabinet and section modification changes. 3-133 Modifying Partitions & Dividers Partitions, dividers, shelves, and pullouts can be modified within a cabinet section. Moving Partitions and Dividers 1. From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu. 2. Click on a partition, divider, shelf, or pullout to select it. 3. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the item until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 4. Click and hold the mouse button. 5. Move the mouse to move the item. 6. When the readouts show the correct location, release the mouse button. Deleting Partitions and Dividers Partitions, dividers, shelves, and pullouts can be deleted within a cabinet section. 1. From an elevation, select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu. 2. Click on a partition, divider, shelf, or pullout to select it. 3. Press the Delete key, or click the right mouse button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu. 3-134 Cabinet Breaking A cabinet can be split into two or more cabinets by using the Cabinet Breaking command. 1. Select a cabinet and click the right mouse button to select the Cabinet Breaking command from the Pop Up menu, or click on a cabinet and select the Cabinet Breaking command from the Modify menu. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the select rectangle until the cursor changes to a four-directional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the break point. 5. When the readouts show the correct location, release the mouse button to break the cabinet. Cabinet Breaking at Mullion 1. Select a cabinet and click the right mouse button to select the Cabinet Breaking command from the Pop Up menu, or click on a cabinet and select the Cabinet Breaking command from the Modify menu. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the select rectangle until the cursor changes to a four-directional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the break point. 5. When the break point is near a mullion, release the mouse button. 6. Select the Yes button when prompted to break at nearest mullion. When a cabinet is split at a mullion, the program decreases the size of the adjoining cabinet mullions and scribes by half their parameter values. Cabinet Stretching Stretching cabinets allows a corner of a cabinet to be stretched from floor plan view to form a cabinet of virtually any shape. This feature could be used to create a double angle cabinet for example. Stretching Cabinets Using the Mouse 1. Single click on a cabinet from floor plan view and click the right mouse button to select the Cabinet Stretch command from the Pop-Up menu, or select the Cabinet Stretch command from the Modify menu and select the cabinet you wish to stretch. 2. Click on the corner of the cabinet you wish to stretch. 3. Move the cursor until you have the desired cabinet shape and click the mouse. 4. Click the OK button. 3-135 Stretching Cabinets Using Edit Boxes 1. Single click on a cabinet from floor plan view and click the right mouse button to select the Cabinet Stretch command from the Pop-Up menu, or select the Cabinet Stretch command from the Modify menu and select the cabinet you wish to stretch. 2. Click on one of the edit boxes for angle or length. 3. Enter an angle or length value. 4. Select the Apply button. 5. Continue this process for each of the angle and lengths you wish to change. 6. Click the OK button. Only one side of a cabinet can be stretched at a time. If you wish to stretch the other side of the cabinet, enter the stretch cabinet mode a second time. Cabinet Tilt section The top of a cabinet section can be titled back forming a tilt face cabinet. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Wait a second, and then click on the cabinet section or opening. 3. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 4. Select the Details tab from the Section Modify dialog box. 5. Select the Open or Doors option from the Section Type combo box. 6. Select the Close button. 7. With the cabinet section still selected, choose the Tilt section option from the Modify menu; or click the right mouse button and select the Tilt section command from the Pop Up menu. 8. The Tilt section dialog now appears on the screen showing the current depth of both the top and bottom of the section: 9. Enter a value for the Top Section Depth. 10. Select the OK button. A cabinet section cannot be tilted back if the section contains a drawer or pullout. 3-136 Accessories Accessories can be entered on a cabinet or room basis. Modification charges can also be applied to a cabinet. Entering Cabinet Accessories 1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu; or select a cabinet and click the right button to select the Accessories command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Select a cabinet number from the Room/Cabinet combo box. 3. Select either the Add Line button to add a line accessory to the cabinet, or the Add Generic button to add a generic accessory. 4. Select an accessory category, if needed. 5. Select an accessory sub-category, if needed. 6. Select an accessory. 7. Select the OK button. Entering Room Accessories 1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu. 2. Select Room Accessories from the Room/Cabinet combo box. 3. Select either the Add Line button to add a line accessory to the room, or the Add Generic button to add a generic accessory. 4. Select an accessory category, if needed. 5. Select an accessory sub-category, if needed. 6. Select an accessory. 7. Select the OK button. Entering Modification Charges 1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu; or select a cabinet and click the right button to select the Accessories command from the Pop Up menu. 2. Select a cabinet number from the Room/Cabinet combo box. 3. Select the Add Mod button to add a modification charge to the cabinet. 4. Select a modification category, if needed. 5. Select a modification sub-category, if needed 6. Select a modification charge. 7. Select the OK button. 3-137 Editing Accessories and Modification Charges 1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu. 2. Select All Accessories from the Room/Cabinet combo box to view all accessories and modification charges; Room Accessories to view only accessories and modification charges applied to the room; Cabinet Number to view only accessories and modification charges applied to a cabinet. 3. Click on a field that you wish to edit and change the value. 4. Select the OK button. Deleting Accessories and Modification Charges 1. Select the Accessories command from the Modify menu. 2. Select All Accessories from the Room/Cabinet combo box to view all accessories and modification charges; Room Accessories to view only accessories and modification charges applied to the room; Cabinet Number to view only accessories and modification charges applied to a cabinet. 3. Click on the accessory or modification you wish to delete. 4. Select the Delete button. Modifying Cabinet Names The name of custom and catalog cabinets can be changed to reflect cabinet types or modification done to a cabinet. These name changes are reflected on the floor plan and all printed reports. Select the Cabinet Name command from the Modify menu; or select a cabinet and click the right button to select the Cabinet Name command from the Pop Up menu. Enter a new cabinet name. Select the OK button. Moving Cabinet Names If a cabinet has a catalog name or if you have given a cabinet a name using the Cabinet Name command on the Modify menu, it can be moved to a new location on a floor plan view. 1. From a floor plan view, click on a cabinet that has a cabinet name to select it. 2. Click the right button to select the Move Cabinet Name command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Move the cursor over the edge of the cabinet name until the cursor changes to a fourdirection arrow. 4. Click and hold the mouse button. 5. Move the mouse to move the cabinet name. 6. When the cabinet name is at the desired location, release the mouse button. 3-138 Proposals Proposals allow for the pricing and printing of cabinets and accessories for a job in a contractual format. The program uses the cabinet line and door styles selected for each room for the pricing of a job. Printing Proposals 1. Select the Open Room command from the File menu. 2. Select the drive where the job and room file is located from the Open Room dialog box. 3. Select the directory where the job and file is located. 4. Select a job from the Job list. 5. Select a room from the Room list. Any room from the job can be selected. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Select the Proposal command from the Options menu. 8. Select your proposal printing preferences. 9. Select any markups or discounts that you want to apply to the proposal. 10. Select and enter any price prompts that you want applied to the proposal. 11. Select the Print button. A proposal should only be printed after the room has been saved. Viewing Proposals Proposals can be viewed on the screen for preview before they are printed. 1. With a job and room loaded, select the Proposal command from the Options menu. 2. Select your proposal preferences. 3. Select any markups or discounts that you want to apply to the proposal. 4. Select and enter any price prompts that you want applied to the proposal. 5. Select the View button. 6. The proposal now appears on the screen. 7. Select the Goto Next Page or Goto Previous Page button to preview each proposal page. 8. Select the Print button to print the proposal pages, or the Close button to exit the preview. A proposal should only be viewed after the room has been saved. 3-139 Sending Proposals to File Proposals can be exported directly a Microsoft Access Database file. This file is called Proposal.mdb and is located in the c:\cabware\design\parms folder. With a job and room loaded, select the Proposal command from the Options menu. Select your proposal preferences. Select any markups or discounts that you want to apply to the proposal. Select and enter any price prompts that you want applied to the proposal. Select the File button. A proposal should only be printed to file after the room has been saved. Quotes Quotes allow for the comparative pricing and printing of cabinets and accessories for up to four different combinations of cabinet lines and door styles. Printing Quotes 1. Select the Open Room command from the File menu. 2. Select the drive where the job and room file is located from the Open Room dialog box. 3. Select the directory where the job and file is located. 4. Select a job from the Job list. 5. Select a room from the Room list. Any room from the job can be selected. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Select the Quote command from the Options menu. 8. Select up to four combinations of cabinet lines and door styles. 9. Select your quote preferences. 10. Select any markups or discounts that you want to apply to the quote. 11. Select and enter any price prompts that you want applied to the quote. 12. Select the Print button. A quote should only be printed after the room has been saved. 3-140 Viewing Quotes Quotes can be viewed on the screen for preview before they are printed. 1. With a job and room loaded, select the Quote command from the Options menu. 2. Select up to four combinations of cabinet lines and door styles. 3. Select your quote preferences. 4. Select any markups or discounts that you want to apply to the quote. 5. Select and enter any price prompts that you want applied to the quote. 6. Select the View button. 7. The Quote now appears on the screen. 8. Select the Goto Next Page or Goto Previous Page button to preview each quote page. 9. Select the Print button to print the quote pages, or the Close button to exit the preview. A quote should only be viewed after the room has been saved. Sending Quotes to File Quotes can be exported directly a Microsoft Access Database file. This file is called Quote.mdb and is located in the c:\cabware\design\parms folder. With a job and room loaded, select the Quote command from the Options menu. Select up to four combinations of cabinet lines and door styles. Select your quote preferences. Select any markups or discounts that you want applied to the quote. Select and enter any price prompts that you want applied to the quote. Select the File button. A quote should only be printed to a file after the room has been saved. 3-141 Order Forms Order Forms can be created for each manufacturer. A sample template has been supplied with the program to print a generic order form. Since order forms for each manufacturer are generally unique, a template must be created for each manufacturer’s requirements. The template order form used by the program is called Order Form.rpt. This form is in a file that can be read and edited by Seagate Crystal Reports. The Seagate Crystal Report software can be purchased at any major software supplier for creating and customizing of your own reports. Printing Order Forms 1. Select the Open Room command from the File menu. 2. Select the drive where the job and room file is located from the Open Room dialog box. 3. Select the directory where the job and file is located. 4. Select a job from the Job list. 5. Select a room from the Room list. Any room of the job can be selected. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Select the Order Form command from the Options menu. 8. Select any markups or discounts that you want to apply to the order form. 9. Select and enter any price prompts that you want applied to the order form. 10. Select and enter any text prompts that you want applied to the order form. 11. Select the Print button. An order form should only be printed after the room has been saved. Viewing Order Forms Order forms can be viewed on the screen for preview before they are printed. With a job and room loaded, select the Order Form command from the Options menu. Select any markups or discounts that you want applied to the order form. Select and enter any price prompts that you want applied to the order form. Select and enter any text prompts that you want applied to the order form. Select the View button. The order form now appears on the screen. Select the Goto Next Page or Goto Previous Page button to preview each order form page. Select the Print button to print the order form pages, or the Close button to exit the preview. An order form should only be edited after the room has been saved. 3-142 Sending Order Forms to File Order Forms can be exported directly a Microsoft Access Database file. This file is called Order Form.mdb and is located in the c:\cabware\design\parms folder. 1. With a job and room loaded, select the Order Form command from the Options menu. 2. Select any markups or discounts that you want applied to the order form. 3. Select and enter any price prompts that you want applied to the order form. 4. Select and enter any text prompts that you want applied to the order form. 5. Select the File button. An order form should only be printed to a file after the room has been saved. 3-143 Multi-draw Multi-draw allows the creation of blueprint-type drawings containing views of perspectives, elevations, floor plans, moldings, doors, etc. All drawings sent to Multidraw can be moved, edited, scaled and additional CAD added. The multi-draw screen consists of two layers. The bottom layer is where all the drawings sent by the Snapshot and Live View icons are located. The top layer of multi-draw consists of all the CAD lines added on that page. Think of this layer as a clear sheet of plastic placed over the original snapshot drawings. You can CAD and write text on this layer. This layer doesn't interact with any of the drawings on the layer below. The top layer is useful for adding comments to the page and tying drawings together with CAD lines. If a drawing is moved on the multi-draw page, you will notice that none of the CAD or text drawn on the top layer moves with the drawing. Sending Views to Multi-draw To create a multi-draw page, a snapshot view or live view must be sent to a multi-draw page. A snapshot view freezes the view on the multidraw page in the state it was at the time of the snapshot. A live view keeps the view active and tied to the room design. This means that at any time you can return to the floor plan or elevation of the room and make changes. Those changes will automatically update all live views in multidraw. 1. Display an elevation, floor plan, perspective, counter top drawing, molding detail, etc. on the screen. 2. Select either the Snapshot or the Live View button from the Main toolbar. 3. Enter a multi-draw page number to designate the drawing’s destination. 4. Repeat this process for each view. Each view (perspective, floor plan, elevation, etc.) can be saved to a specific page number. For example, you might want two elevations and a floor plan on one page, and a perspective and some x-sections on the second page. A large number of multi-draw pages can be used. You can view each page and later move drawings to different pages using the Multi-draw tools. Viewing Multi-draw Pages To view multiple pages, make sure the appropriate job is loaded and the views you want to use were sent to Multi-draw using the Snapshot or Live View button from the Main toolbar. • Select the Multi-draw command from the Option menu. The first page of the multi-draw file is now displayed on the screen. All drawings are displayed from the top left corner down to the bottom right corner in the same order that they were sent with the Snapshot icon. You can re-size drawings, move them around on the screen, change a drawing to a specific scale, CAD on drawings, delete a drawing, print a drawing, or move a drawing to a new page. 3-144 Viewing from Page to Page • With a Multi-draw page displayed, click on the Page Right and Page Left icons from the Main toolbar. • Select the Goto Page command from the View menu and enter a page number when prompted. Sizing Multi-draw Views Multi-draw views can be re-sized. 1. Click on a view to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the modify handles until the cursor changes to a double arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to resize the view. 5. When the view is the desired size, release the mouse button. Re-sizing a view using this method causes the view to lose its scale. Use the Scale command to size a view to a specific scale. Scaling Multi-draw Views The scale of a multi-draw view can be changed. 1. Click on a view to select it. 2. Select the Scale command from the Edit menu, or click the right mouse button and select the Scale command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Select or enter a scale. 4. Select the OK button. Moving Multi-draw Views Multi-draw views can be moved to new locations on the page. 1. Click on a view to select it. 2. Move the mouse pointer over one edge of the view until the cursor changes to a fourdirectional arrow. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to move the view. 5. When the view is at the desired location, release the mouse button. 3-145 Moving Multi-draw Views to Another Page If a Multi-draw page becomes too congested with drawings, it may become necessary to move a drawing to another page. 1. Click on a view to select it. 2. Select the Cut command from the Edit menu, or select the Cut button from the Main toolbar. 3. Select the Goto Page command from the View menu. 4. Enter the page number of the view’s new location. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Select the Paste command from the Edit menu, or select the Paste button from the Main toolbar. Deleting Multi-draw Views Multi-draw views can be deleted from a page. 1. Click on a view to select it. 2. Press the Delete key. Deleting Multi-draw Pages Complete multi-draw pages can be deleted from a job. 1. Select the Delete Page command from the Edit menu. 2. Verify your deletion. Maximizing Multi-draw Views Maximizing a view allows you to fill the entire screen with a selected view. A maximized view is useful for adding additional CAD details to a view while in the multi-draw mode. Portions of a view can also be removed by using the Break Drawing command. • Double click on a view, or single click on a view and select the Maximize command from the Edit menu, or single click on a view and select the Maximize/Minimize button from the Main Toolbar. Only drawings sent to multi-draw using the Snapshot button can be maximized to add additional CAD. A drawing sent to multi-draw using the Live View button can be maximized, but no additional CAD can be added. Minimizing Multi-draw Views Minimizing a view is used to reduce a maximized view back to the multi-draw page. • Select the Maximize/Minimize button from the Main toolbar. 3-146 Breaking Multi-draw Views Drawing breaking is used to break a view at a designated point to remove a segment of the view so that it doesn't display on the multi-draw page. This feature is useful for placing a portion of the view on the screen when the entire view does not fit on the page at a given scale. 1. Double click on a view, or single click on a view and select the Maximize command from the Edit menu; or single click on a view and select the Maximize/Minimize button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the Drawing Break command from the Tools menu. 3. Select the Break Height or Break Width command from the Drawing Break menu. 4. Select the portion of the drawing you want to keep from the menu. 5. Click on the area(s) of the drawing where you want the break to occur. When a drawing is broken using this feature, all dimensions and text will be cut at the point of the break. Inhibiting or removing the dimension or text at the point of the break must be done before you break the drawing. After the drawing has been broken, the ability to inhibit dimensions is turned off. If a drawing is already broken and you need to edit the dimensions, first use the Remove Break command. Removing a Break from a Multi-draw View 1. Double click on a view, or single click on a view and select the Maximize command from the Edit menu; or single click on a view and select the Maximize/Minimize button from the Main toolbar. 2. Select the Drawing Break command from the Tools menu. 3. Select the Remove Break command from the Drawing Break menu. Picking Door/Drawer Details Door and drawer details can be placed on a multi-draw page. 1. Select the Detail command from the Tool Menu. 2. Select the Door/Drawer command from the Detail menu. 3. Select a door/drawer style from the list. 4. Select the OK button. Picking Molding Details Molding details can be placed on a multi-draw page. 1. Select the Detail command from the Tool Menu. 2. Select the Molding command from the Detail menu. 3. Select a molding style from the list. 4. Select the OK button. 3-147 Entering a Multi-draw Title Block A title block can be placed on each multi-draw page. It appears on the multidraw page as a 2" X 5-1/2" block. 1. Select the Title Block command from the Tool menu. 2. Enter the necessary information in the Title Block dialog box. 3. Select the OK button. 4. The title block can then be re-sized to fit the multi-draw page. Closing Multi-draw Because multi-draw pages are treated as a separate file from a job and room design, you must close multi-draw to save your work. 1. Select the Close Multi-draw command from the File menu, or the Close button on the Main Toolbar. 2. Select the Yes button to save the multi-draw changes. 3-148 Walk Thrus A 3-dimensional walk-thru of a room can be created for customer presentations. When played back, this view allows for a quick tour of the room as though you were walking through it. Creating a Walk Thru Select the Walk Thru command from the Options menu. Select the Record command from the Walk Thru menu. The active window automatically switches to a floor plan view to allow you to pick your initial perspective view. From the floor plan view, move the mouse pointer over the camera handle until the cursor changes to four-arrows. Click and hold the mouse button. Move the camera to the desired location and release the mouse button. Move the mouse pointer over the camera direction handles until the cursor changes to fourarrows. Click and hold the mouse button. Move the camera direction handle to represent the direction you want the camera to view the room and release the mouse button. With the camera location and viewing direction set, click the OK button next to the camera. A wire frame of the 3-dimensional view is now displayed on the screen. This is your preliminary view. You can now choose the Frame button to record your first frame, or use the following toolbar options to reposition the view before the Frame button is selected: 6. With the first frame recorded, select the Forward button from the Walk Thru toolbar. 7. Choose the Frame button a second time. You have now recorded your second frame. 8. Continue this process until you have 20 or more frames. The more frames you add to the walk-thru, the better the presentation will be when played back. 9. After recording the last frame, choose the OK button to process the view. Depending on the number of views, this may take some time. Tip: When creating frames for a walk-thru, you may want to add some variety to the presentation by walking forward 10 frames, then turning left or right for 10 or more frames, then moving forward again for 10 or more frames. The movement and views are left to your imagination. If you change the Step value to “1” and add frames to the walk-thru; each time you choose the Forward button, the playback will appear as though you were moving very slowly through the room. To speed up the walk-thru, set the Step to a larger value to increase the distance between frames. 3-149 Viewing a Walk Thru After a walk-thru has been created, it can be played back any time. 1. Select the Walk Thru command from the View menu. 2. Select the Playback command from the Walk Thru menu. Viewing a Slide Show Viewing a slide show is very useful if you have your computer in a showroom environment and you want the computer to continuously run views of completed jobs. Before a slide show can be run, you must first export views as slide show files. • Select the Slide Show command from the Options menu. The following commands are used for controlling the slide show presentation: Close Button - Ends the slide show. Space Bar - Forwards to the next slide, overriding the timing of the slide. Pause Key - Pauses the slide show. After you pause the slide show, pressing any key starts the presentation again. 3-150 Metric/Inch Layout The dimensions for a room design can be temporarily changed from your default preference setting to either millimeters or inches. This is helpful if you do all your design work in metric but want to print out a design for a customer in inches. Metric Layout • Select the Metric command from the Options menu to display a check mark. Inch Layout • Select the Metric command from the Options menu to remove the check mark. Electronic Tape Measure The electronic tape measure allows you to measure the distance between objects on the screen. Select the Tape Measure command from the Option menu, or select the Tape Measure button from the Main toolbar. Move the cursor into the drawing area. Click to anchor a starting point for the tape measure. Move the flexible line with the mouse to an ending point. When you are satisfied with the location of the ending point, click the mouse button. A Tape Measure dialog displays the length. Tip: Using the Snap option allows you to connect a starting or ending point to an existing cabinet, appliance, or wall line, line end point, or intersecting lines. Tiling Windows Tiling windows resizes and arranges the open windows side by side on the screen without overlapping. Use this option to see a full view of all windows. • Select the Tile command from the Window menu, or press Shift+F4. Cascading Windows Cascading windows resizes and layers open windows in a cascading pattern so that only the title bar of each window is displayed. Use this option to see windows that may be hidden or to organize the windows on the screen. • Select the Cascade command from the Window menu, or press Shift+F5. 3-151 Arranging Icons The program can arrange your desktop so that all windows minimized to an icon can easily be seen. • Select the Arrange Icon command from the Window menu Opening New Windows A new window can be opened to display the same view or a different view of the same design. If you change the contents of a design in one window, all the other windows containing the same design reflect those changes. When you open a new window, it becomes the active window and is displayed on top of all other open windows. • Select the New Window command from the Window menu, or press Shift+F6. • While holding the Shift key, select a view from the View menu. Minimizing All Windows All windows can be minimized to icons in the program. • Select the Minimize All command from the Window menu. Switching to a Different Open View You can display more than one view on the screen at one time. To work on a particular view, click anywhere in its window or select its name from the Windows menu. • If you can see part of the view you want to switch to, click anywhere in its window. • Select the Windows menu and choose the view you want to work with. Fit Views to Windows When a view window is resized, the view within the window can change automatically to fit the new window size. • Select the Fit Views to Windows command from the Window menu. 3-152 Online Help Cabnetware has an extensive on-line help system. On-line help can be reached using any of the following methods: • Select a specific help command from the Help menu. • Press the F1 key at any time to display your program’s On-line Help. • Select the Help button from a dialog box. • Select a subject from Cabnetware’s Table of Contents. 3-153 Chapter 4 Tutorial Welcome to The Designer Tutorial This tutorial outlines many of the steps involved in designing a simple kitchen. You may follow the tutorial step by step, or select an item of particular interest. This tutorial can also be found in the Designer’s On-Line Help. The On-Line Help includes short video clips that demonstrate many of the steps for this tutorial. The tutorial assumes you have entered the Sample catalog provided with the program. We reference items from the Sample catalog throughout the tutorial and highly recommend following along with it. If you choose not to load the sample catalog and follow along with some other catalog or custom cabinets, the results will vary from our examples. Loading the Sample Catalog Instructions for loading the Sample Catalog into the Designer Program 1. Insert the Cabnetware Design program into your CD-ROM drive. 2. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 3. Select the Restore command from the Utilities menu. 4. Click on the Catalogs radio button. 5. Select your CD-ROM drive letter in the From Drive: pull down box. (Most systems assign the drive letter “D”, but yours may differ.) 6. Select the Restore button. 7. At the Insert Disk dialog box, click OK. 8. At the Pick Catalog to Restore dialog box, select the manufacturer you desire to install. The Sample catalog should be the only catalog listed. Click OK. 9. At the Installing Catalog dialog box you have the option of renaming the catalog to your liking. If Sample is acceptable, click OK. 10. The Sample Catalog should now load into your hard drive. When it is loaded, the system will return to the Restore Utility dialog box. Click Done. 11. The Sample Catalog is now loaded and available in your Designer program. 4-1 Starting a New Room All jobs begin with these steps. 1. Select the New Room command from the File menu. 2. Click on the Manufacturer tab. 3. Select: ”SAMPLE” for Manufacturer, “PACIFIC” for Cabinet Line, “96” with 4” Door Frame” for Layout, and … “SIERRA” for the Base & Upper Door Style. 4. Click on the Information tab. 5. Enter “Tutorial Kitchen” for the Room Name. (We will ignore the other information for this tutorial.) 6. Click OK. Creating Exterior Walls Exterior walls begin the layout of your room. 1. Select the Exterior command from the Walls menu. 2. Click in the upper left-hand region of the screen to start your first wall. 3. Move the pointer to the right until the readouts at the bottom of the screen display 0.0 for the angle and 263-1/4” for the length. (Holding down the shift key while moving the pointer fractions the readouts). 4. Click to end the first wall. 5. Click again near the end of the first wall to connect your second wall to the first wall. 6. Move the pointer down until the readouts display 90.0 for the angle and 197” for the length. 7. Click to end the second wall. 8. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the wall layout mode. 4-2 Adding Windows If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the Windows command from the Walls menu. 2. Enter 42” for the window width, 36” for height, 42” for Distance from Floor. 3. Enter 3” for the trim width, 2 for the number of flutes. 4. Click on the Display Windowsill check box, and on the Display Rosettes check box. 5. Click on the Graphics box and choose the 48” BLINDS graphic. 6. Click on the Render Texture button. Choose Windows as the category, and then choose one of the available graphics found there. 7. Click OK. 8. Click OK again. 9. Click on the 263-1/4” wall. 10. Move the window until the readouts display 215-1/4” from the left and 6” from the right. 11. Click to anchor the window. 12. Click on the 197” wall to place a second window. 13. Move the window until the readouts display 6” from the left and 149” from the right. 14. Click to anchor the second window. 15. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the window layout mode. Adding Doors If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the Doors command from the Walls menu. 2. Enter 34” for the door width, 80” for the Height, 3” for the trim width, and 2 for the number of flutes. 3. Click the Display Rosettes check box. 4. Select Hinge Left for Door Style. 5. Click on the Graphics box and choose the GLASS PANEL ROSE 1 graphic. 6. Click on the Render Texture button. Select Wood as the category. Select a wood grain from the list, and click OK. 7. Click OK again. 8. Click on the 263-1/4” wall. 9. Move the door until the readouts display 78-1/4” from left and 151” from right. (Remember, you can use the shift key to fraction the readouts and move in 1/32” increments.) 10. Click to anchor the door. 4-3 11. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the door layout mode. Your view should look similar to the following view. Creating Peninsula Walls If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the Peninsula/Island command from the Walls menu. 2. Click near the right end of the 197” wall. The starting point of the peninsula wall snaps to the existing wall. 3. Move the pointer until the readouts display 90.0 for the angle and 96” for the length. 4. Click to end the first peninsula wall. 5. Click again near the end of the first peninsula wall to connect your second peninsula wall to the first peninsula wall. 6. Move the pointer up and to the left until the readouts display 45.0 for the angle and 66” for the length. 7. Click to end the second peninsula wall. 8. Click again near the end of the second peninsula wall to connect your third peninsula wall to the second peninsula wall. 9. Move the pointer up until the readouts display 45.0 for the angle and 44” for the length. 10. Click to end the third peninsula wall. 11. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the peninsula wall layout mode. 4-4 Moving Peninsula Walls If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Click on the peninsula wall that is attached to the exterior wall to select it. 2. Place the pointer over the wall until a four-directional arrow appears. 3. Click and drag (without releasing) the peninsula until the readouts display 184” from the left and 13” from the right. 4. Release the button to place the peninsula wall. Your view should now look similar to the following view. Entering Cooktop Cabinets Appliance and appliance-type cabinets should be placed first. Place a base cabinet with a cooktop from the library. 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinets menu to put the program in the place cabinet mode. 2. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program access to the cabinet catalog. 3. Select the Base command from the Cabinets menu. 4. Select Cooktop from the Category list, and then select the CT36 cabinet from the cabinet list. 5. Click OK. 6. Click on the 197” wall. 4-5 7. Drag the cabinet outline along the wall, until the cabinet end to wall end readout at the bottom of the screen displays 99” from the left. 8. Click to anchor the cooktop cabinet. 9. Click the Cancel button on the Catalog cabinet dialog box to exit the cabinet layout mode. Entering Appliances If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. Entering a Refrigerator 1. Select the Refrigerator command from the Appliance menu. 2. Select the 36” REFRIGERATOR from the Refrigerator dialog box. 3. Click on the OK button. 4. Click on the 263-1/4” wall. 5. Move the refrigerator outline until the refrigerator slightly overlaps the right side of the door. 6. Click. The refrigerator will bump itself to the right of the door automatically, leaving a reveal next to the doorframe. Entering a Dishwasher 1. Select the Dishwasher command from the Appliance menu. 2. Select the 24” DISHWASHER from the Dishwasher dialog. 3. Click the OK button. 4. Click on the 197” wall. 5. Move the dishwasher outline until the Cabinet end to wall end readout at the bottom of the screen displays 51” from the left. 6. Click to anchor the dishwasher. Entering a Hood 1. Select the Hood command from the Appliance menu. 2. Select the 36” HOOD from the Hood dialog. 3. Click the OK button. 4. Click on the 197” wall over the cooktop. 5. Select the Yes button when prompted to center the hood over range or cooktop. 4-6 Entering Rotated Sink Cabinets If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the Rotate command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program to rotate a cabinet into the corner of a room. 2. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program access to the cabinet catalog. 3. Select the Base command from the Cabinets menu. 4. Select Sink from the Category list and SB36 from Cabinet list. 5. Select the OK button from the Base cabinet catalog dialog. 6. Accept the default Cabinet Setback of 0” and the Rotated Angle of 45° by selecting the OK button. 7. Click in the upper right-hand corner of the room to place the rotated sink cabinet. 8. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the cabinet layout mode. Your view should now look similar to the following view. 4-7 Entering Peninsula Cabinets Peninsula cabinets must be entered before entering regular cabinets. Placing peninsula cabinets is virtually the same as any other cabinets with the exception that they are on a Peninsula wall. Cabinets can be entered on peninsula walls with or without finished backs. If a floor plan view is not already on screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu before following the steps for entering peninsula cabinets. 1. Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program to pick the best cabinets to fill a selected wall space. 2. Select the Finished Back command from the Cabinets menu to allow finished backs on entered cabinets. 3. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program access to the cabinet catalog. 4. Select the Base command from the Cabinets menu. 5. Select the PENINSLA category from the Base cabinet catalog dialog box. 6. Select the OK button from the Base cabinet catalog dialog box. 7. Click to the inside of the 96” peninsula wall to fast fill base cabinets with door sections on the backs. The program fills the walls with the “best fit” catalog cabinets. 8. Click to the inside of the 66” peninsula wall to fast fill base cabinets with door sections on the backs. 9. Notice how the cabinets automatically interact with the 96” peninsula wall. When the FastFill system tried to place cabinets on the wall, one cabinet became too small and was converted to a filler. Click OK to continue. 10. Click to the inside of the 44” peninsula wall to fast fill base cabinets with door sections on the backs. NOTE: The backs of the fillers even have doors. We’ll deal with these a little later. 11. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the cabinet layout mode. 4-8 Your view should now look similar to the following view. Entering Pantry/Special Cabinets If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. Pantry Cabinets and Special Cabinets are very much alike. The major difference between the two is that the pantry cabinet is designed with two door sections by default. Special cabinets start with one open section. Oven cabinets are Specials. Utility and pantry cabinets may be in either location. Many older catalogs will have pantry/utility cabinets stored in the Specials, while newer catalogs will have these same cabinets in the Pantry section. The method of construction and manipulation of these cabinets is pretty much the same. 1. Select the Bump Left command from the Cabinets menu to put the program in the bump cabinet mode. 2. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program access to the cabinet catalog. 3. Be sure to de-select the Finished Back command from the Cabinets menu. 4. Select the Pantry command from the Cabinets menu. 5. Select 24-PNTRY from the Category list and the P2484X24 cabinet from the Cabinet list. 6. Select the OK button from the Catalog Cabinet dialog box. 7. Click on the left end of the 263-1/4” wall. 8. The cabinet will bump itself to the left on the wall automatically, leaving a reveal next to the end of the wall. 9. Click the Cancel button on the Catalog cabinet dialog box to exit the cabinet layout mode. 4-9 Fast-Filling Base Cabinets If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program to pick the best cabinets to fill a selected wall space. 2. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program access to the cabinet catalog. 3. Select the Base command from the Cabinets menu. 4. Select Base from the category list. 5. Click OK. 6. Click on the 263-1/4” wall between the pantry cabinet and the door to fill base cabinets in that wall space. 7. Click on the 263-1/4” wall between the refrigerator and the sink. 8. Click on the 197” wall between the dishwasher and the cooktop. 9. Click on the 197” wall between the cooktop and the peninsula. 10. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the cabinet layout mode. Entering Base Fillers If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program to fill fillers on a selected wall space. 2. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program access to the cabinet catalog. 3. Select the Filler command from the Cabinets menu. 4. Select the Base Filler command from the Filler menu. 5. Click on the wall space between the sink and the cabinet to its right. 6. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the filler layout mode. 4-10 Your view should be similar to the following view. Placing Upper Cabinets If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. Placing a W3630 Cabinet 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinets menu to put the program in the place cabinet mode. 2. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program access to the cabinet catalog. 3. Select Upper from the Cabinets menu. 4. Select 30-WALL from the Category list, W3630 from the Cabinet list, and click OK. 5. Click on the wall over the cooktop. 6. Move the upper cabinet image along the wall until the Cabinet end to wall end readout at the bottom of the screen displays 99” from the left. 7. Click to anchor the upper cabinet. 4-11 Placing Three W2442 Cabinets 1. Select 42-WALL from the Category list and W2442 from the Cabinet list and click OK. 2. Click on the wall to the left of the cooktop. 3. Move the upper cabinet image along the wall until the image slightly overlaps the cabinet above the cooktop. 4. Click. The cabinet will bump itself to the left of the hood cabinet automatically. 5. Select W2442 from the Cabinet list again and click OK. 6. Click on the wall to the right of the cooktop. 7. Move the upper cabinet image along the wall until the image slightly overlaps the cabinet above the cooktop. 8. Click. The cabinet will bump itself to the right of the hood cabinet automatically. 9. Select W2442 from the Cabinet list again and click OK. 10. Click on the wall to the right of the cooktop. 11. Move the upper cabinet image along the wall until the image slightly overlaps the W2442 cabinet we just placed. 12. Click. The cabinet will bump itself to the right of the cabinet automatically. Placing a W4842 Cabinet 1. Select W4842 from the Cabinet list and click OK. 2. Click on the 263-1/4” wall between the pantry cabinet and the door. 3. Move the upper cabinet image along the wall until the image slightly overlaps the pantry cabinet. 4. Click. The cabinet will bump itself to the side of the pantry cabinet automatically. Placing an Tambour Appliance Garage (WAG3018T) 1. Select TAMBOURS from the Category List. 2. Select WAG3018T from the Cabinet List and click OK. 3. Click on the wall to the right of the refrigerator. 4. You should now see a Cabinet Height dialog box asking for you to enter the distance of the cabinet to the floor. We want this cabinet to sit on the countertop so 36” is correct. If the default height is 36” click OK. If not, change to 36” and click OK. 5. Move the WAG3018T until it is 152-1/4” from the left and 81” from the right. Then click to place. 6. Click the Cancel button on the Catalog Cabinet dialog box to exit the cabinet layout mode. 4-12 Filling Upper Cabinets If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program to fill cabinets on a selected wall space. 2. Select the Catalog command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program access to the cabinet catalog. 3. Select the Upper command from the Cabinets menu. 4. Select the 42-WALL and 24-WALL categories to fill from. (Press the Ctrl key and click to select up to four individual categories). 5. Select the OK button from the Upper Cabinet dialog box. 6. Click on the 263-1/4” wall just to the right of the refrigerator. 7. An error message should appear informing us that there is a 2” gap on the right side of our upper cabinets. Simply click OK. The window was too close to allow a 30” cabinet to be filled on the right, so the program picked a 27” cabinet instead and told us of the problem. 8. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the Cabinet layout mode. Your view should now look similar to the following view. 4-13 Saving a Room It is very important to routinely save your work as you progress on a job. A good rule of thumb is to save your current room design about every ten minutes. This insures that if there is an interruption to the power supply, you lose only a minimal amount of work. 1. Select the Save Room As command from the File menu. 2. Type in “Tutorial” for the job name. 3. Select the OK button. Deleting Cabinets If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the P2484X24 cabinet to the left of the door. 2. Press the right button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu to delete the cabinet. 3. Select the B48 cabinet to the left of the door. 4. Press the right button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu to delete the cabinet. 5. Select the W4842 cabinet to the left of the door. 6. Press the right button and select the Delete command from the Pop Up menu to delete the cabinet. Placing Custom Cabinets If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. Placing Custom Special Cabinets 1. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu to allow the program to place a cabinet on a selected wall. 2. Be sure to de-select the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Special Cabinet command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the OK button without changing any values on the Special Cabinet dialog box. 5. Enter cabinet width at 24” and click OK. 6. Click on the wall to the left of the door. 7. Move the special cabinet image to the left end of the wall until the cabinet bumps up against the edge of the wall. 8. Click. The cabinet will bump itself away from the edge of the wall automatically, leaving a reveal next to the end of the wall. 9. Click the Cancel button on the Special Cabinet dialog box to exit the cabinet layout mode. 4-14 Placing Custom Base Cabinets 1. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Enter 30” for the cabinet width, and click OK. 3. Click on the 263-1/4” wall to the left of the door, next to the Special cabinet. 4. Move the base cabinet image until the cabinet slightly overlaps the Special cabinet. 5. Click. The cabinet will bump itself to the right of the special cabinet automatically. 6. Enter 18” for the cabinet width. 7. Click on the 263-1/4” wall to the left of the door next to the 30” base cabinet we just placed. 8. Move the base cabinet image until the cabinet slightly overlaps the 30” base cabinet. 9. Click. The cabinet will bump itself to the right of the 30” base cabinet. 10. Click the Cancel button on the Cabinet Width dialog box to exit the cabinet layout mode. Filling Custom Cabinets If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinet menu to allow the program to fill cabinets on a selected wall. 2. Be sure to de-select the Catalog command and the Modular command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Click on the wall space to the left of the door. 5. Press the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to exit the cabinet layout mode. Modifying Cabinets If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Click on the Special cabinet. 2. Press the right button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Click on the Sizes tab. 4. Enter 25” for the Depth. 5. Click on the 30” Base cabinet to the right of the Special cabinet. 6. Enter 30” for the Height. 7. Click on the 18” Base cabinet to the right of the 30” Base cabinet. 8. Enter 30” for the Height. 9. Click on the Left Ends tab. 10. Click on the End Type: down arrow and select Finished from the drop box list. 4-15 11. Click on the 48-1/4” upper cabinet above the two base cabinets. 12. Click on the Sizes tab. 13. Change the Width Modify Direction to the right by clicking the Right radio button. 14. Highlight the Cabinet Width value and change it to 48”. The Width Modify Direction must be set first or the cabinet will, by default, attempt to change the width to the left, which in this case, will also affect the Special cabinet next to it. Always set the Width Modify Direction first. 15. Click on the Filler located to the left of the PB45 peninsula cabinet on the 66” peninsula wall. 16. Right-click, and select Modify from the Pop-up menu. 17. Click the Backs tab. 18. Change the back type from sections to finished by clicking the Finished radio button. 19. Repeat the procedure with the filler located to the right of the PB45 peninsula cabinet. 20. Repeat the procedure with the filler located to the left of the PB33 peninsula cabinet. 21. Click on the 263-1/4” wall to highlight it. 22. Select the Elevation command from the View menu. 23. Click on the WAG3018T. 24. Right-click and select the Modify command from the Pop-up menu. 25. Click the No Molding check box if not already checked. 26. Select the Close button. Modifying Cabinet Sections If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and select the wall with the door. 1. Select the Section command from the Modify menu. 2. Click on the Special Cabinet located on the left end of the 263-1/4” wall. 3. Select the Details tab. 4. Under the Details tab select Door for the Section Type. 5. Select Hinge Left for Door Hinging. 6. Choose the Close button. 4-16 Adding Horizontal Sections If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and select the wall with the door. 1. Click on the Special cabinet near the left of your screen once, and then click it again. (The first click selects the cabinet and the second click selects the section). 2. Click on the Horizontal Section add toolbar icon cabinet section. to add a horizontal section to the Modifying Section Heights and Adding Roll-outs If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and select the wall with the door. Modifying Section Heights 1. Select the Section command from the Modify menu. 2. Click on the lower section of the special cabinet, near the left of the screen. 3. Select the Up command from the Height Modify Direction option. 4. Enter 60” for the Height. Adding Roll-outs 1. Click on the Details tab. 2. Click on the down arrow spin bar next to Adjustable Shelves until the number of shelves is “0”. 3. Click on the up arrow spin bar next to Roll-Out Shelves 5 times to change the quantity to 5. 4. Choose Close. Modifying Base Cabinets to Desks If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and select the wall with the door. 1. Click on the base cabinet to the right of the Special cabinet near the left of the screen, then click again to highlight it’s section. 2. Press the right button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Click on the Details tab. 4. Select Desk from Section Type. 5. Click once, and then twice on the desk cabinet to highlight it’s section again. 6. Press the right button and select the Modify command from the Pop-up menu. 4-17 7. Click on the Drawers tab. 8. Change the Drawer Height to 3”. 9. Choose the Close button. Your view should now look similar to the following view. Adding Horizontal Sections and Preparing for Pigeon Holes If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and select the wall with the door. 1. Click on the upper cabinet to the right of the Special cabinet near the left of your screen; then click again. The first click selects the cabinet and the second click selects the section. 2. Click on the Horizontal Section Add toolbar icon cabinet. 3. Click on the lower section of the same cabinet. 4. Click and drag the handle between the two openings down until the readout at the bottom of the screen displays 6” for the section height. (Holding down the Shift key while moving the pointer fractions the readouts). 5. Press the right button and select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu to display the Section Modify dialog. 6. Click on the Details tab. 7. Change the Section Type from Door to Open. 4-18 to add a horizontal section to the 8. Click on the down arrow spin bar next to Adjustable Shelves until the number of shelves is “0”. 9. Select the Close button. Adding Vertical Dividers as Pigeon Holes If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and select the wall with the door. 1. Select the Partitions/Dividers command from the Modify menu. 2. Click on the V. Divider button from the top tool bar. 3. Click on the open section of the upper above the desk once for each of the 5 partitions. 4. Press the right button and select the Exit Partition Mode command from the Pop Up menu to exit the partitions/dividers mode. Adding Valances If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and select the wall with the door. Adding Valances to a Room Design 1. Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinets menu to allow the program to fill the following area with a valance. 2. Be sure to de-select the Catalog command, and to select the Modular command from the cabinets menu. 3. Select the Valance command from the Cabinets menu. 4. Set the Valance Shape: to Scrolled, set the Distance From Ceiling: to 42”, and the Height to 6”. 5. Click OK. 6. Move the pointer over to just under the upper cabinet with the pigeonholes and click to fill. 4-19 Adding Valances to a Cabinet 1. While still in the elevation view, click on the Section command in the Modify menu. 2. Click on the upper section of the Wall cabinet located to the right of the Special Cabinet. This will activate the Section Modify screen as well. 3. Click the Details tab and change the Section Type: to Open. 4. Click on the down arrow spin bar next to Adjustable Shelves until the number of shelves is “2”. 5. Click the Face Frames tab and change the Top Rail Shape to Scroll. 6. Click on the upper section of the wall cabinet to shift to the Cabinet Modify screen. 7. Click on the Face Frame Sizes tab and change the Top Rail to 6”. 8. Click Close to exit the Cabinet Modify Screen. Adding Decorations to a Cabinet If an elevation is not on the screen, select the Elevation command from the View menu and select the wall with the door. 1. Click on the 48” wall cabinet with the pigeonholes. 2. Press the right mouse button, and click Modify on the Pop-up menu. 3. Click the Face Frame Sizes tab, change the Left Stile width, and Right Stile Width, to 3” 4. Click the Apply button. 5. Click the Decorations button. 6. Set the Top Offset to 2”. 7. Set the Bottom Offset to 2”. 8. Click the Up Arrow Spin Bar next to the # of Flutes for the Left Stile until the number of flutes is “3”. Repeat this step for the Right Stile. 9. Click the Down Arrow Spin Bar next to the Rosettes for the Left Stile to choose a rosette for the Top. Repeat this step for the Right Stile. 10. Click the Down Arrow Spin Bar next to the Plinth Block for the Left Stile to choose blocks for both the Top and Bottom. Repeat this step for the Right Stile. 11. Click OK. 12. Click Close in the Cabinet Modify Dialog Box. 4-20 Your view should now look similar to the following view. Viewing and Modifying Counters A counter top view can be displayed for adding, deleting, modifying, and printing of counter tops within the room design. If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. Viewing Counter Tops • Select the Counter Top command from the View menu • Select the Counter Top button from the View toolbar. Viewing Counter Tops by Layers When there are counter tops at different heights in a room design, you may view them as individual layers or you may view all layers at the same time. Selects the Next Level layer Selects the Previous level layer Selects All Levels 4-21 Modifying Countertops If there are countertops at different levels, you must first go to the appropriate countertop layer before a countertop can be modified. Steps for Modifying Countertops 1. Click either the Next Level or Previous Level button on the Main toolbar to show the peninsula countertop 2. Choose the Zoom In 3. Click and drag to select the area surrounding the peninsula counter top. 4. Double click on the outside corner of the peninsula to bring up the Counter Corner dialog box. 5. Select the Radius radio button. 6. Enter 10 for the radius size. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Repeat the same process for the next two outside corners with the exception of changing their radius to 12”. 9. Select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. button from the Main tool bar. Your view should now look similar to the following view. 4-22 Selecting Molding, Flooring, and Wallpaper If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. Selecting Molding 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Molding command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Upper Room tab. 4. Select Crown1 from the list of moldings. 5. Select the OK button from the Molding dialog box. Selecting Flooring 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Flooring command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select WOOD2 from the list of flooring. 4. Select the OK button from the Flooring dialog box. Selecting Wallpaper 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Wallpaper command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select Modern from the list of wallpaper. 4. Select the OK button from the Wallpaper dialog box. 4-23 Selecting 3D Objects If a floor plan view is not already onscreen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the 3D Objects command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select FURNITURE from the Category list. 4. Select TABLE (RECTANGULAR 48”X72”) from the list of 3D objects. 5. Select the OK button from the 3D Object dialog box. 6. Select Freehand for the method of placement. 7. Leave the Distance from floor value at “0”. 8. Select the OK button. 9. Click a location for the center of the table to the left of the peninsula. 10. Repeat this process for placing a Dining Room Ceiling Lamp at 96” high over the table. (It may be found in the Lighting category.) 11. Place a few Bar Stools in a similar fashion around the outside of the peninsula. (Select the Show All button as these are not currently categorized.) Your view should now look similar to the following view. 4-24 Seeing Your Designs From Different Viewpoints There are a number of ways to view your designs. Floor Plan View A floor plan is a two-dimensional view looking directly down on a room layout. • Select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. • Select the Floor Plan button from the View toolbar. Elevation View An elevation is a two-dimensional view looking directly at a wall displaying its height and width. It also provides a more detailed view of the cabinets and other items placed in a design. Perspective View A perspective allows you to create a three-dimensional view of a room from any location on the floor plan view. Selecting a Perspective View 1. Select the Perspective command from the View menu, or the Perspective button from the View toolbar. The active window automatically switches to a floor plan view with a displayed camera. 2. From the floor plan view, move the mouse pointer over the camera handle until the cursor changes to four-arrows. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the camera to the desired location and release the mouse button. 5. Move the mouse pointer over the camera direction handles until the cursor changes to four-arrows. 6. Click and hold the mouse button. 7. Move the camera direction handle to represent the direction you want the camera to view the room and release the mouse button. Align your camera with the view shown here to achieve the Perspective view shown below. 4-25 8. With the camera location and viewing direction set, click the OK button next to the camera. 9. A wire frame of the three-dimensional view is now displayed on the screen. This is your preliminary view. You can now choose the OK button to process the current view into a full color perspective, or use the following toolbar buttons to reposition the view: 4-26 Your view should now look similar to the following view. Tip: The best perspective is obtained when viewing a room by looking straight at one of the walls Bird’s Eye View A bird's eye view is a three-dimensional view from a distance directly over the room, looking straight down through the ceiling. Selecting a Bird’s Eye View 1. Select the Bird’s Eye command from the View menu, or the Bird’s Eye button from the toolbar. 2. A wire frame of the view is now displayed on the screen. This is your preliminary view. You can now choose the OK button to process the current view into a full-color bird’s eye view, or use the following toolbar to reposition yourself in the view: 3. After the OK button is selected, the program displays the Bird’s Eye view in full color in the current window. 4-27 Your view should now look similar to the following view. Render View A render view is a three-dimensional view of a room with lighting effects and real material textures added to different objects in the room. Selecting a Render View 1. First, select lighting for the room. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. Select the Render Lighting command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 2. Second, select material textures for the room and cabinets. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. Select the Render Textures command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Render command from the View menu, or the Render button from the View toolbar. The active window automatically switches to a floor plan view with a displayed camera. 4. From the floor plan view, move the mouse pointer over the camera handle until the cursor changes to four-arrows. 5. Click and hold the mouse button. 6. Move the camera to the desired location and release the mouse button. 7. Move the mouse pointer over the camera direction handles until the cursor changes to four-arrows. 8. Click and hold the mouse button. 4-28 9. Move the camera direction handle to represent the direction you want the camera to view the room and release the mouse button. 10. With the camera location and viewing direction set, click the OK button next to the camera. 11. The active window automatically switches to a rendered view. This is your preliminary view. 12. You can now select the Apply Textures button to process the current view into a rendered view with material textures, or select the Smooth Lines button to process the current view into a rendered view without jagged lines or edges, or use the following toolbar buttons to reposition the view: Tip: The options found in Render Preferences control the quality of your rendered view. Lighting location and properties have the greatest impact on the results of a rendered room design. 4-29 Your view should now look similar to the following view. Cabinet View At times it is necessary to view a single cabinet by itself. Some cabinets require the Cabinet View screen in order to be modified. Like the Elevation view, this is a two-dimensional view. 1. Select the Cabinet command from the View menu, or the Cabinet button from the View toolbar. 2. Select the cabinet to be viewed. 3. Select the Front, Back, Left, or Right button from the Main toolbar to choose the appropriate cabinet face to view and modify. 4-30 Your view should now look similar to the following view. Counter Tops View As was demonstrated previously, countertops may be viewed and modified from this screen. 4-31 Introduction to Rendering Cabnetware’s rendering System adds new heights of realism to your room designs by allowing you, the designer, the ability to give your customers 3D textured screens that look almost real enough to touch. In the sections that follow, we’ll go through the rendering process step-by-step. This tutorial may also be found in the Cabnetware Frame program’s On-Line Help. The On-Line Help includes short video clips that demonstrate many of the steps shown. Opening the Tutorial Kitchen If you do not have the Tutorial Kitchen open follow the steps listed below to do so. If the Tutorial Kitchen is still open on your computer skip this step and click the next button to continue. Opening a Room 1. Choose the Open Room command from the File menu. 2. Click to highlight Tutorial in the Current Job box. (If you double-click the name, the room will open immediately.) 3. Select the OK button to open the room. Creating a Scenic Backdrop Having a pleasant scene outside your window is always a nice touch. When rendering a room with more than one window, this little trick can add to the realism of the view. In our Tutorial Kitchen, we placed two windows at 90-degree angles to each other. Having the program render them both with the same texture will look a little peculiar, much like having two picture frames on the wall with the same picture. It would be better if we could see the same picture through both windows. Here how it’s done. button on the main toolbox twice. 1. Select the Zoom Out 2. Select the Exterior command from the Walls menu. 3. Move the pointer until the readouts at the bottom of the screen read X:240 & Y:108. 4. Click to anchor the starting point for this wall. 5. Move the pointer down and to the right until the readouts at the bottom of the screen read Angle=45.0 degrees & Length = 227”. 6. Click to anchor the ending point of the wall. 7. Press the right mouse button and select the Quit command from the Pop-up menu. 8. Select the Windows command from the Walls menu. 9. Enter 220” for the width. 10. Enter 96” for the Height. 11. Enter 0” for Distance from Floor. 12. Select the Render Texture button. 4-32 13. Select Windows for the Category in the Select Render texture dialog box. 14. Select Meadow for the Texture, and click OK. 15. Select the OK button in the Window dialog box. 16. Move the pointer to the center of the 227” wall, and click to place. Accuracy is not an issue in this situation. 17. Press the right mouse button and select the Quit command from the Pop-up menu. Making Windows Transparent A scenic wall was created, now we must make the windows transparent so the scenic wall will show through. If a floor plan view is not already on-screen, select the Floor Plan command from the View menu. 1. Click on the window located on the 265-1/4” wall. 2. Press the right mouse button and select Modify from the Pop-up menu. 3. Select the Render Texture button from the Window Modify dialog box. 4. Select Glass for the category, and Clear Glass from the Texture list. 5. Select OK to close the Select Render Texture box. 6. Select OK to close the Window Modify box. 7. Click on the window located on the 197” wall and repeat steps 2-6. Assigning Textures for Rendering Before a room design can be fully rendered, textures must be assigned. While this tutorial assigns textures to a room design after it was created, it is also possible to create default textures that will be assigned to every new job as it is created. Of course, these default textures may be changed at any time in a job, or anytime before creating a job. The default rendering settings are changed by clicking File, then Settings, then Preferences, then the Rendering tab, and finally the Room Textures, and/or the Appliance Textures button. Then follow the steps below starting with Setting Wood Grain Textures. What are textures? Textures are bit-map graphics used in rendering situations to give a realistic look to computergenerated images. For example: A panel of medium density fiberboard is not very pleasing to the eye. So, the manufacturer glues a piece of plastic or veneer to the face of the panel to simulate the look of solid wood. A computer does much the same thing. It takes a picture of wood grain or other texture and applies it to the face of an object. 4-33 Setting Job Render Textures 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Render Textures command from the Pick User Graphics menu. Setting Wood Grain Textures 1. Click on the Wood Grains button to select a texture file for those items that make up the construction of the cabinet. 2. Select Wood for the Category, and choose Wood 18 from the list. 3. Select the OK button. Note: Each of the six different kinds of cabinet faces may have a different wood texture assigned to them. This makes it possible to show a hickory casing with oak facings, door panels and frames, and ash moldings. Usually the same wood species will be used throughout a room design, but not always. The same concept is true for counters and walls. Setting Ceiling Textures 1. Click on the Ceilings button. 2. Select Ceilings for the Category list and choose Ceiling 01 from the list. 3. Select the OK button. Setting Counter Top Textures 1. Select the Counters group button to select a texture file for those items that make up the counter tops. 2. Select Formica from the Category list and choose 1816-58 Fogdust from the list. (There are a number of other possible Counter top categories reflecting other manufacturers of counter top materials.) 3. Select the OK button. Setting Floor Textures 1. Select the Floors button. 2. Select Flooring from the Category list and choose Floor 16 from the list. 3. Select the OK button. Setting Walls Textures 1. Select the Walls button. 2. Select Wallpaper from the Category list and choose Wallpaper 106 from the list. 3. Select the OK button. (Soffits were not selected because the Tutorial Kitchen room does not include soffits. The process is the same as listed above.) 4. Select the OK button. 4-34 Assigning Appliance Textures Appliances can look more realistic when rendered with applied textures. For the purposes of this tutorial, we will only select a few appliances to work with. Setting Appliance Textures 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Render Textures command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the Appliances button. 4. Select the Front button for the Refrigerator. 5. Select Appliances for the Category. 6. Select Refrigerator 2 from the Texture list. 7. Select the Refrigerator button. 8. Select Formica for the Category. 9. Select 837-58 Graphite from the Texture list. 10. Select the Front button for the Wall Oven. 11. Select Appliances for the Category. 12. Select Doubleoven 2 from the Textures list. 13. For now, select the OK button. (You may add others at some later date.) 14. Select the OK button again to close the Room Textures dialog box. 4-35 Creating a Light Source There are a number of ready-made light sources available for use in Cabnetware. However to better understand light sources, let’s create a few for our use later. Steps to Creating Light Sources 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Render Lighting command from the Setup menu. 3. Select the New button in the Render Lighting dialog box. 4. Click on the Spot radio button. Note: There are three radio buttons that affect the way light is cast in a design. The Directional Light button creates a lighting effect similar to sunlight coming into a room. The Point Light button creates a lighting effect similar to a light bulb casting light in all directions. The Spot Light button creates a lighting effect similar to a spotlight shining a focused beam of light in one direction. 5. Enter 96” High Medium Spot Light for the description. 6. Enter 95” for the Height. 7. Enter 1.00 for the Intensity. 8. Enter 2.00 for the Drop Off Rate. 9. Enter 90.00 for the Cut Off Angle. 10. Click the Down Arrow for the Elev. Angle. (The direction really doesn’t matter since the spot will be aimed straight down.) 11. Select the OK button. 12. Select the New button again. 13. Be sure the Point radio button is selected. 14. Enter 64” Hood Light for the description. 15. Enter 63” for the Height. 16. Enter 0.25 for the Intensity. 17. Select the OK button. 18. And select OK again. 4-36 Placing a “Point” Light Source Placing Light Sources in a Room design Can Help Set a Mood We will be using the Tutorial Kitchen that should have already been designed in previous steps in this tutorial. If the room is already open skip the next section and begin at Steps to Placing Lighting Sources. Opening the Tutorial Kitchen 1. Select the Open Room command from the File menu. 2. Select Tutorial from the Current Job list. 3. Select the OK button. Before any lighting sources are placed a default “kitchen light” is placed in the center of the room. Once a new lighting source is placed, the default unit disappears. Steps to Placing Lighting Sources 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Render Lighting command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the 96” High Medium Room Light from the list and select the OK button. 4. Move the pointer up to the location just above the sink base. Click the mouse to set the location. 5. Now move the pointer to the middle of the kitchen work area and click the mouse to set a light source there. 6. Click the right mouse button and select End Light from the Pop-up menu. 7. Now select the 64” Hood Light from the list and select the OK button. 8. Move the pointer over to the middle of the Cook top cabinet and click to place. 9. Press the right mouse button and select the Quit command from the Pop-up menu. 4-37 Placing a "Spot" Light Source Recessed spotlights over the peninsula cabinet add a level of sophistication and class. We should be in Floor Plan view to “install” our spotlights. Steps to Placing a Spot Light 1. Select the Pick User Graphics command from the View menu. 2. Select the Render Lighting command from the Pick User Graphics menu. 3. Select the 96” High Medium Spot Light item from the Select Light list. 4. Move the pointer to the center of cabinet #9, which should be the last peninsula cabinet. 5. Click to place the spot light over the cabinet. 6. Move the pointer to the center of the peninsula cabinet on the 66” wall and click to place. 7. Move the pointer over the peninsula cabinet on the 96” wall and place a spotlight along that cabinet. 8. Press the right mouse button and select Quit from the Pop-up menu. Rendering the View You should be in a floor plan view to begin. The initial render screen is where we will begin. The Initial Rendering 1. Select the Render command from the View menu, or the Render button from the View toolbar. The active window automatically switches to a floor plan view with a displayed camera. 2. From the floor plan view, move the mouse pointer over the camera handle until the cursor changes to four-arrows. 3. Click and hold the mouse button. 4. Move the camera to the bottom left quadrant of the room and release the mouse button. 5. Move the mouse pointer over the camera direction handles until the cursor changes to four-arrows. 6. Click and hold the mouse button. 7. Move the camera direction handle until it rests between the sink and the end peninsula cabinet. Release the mouse button. 8. With the camera location and viewing direction set, click the OK button next to the camera. 9. The active window automatically switches to a rendered view. This is your preliminary view. Rendering is a time intensive process dependent upon the speed of your computer, the amount of memory you have in your computer, and the speed of your graphic card. In other words, the faster the better. 4-38 Modifying Lighting Sources Adjusting light sources is an essential step in generating a pleasing rendered room design. The screen we just created might seem a little bright. Some of the lighting sources are too “hot” and need to be toned down. Below is the process by which lighting sources may be modified. Steps to Modifying Lighting Sources 1. Move the mouse pointer over the light source above the sink cabinet. 2. Click on the light source icon. 3. Press the right mouse button and select the Modify command from the Pop-up menu. 4. Change the Intensity to 1.00. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Repeat these steps for the light source in the middle of the kitchen work area; only change the intensity to 0.5. 7. Render the kitchen again and notice the difference. Rendering With Textures & Smooth Lines Adding realism with textures and screen smoothing adds that final touch to a rendered screen. Rendering with Textures 1. To add the textures you selected earlier in the tutorial, click the Textures button on the Rendering toolbar. 2. The rendering engine will process the screen and add the textures to the room. Rendering without “Jaggies” 1. To remove the jagged lines on the screen and make the view seem even more realistic, click the Smooth Lines button on the Render toolbar. (This is the most time intensive process.) 2. The rendering engine will process the screen again, this time smoothing the lines that seem jagged. Be patient, it’s worth the wait. 4-39 Rendering with the Wireframe View To quickly move the camera around a room, use the Wireframe View. Rendering a Wireframe View Rendered screens are composed of triangles that edge up against one another to make a solid item. These triangles are different sizes and shapes, and are placed in different ways to create a realistic image. (Those computer games your kids play use the same technology only much faster and far more complicated.) In the Preferences screen, you have the option to choose how small these triangles will be and how much smoothing will be applied. The rule is: The smaller, the better, but… The better, the slower. Why have a Wireframe view? While in the Wireframe view, you may shift the camera around much more quickly since the render engine does not have to take time to fill colors into the triangles. It also provides a means to see the level of detail being drawn in the Render view. Let’s render a Wireframe View. 1. If you still have the Rendered view on the screen, click the Wireframe button on the Render toolbar. 2. Try moving the camera around using the Camera Motion toolbar. If you tried moving the camera around in the initial render view, or the textured render view, you should notice a remarkable difference in speed. If you are running a slower machine (Pentium 166 or slower) this may be the best view to use in setting up your camera shot for the fully rendered view. 3. Once you set up the shot you like, click the Textures button on the Render toolbar. 4-40 Printing a Rendered View If you have a quality printer, you may print out your designs to give to your customers. You should have a rendered view on the screen from the previous step. Render the Room Again Render the room again with Textures and Smooth Lines. Printing the Finished View 1. Select the Print command from the File menu, or click the Print toolbar. button on the main 2. Select the Current View radio button. 3. If you have a good quality color printer, then click the Print in Color check box. If not, then de-select it. 4. Using the spin bar next to the Copies box set the number of copies to print. (For this tutorial, leave it at “1”. 5. Select the Print button to begin the process. (This can take some time because the screen will be redrawn for the printing process.) Congratulations! You have finished the tutorial. 4-41 Chapter 5 Cabinet Catalogs Overview Before the program can be used for room and cabinet design, you must first load a manufacturer's catalog from disks or create a new manufacturer’s catalog with cabinet lines and door styles. A Sample cabinet catalog has been supplied with the program with many of the typical cabinet sizes. This Sample catalog can be used to get you started in using the program, or it can be used as a template for creating your own catalog. Many of the major cabinet manufacturers’ catalogs are available from Cabnetware. Contact Cabnetware for a listing of the manufacturers’ catalogs that are available and their price. Loading a Manufacturer’s Catalog Before the program can be operated, a catalog must be entered into the program. If you have purchased a manufacturer's catalog, you will need to install it at this time. If a manufacturer's catalog was not purchased with the program, a “Sample Catalog” has been supplied. The “Sample Catalog” can be loaded and used until you become familiar with the operation of the program and begin entering your own catalogs. 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the Restore command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Catalogs radio button. 4. Select the drive that the catalog disk(s) will be copied from. 5. Select the Restore button. 6. If the catalog disk(s) contains more then one catalog, a list of catalogs from the disk will be displayed. Select a catalog from the list. If the catalog disk(s) contain only one catalog, the program will proceed to step #8. 7. Select the OK button. 8. The catalog name is now displayed on the screen allowing it to be changed if desired. 9. Select the OK button to begin the loading process. 10. If the catalog contains more then one disk, insert Disk #2 when prompted. 11. Continue with this process until all catalog disks have been copied. 12. When the catalog loading is complete, repeat this process to load a second catalog. 5-1 Manufacturer Setup The following steps will help you to identify and setup your own catalog. Use this procedure to create a new manufacturer and begin entering cabinets to the catalog. Entering a New Manufacturer The first step to creating a new catalog is to enter a manufacturer or catalog name. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Manufacturers from the Setup menu . 3. Select the Manufacturer radio button. 4. Select the New button. 5. In the Manufacturer Name text box, enter the name of the manufacturer, catalog, or your company name if you are building your own cabinets. 6. Select the OK button. 5-2 Creating a Cabinet Line After entering a manufacturer’s name, you need to create cabinet lines. The program has the ability to handle multiple cabinet lines for each manufacturer. You will be identifying each line as either a frame or frameless line. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Manufacturers from the Setup menu. 3. Select the new manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select the Cabinet Line radio button. 5. Select the New button. 6. Enter the name of the new cabinet line in the Line Name text box. 7. Select either the Frameless Line (Euro) or Frame Line option button. 8. Select the OK button. 9. Continue this process for each cabinet line for the selected manufacturer. Creating a Counter Top Parameter File Counter top parameters must be entered for each cabinet line. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Manufacturers from the Setup menu. 3. Select the new manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a new cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the Counter Top radio button. 6. Select the Edit button. 7. Answer all counter top parameter questions in the new parameter file dialog box. See Chapter 2 for explanation of Counter Top parameters. 8. Select the OK button. 9. Continue this process for each cabinet line for the new manufacturer. 5-3 Creating Layout Parameter Files At least one layout parameter must be entered for each cabinet line. Any number of layout files can be created to set up different cabinet layout situations. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Manufacturers from the Setup menu. 3. Select the new manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a new cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the Layout radio button. 6. Select the New button. 7. Enter the name of the new layout parameter file in the Line Name text box. 8. Select the OK button. 9. Answer all layout parameter questions in the new parameter file dialog box. See Chapter 2 for explanation of Layout parameters. 10. Select the OK button. 11. Continue this process for each cabinet line for the new manufacturer. Creating a Cabinet Parameter File Cabinet parameters must be entered for each cabinet line. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Manufacturers from the Setup menu. 3. Select the new manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select a new cabinet line from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the Cabinet radio button. 6. Select the Edit button. 7. Answer all cabinet parameter questions in the new parameter file dialog box. See Chapter 2 for explanation of Cabinet parameters. 8. Select the OK button. 9. Continue this process for each cabinet line for the new manufacturer. 5-4 Creating Door Styles All door, drawer, and end panel styles must be identified for each cabinet line. 1. Select Setup from the File menu. 2. Select Manufacturers from the Setup menu. 3. Select the new manufacturer from the Manufacturer list box. 4. Select one of the new cabinet lines from the Cabinet Line list box. 5. Select the Door Style radio button. 6. Select the New button. 7. Enter the name of the new door/drawer/end panel style parameter file in the Line Name text box. 8. Select the OK button. 9. Press the door, drawer, and end panel buttons in the door wizard and Answer all door & drawer parameter questions.. See Chapter 2 for explanation of Door/Drawer/End Panel wizard. 10. Create the elevation graphics of the door, drawer, and end panel. See Chapter 2 for explanation of Door/Drawer graphics and End Panel graphics. 11. Select the Finished button. 12. Continue this process for each door style for the new manufacturer and cabinet line. 5-5 Designing and Saving Cabinets to a Catalog Cabinet Organization Before you begin saving cabinets from a manufacturer's paper catalog into the program, take some time to review the organization of the cabinets. Many of the cabinet manufacturers organize their catalogs into wall cabinets, base cabinets, tall cabinets and vanities and sub-groupings; such as 24-inch wall, 30-inch wall, 36-inch wall, 42-inch wall, corner wall, peninsula wall, etc. The Cabnetware program uses the following categories: Base Upper Special Filler Corner Base Corner Upper Corner Special Lazy Susan Base Lazy Susan Upper Corner Sink End Split-Level All cabinets saved to the program’s cabinet catalog must be saved under one of the above categories. These main category names are fixed and cannot be changed. Each cabinet saved to the catalog; however, can be saved to a sub-category name which you create under the program’s fixed categories. It's more convenient to retrieve cabinets from a catalog when all similar wall cabinets have been saved together in a sub-category. An example might be to have 30" wall cabinets saved in a sub-category called "30-Wall", and all 42" wall cabinets in a sub-category called "42-Wall" etc., rather than trying to save all wall cabinets to one sub-category called "Wall". When all the various upper cabinet sizes are saved in the same sub-category, the list becomes very long. This makes it difficult to retrieve one cabinet in a whole list of cabinets. You have to scroll down through screen after screen to find the one you want. Thus, prior to designing and saving cabinets to the program’s catalog it's helpful to have a basic idea of the sub-category names that you will be using for each type of cabinet in the catalog. 5-6 In addition to organizing the category names; it is also helpful, for price entry later, to enter the cabinets in the same order in which they are listed in the manufacturer's catalog. The first cabinets saved to the program’s catalog should be the first cabinets listed in the manufacturer’s paper catalog. Most manufacturer's paper catalogs are well organized, and the order the cabinets are listed in is helpful for efficient entry. Many begin with Upper or Wall cabinets listed in order of increasing width as a group of common height. For example, the list might begin as: W1224 W1524 W1824 W2124 W2424 W2724 W3024 W3324 W3624 W1230 W1530 W1830 W2130 W2430 W2730 W3030 W3330 W3630 W1242 W1542 W1842 W2142 W2442 W2742 W3042 W3342 W3642 The first column is the names (code) for cabinets that are 24 inches high and vary in width on three-inch increments between 12 inches and 36 inches. The second column is the names of cabinets that are 30 inches high, and the third column is the names of cabinets that are 42 inches high. The next step is to actually design and save these cabinets to the catalog. By following the procedure discussed in the next section, you will be able to enter catalog cabinets into the Catalog. Opening a Room To begin designing cabinets to save to your program’s catalog, you must first open a room. 1. Select the New Room command from the File menu, or select the New Room button from the Main toolbar. 2. Enter “Catalog” as the name of the new room. 3. Select the Manufacturer and Cabinet Line that you want to save cabinets into. 4. Select a Layout parameter file that will allow you to design upper cabinets all the way to the ceiling. 5. Select a door style. It doesn’t matter which door style is selected. Cabinets do not get saved to the catalog with the door style it was created with. 6. It is not necessary to fill out room information. 7. Select the OK button on the Room Default dialog box. 5-7 Entering an Exterior Wall Entering walls is one of the first steps in identifying the room layout before cabinets can be designed and saved to the catalog. By designing one long wall, you are assured that you will have plenty of wall space to design a whole range of like cabinets at one time. 1. Select the Exterior command from the Wall menu, or select the Exterior button from the Wall toolbar. 2. Click on the upper left corner of the screen to represent a starting location. 3. Move the mouse to pull the length of the wall across the top of the screen. 4. When the wall has reach 400”, click the mouse. 5. Click the right button and select the Quit command from the Pop Up menu to quit wall layout. Be sure the walls are entered in a clockwise direction. This is very important since the program makes a distinction between the inside and outside of exterior walls. This insures that the cabinets you will be designing are always positioned inside the wall. 5-8 Designing Upper Cabinets Most manufacturer’s paper catalogs begin with upper cabinet. As we stated, it is important to enter cabinets to the program’s catalog in the same order as they are found in the paper catalog. This will save time in entering the prices later. 1. Select the Elevation command from the View menu. 2. Deselect the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Upper command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Upper cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 5. Enter the narrowest cabinet width when prompted. If 12” is the narrowest cabinet, enter “12”. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall and move the cabinet to the extreme left end of the wall and click the mouse again. 8. After placing the first cabinet, you are now prompted to enter the width of the next cabinet. 9. Enter the next largest cabinet width. If 15" is the next cabinet width, enter “15”. 5-9 10. Select the OK button. 11. Click on the wall and move the cabinet to the extreme left end of the wall overlapping the 12” cabinet by just a few inches and click the mouse again. Overlapping cabinets causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet. This allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 12. Continue this process for all widths in your catalog for 42" high cabinets. Because you set the wall height at 96 inches and the parameter distance from floor to upper is set at 54 inches, the program automatically creates cabinets 42 inches high. 5 - 10 Modifying Upper Cabinets After all the 42" cabinets have been entered on the wall, it may be necessary to modify the look of some of the cabinets. For example, the number of adjustable shelves may not match the manufacturer's cabinets or the type of door may not match (single vs. pair vs. pair w/mullion). 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Wait a second, then click on the selected cabinet’s section a second time. 3. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 4. Select the desired tab from the Section Modify dialog box and modify the current settings. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Continue this process for each cabinet section that needs modifying. Saving a Cabinet to the Catalog 1. Select the 12” wide upper to be saved to the catalog. 2. Select the Save Cabinet to Catalog command from the File menu, or click the right button and choose the Save to Catalog command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Select the New Category button and enter a category name (i.e., 42-WALL) for example to save all 42” upper wall cabinets. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Enter a cabinet name (W1242, for example). 6. Select the OK button. 7. Continue this process for all 42” upper cabinets. 5 - 11 Saving a Group of Cabinets to a Catalog 1. Without selecting a cabinet, select the Save Cabinet to Catalog command from the File menu. 2. Select the 12” wide upper when prompted. 3. Select the New Category button and enter a category name (i.e., 42-WALL; for example) to save all 42” upper wall cabinets. 4. Enter a cabinet name (W1242, for example). 5. Select the Keep Picking Cabinet check box. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Select another cabinet and continue the process for all 42” upper cabinets. The name you save cabinets to the catalog with are file names. All rules that apply to computer file names apply. You are limited to eight characters in length and the special file name character limitations apply. If the complete cabinet name doesn’t fit, abbreviate it. You will be able to give it a longer name later. Changing Upper Cabinet Heights The next series of cabinets to be saved are the 36" high cabinets. These can quickly be created by changing the height of the wall containing the 42” high cabinets from 96 inches to 90 inches. 1. Click on the wall to select it. 2. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 3. Change the Wall Height from “96” to “90”. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Make any necessary modifications to the cabinet. 6. Save cabinets to the catalog under a category name (i.e., 36-WALL; for example). 7. Continue this process for all upper cabinet heights. 5 - 12 Designing and Saving Base Cabinets We will begin designing base cabinets as standard drawer over door cabinets. 1. Deselect the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Base cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Enter the narrowest cabinet width when prompted. If 12” is the narrowest cabinet, enter “12”. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Click on the wall and move the cabinet to the extreme left end of the wall and click the mouse again. 7. After placing the first cabinet, you are now prompted to enter the width of the next cabinet. 8. Enter the next largest cabinet width. If 15" is the next cabinet width, enter “15”. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Click on the wall and move the cabinet to the extreme left end of the wall overlapping the 12” cabinet by just a few inches and click the mouse again. Overlapping cabinets causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet. This allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 11. Continue this process for all widths in your catalog for standard base cabinets. 12. Make any necessary modifications to the cabinet. 13. Save cabinets to the catalog under a category name (i.e., DWR-DOOR for example). Modifying Base Cabinets Saving base cabinets to the catalog is different from saving upper cabinets to the catalog; because base cabinets, except for vanities, do not change in height. However, they do change by section type. For example, there may be standard door and drawer cabinets; as well as full door, drawer bank, sink and desk cabinets. To save a series of these base cabinets that vary in section only; first design them in the various widths, and then change their sections to match the first type. 1. Click on a cabinet to select it. 2. Wait a second, then click on the selected cabinet’s section a second time. 3. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 4. Select the desired tab from the Section Modify dialog box and modify the current settings for your new cabinet configuration. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Continue this process for each cabinet section that needs modifying. For vanity base cabinets, place the various widths on the wall and change them to the vanity height and depth. Next, change the sections to match the cabinets. Finally, save them to the catalog under a new base category. 5 - 13 Designing and Saving Special Cabinets The Special type of cabinet in the program is very versatile. It can be designed to match utility cabinets, pantry cabinets, linen cabinets, wall cabinets with drawers and multiple sections, oven cabinets with microwave cut outs and bookcases. The process for saving these cabinets is similar to that for saving the other cabinets. 1. Deselect the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 2. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Special command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Special cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 4. Enter the necessary information in the Special Cabinet dialog box for the type of cabinet you want to design. 5. Select the OK button. 6. Enter the narrowest cabinet width when prompted. If 12” is the narrowest cabinet, enter “12”. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Click on the wall and move the cabinet to the extreme left end of the wall and click the mouse again. 9. After placing the first cabinet, you are now prompted to enter the width of the next cabinet. 10. Enter the next cabinet width. If 15" is the next cabinet width, enter “15”. 11. Select the OK button. 12. Click on the wall and move the cabinet to the extreme left end of the wall overlapping the 12” cabinet by just a few inches and click the mouse again. Overlapping cabinets causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet. This allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 13. Continue this process for all widths in your catalog for special cabinets. 14. Special cabinets first appear as an open section cabinet. Add the number of sections needed, horizontal and/or vertical; and change the type of section for each, as desired. 15. Save cabinets to the catalog under a category name. Modifying Special Cabinets Often special cabinets like utility cabinets come in three heights, 84", 90" and 96". To save time designing each cabinet height, you can create one height series ( 84", for example), with the wall height set at 84". Modify each and save them to the catalog. Then, change the wall height to 90". The program will automatically re-design the 84" cabinets to 90" cabinets. Usually this is done by increasing the height of the upper section only, of a two-section cabinet. Often all that is needed is to add an adjustable shelf and then save the 90" cabinets to the catalog. Do the same for the 96" cabinets. 5 - 14 Designing and Saving Corner Cabinets Corner cabinets are grouped into two major types, bases and uppers. They are further divided into corner (diagonal) types and lazy susan (pie-shape corner) types. The lazy susan cabinets can also be designed as L-shaped (pie-shape corner with unequal legs) in either upper or base types. The last type of corner cabinet is the corner sink cabinet. To save corner cabinets, place the desired size and type of cabinet in a room with a corner. If you have a series of different size corner cabinets, lay out a room with several corners and place a different size corner cabinet in each corner. Modify the cabinets to match the catalog cabinets and then save the cabinets to the catalog under a category you choose. Designing and Saving Double-Entry Island and Peninsula Cabinets Cabinets placed on islands and peninsulas that have access doors on both the front and back of the cabinet need to be saved to the catalog after performing special modifications. 1. Enter an island or peninsula wall. 2. Deselect the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Base or Upper command from the Cabinet menu; or select the Base cabinet or Upper cabinet button from the Cabinet toolbar. 5. Enter the narrowest cabinet width when prompted. If 12” is the narrowest cabinet, enter “12”. 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall and move the cabinet to the extreme left end of the wall and click the mouse again. 8. After placing the first cabinet, you are now prompted to enter the width of the next cabinet. 9. Enter the next wider cabinet width. If 15" is the next cabinet width, enter “15”. 10. Select the OK button. 11. Click on the wall and move the cabinet to the extreme left end of the wall overlapping the 12” cabinet by just a few inches and click the mouse again. Overlapping cabinets causes the program to automatically bump the new cabinet to the side of the existing cabinet. This allows the program to identify finished and unfinished ends correctly for the layout situation. 12. Continue this process for all widths in your catalog for double-entry base or upper cabinets. 13. Click on a cabinet to select it. 14. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 15. Select the Backs tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box. 16. Select the Sections radio button from the Backs tab. 17. Continue this process for each cabinet that needs modifying. 18. Save cabinets to the catalog under a category name (i.e., DBL-FACE. for example). 5 - 15 Designing and Saving Fillers It is not necessary to save fillers to the catalog because the program automatically adds and prices any needed fillers to the room design. But, if you want to save special fillers of various grades, the program allows for this. 1. Enter a wall. 2. Deselect the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 3. Select the Place command from the Cabinet menu. 4. Select the Filler command from the Cabinet menu. 5. Select either Base, Upper, Special, Etc. from the Filler menu. 6. Enter the narrowest filler width when prompted. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Place the filler on the wall. 9. Modify any fillers as needed. 10. Save filler to the catalog under a new category name. Designing and Saving Split-Level Cabinets The Split-Level cabinet is a base cabinet that has two different depths in the same cabinet. Place these cabinets on a wall the same way you would a base cabinet. Modify the sections to match your split-level cabinet and save it to the catalog under an appropriate category. 5 - 16 Designing and Saving Appliance Cabinets The program allows you to save appliances and cabinets as a unit. What is meant by this is that a cabinet that is used to enclose a sink, cook top, refrigerator box, or oven can be saved to the catalog with the sink, cook top, refrigerator or walloven with it. When it is retrieved from the catalog later; the sink, cook top, refrigerator or oven will appear with its cabinet. Of course, you may save these cabinets without appliances, as well. 1. Enter a long wall. 2. Deselect the Catalog command from the Appliance menu. 3. Select an appliance from the Appliance menu. For the following example, select the Sink command. 4. Select the Custom button from the Appliance list dialog box. 5. Enter the appliance information in the Appliance dialog box. The appliance width you type in depends on the construction of the cabinet. For a frame cabinet, type in the desired cabinet width minus twice the cabinet stile width. This will create a cabinet that fits exactly around the sink. For example, if the final cabinet width you want is 36", and the stile width of your frame cabinet is 1.5", type in "33" for the appliance width. For a frameless cabinet, the width of the appliance is the final cabinet width minus twice the exterior material thickness. For the 36" sink cabinet example in frameless, type in 34.5 inches for the appliance width for cabinets with a material thickness of 3/4". 6. Select the OK button. 7. Click on the wall. 8. Move the sink to about 15” from the left end of the wall and click the mouse again. 9. Continue placing sinks, leaving about 15” between sinks when placed on the wall. 10. Deselect the Catalog command from the Cabinet menu. 11. Select the Fast Fill command from the Cabinet menu. 12. Select the Base command from the Cabinet menu. 13. Move your mouse pointer to the middle of the wall and click the mouse to fill base cabinets across the whole wall. 14. Select each cabinet that does not have a sink in it; and press the Del key to remove these cabinets to avoid confusion. 15. Modify the sink cabinets as needed. 16. Save sink cabinets to the catalog under a new category (i.e., SINK, for example). 5 - 17 Designing and Saving Return Cabinets When designing return or blind corner cabinets, it is necessary to design and save both a right return and a left return cabinet for each size listed. 1. Enter a long wall. 2. Enter base or upper cabinets on the wall for each of the blind corner cabinet widths. 3. Click on a cabinet to select it. 4. Click the right mouse button to select the Modify command from the Pop Up menu. 5. Select either the Left End or Right End tab from the Cabinet Modify dialog box depending on the cabinet end on which you want to place the return panel. 6. Select the Unfinished radio button from the Left End or Right End tab. 7. Select the Return Panel check box. 8. Verify the Return Panel width in the Left End or Right End tab. 9. Continue this process for each cabinet. 10. Save return cabinets to the category that matches their type. For example, save the 30" high return cabinets to the "30-Wall" category and the 42" high return cabinets to the "42-Wall" category. When designing with these cabinets later, the return cabinets will automatically be available for designing corner situations. The same applies for base return cabinets. 11. When assigning a catalog name to return cabinets, remember to add the R or L to the name to differentiate between left and right returns. Since you can't exceed the eight-character limit and you can't duplicate names, some planning is needed when assigning these names. Designing and Saving Special End Cabinets The flexibility of the program allows saving a number of special end cabinets. These can be upper, base or special cabinets. They include cabinets such as curved door, radius end, clipped end, angle end and full radius end cabinets. These cabinets need to be designed and saved in both the left and right end configurations. They can be saved to their own categories for easy access later; but remember to add the R or L to their names. 5 - 18 Catalog Pricing Setup After all cabinets have been saved to the catalog, the next step is to set up the pricing for the new catalog. Pricing allows the entry of values used by the program for calculating proposals, quotes and order forms for room designs. This price includes profit, overhead, tax percentages, markups and discount percentages; and cabinet and accessory prices. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. Select the Pricing command from the Setup menu. 5 - 19 Entering Profit, Overhead, and Tax Percentages Profit, overhead, and tax percentages are entered and used by the program for proposal and quote calculations. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select the manufacturer’s catalog you just created from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Profit/Overhead/Taxes radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. Enter percentages for profit and overhead. 7. Enter a description and percentage for up to three tax rates. 8. Select the OK button. If profit and overhead are already included in your basic cabinet prices, enter a zero value for profit and overhead. 5 - 20 Markups/Discounts A list of different markup and discount rates can be created and made available for selection before a proposal, quote or order form is calculated. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Markups/Discounts radio button. 5. Select the New button. 6. On the Markup/Discount dialog, select the Markup radio button if this is a markup, or the Discount radio button if this is a discount. 7. Enter a Description and Percentage for the markup or discount. 8. Under Apply Percentage to, select the check-box in front of each item the markup or discount will apply to. 9. Under Apply to Percentage, select the appropriate check-box as to whether profit, overhead or taxes will apply to the percentage. 10. Select the Hidden Price check-box if you do not want the markup or discount to be printed as a line item on a proposal, quote or order form. This markup or discount will still be calculated as a percentage into each appropriate line item. 11. Select the OK button. 12. Continue this process for each markup or discount you want to create. 5 - 21 Price Prompts Price prompts allow for the creation of prompted line items that are printed and calculated into the total price of a proposal, quote or order form. A good example of price prompts are items that are entered into a proposal, quote or order form that have a fixed price or a price that you want to be prompted for by the program. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Price Prompts radio button. 5. Select the New button. 6. On the Price Prompts dialog, enter a Description and Amount for the price prompt. If you want the program to prompt you for a price before the calculation of a proposal, quote or order form; enter a “0” in the Amount field. 7. Under Apply to Prompt, select the appropriate check-box as to whether profit, overhead or taxes will apply to the prompt. 8. Select the OK button. 5 - 22 Text Prompts Text prompts are questions asked by the program before printing of an order form. The responses to the text prompts are used by the program to fill out text prompt fields on the order form. Text prompt fields must be entered on the order form template for the program to print the text prompt responses. Refer to the Order Form template. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select the new manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Text Prompts option button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. On the Text Prompts screen, enter up to thirty text prompts. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Select the Done button. 5 - 23 Catalog Cabinet Line Names Before prices can be entered for cabinets saved to the catalog, cabinet names must first be entered for each cabinet line. The purpose of this is twofold. First, it allows for the entry of unique cabinet names for each cabinet line for any given cabinet you saved to the catalog. Second, it lets the program know which cabinets saved to the catalog are available for each cabinet line. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets under the Cabinet Names column that have been saved to the catalog. 7. Click on a blank cell where the cabinet line intersects with the cabinet name and enter the name (or size) of the cabinet as you want it to appear for that cabinet line. Leave the cell blank if you do not want a cabinet to be available for a given cabinet line. 8. Continue this process for each cabinet under each cabinet line. 9. After entering the cabinet names for each cabinet line, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 10. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. A row of asterisks in a cell indicates that there is either no face frame or frameless cabinet saved in the catalog for this cabinet and cabinet line. 5 - 24 Catalog Cabinet Pricing Now that cabinet names have been entered, you can begin to enter the prices for those cabinets. 1. Select the Setup command from the File menu. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Catalog Cabinets radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets for each cabinet line. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The next screen displays a grid with the names of cabinets in the left column. Across the top of the grid is the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cell where the door style intersects with the cabinet name and enter a price for that cabinet with that door style. By entering a negative number in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that this door style is not available for this cabinet. 11. Continue this process for each cabinet under each door style. 12. After entering the cabinet prices, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 13. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 5 - 25 Entering Manufacturer Accessories Accessories available from the cabinet manufacturer are entered as manufacturer accessories. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Enter a descriptive name for all manufacturer accessories down the Accessory Name column. 8. Select the pricing method in the Pricing column for each accessory. The % symbol represents that the value entered for an accessory price will be a percentage of the price of the cabinet it is attached to. 9. Enter the manufacturer’s accessory order codes in each of the cabinet line columns. 10. After entering accessories, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 11. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Creating Accessory Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select the Categories command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the New button from the Category dialog. 9. Enter a category name. 10. Select the OK button. 11. Continue this process for each category you wish to create. 12. If sub-categories are desired, select a category name and the Sub Cats button from the Category dialog. 13. Select the New button from the Sub Categories dialog. 14. Enter a sub-category name. 15. Select the OK button. 5 - 26 Organizing Manufacturer Accessories Using Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select categories and sub-categories for each accessory in the Category and Sub Category columns. 8. After entering categories and sub-categories for all accessories, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 9. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Entering Manufacturer Accessory Pricing 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Manufacturer Accessories radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the accessory grid. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The next screen displays a grid with the line names of each accessory in the left column. Across the top of the grid is the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cell where the door style intersects with the accessory name and enter a price for that accessory with that door style. By entering a negative number in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that the accessory is not available for this door style. 11. Continue this process for each accessory under each door style. 12. After entering the accessory prices, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 13. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 5 - 27 Entering Modifications Some cabinet manufacturers allow customization of their stock cabinet line. In some cases when a stock cabinet is modified, a prefix or suffix is added to the stock cabinet code and a up-charge is added to the cabinet’s cost. The following details the process of setting prefix and suffix codes and related prices for cabinet modifications: 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modifications radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the modification grid. 7. Enter a descriptive name for all modifications down the Modification Name column. 8. Select the pricing method in the Pricing column for each modification. The % symbol represents that the value entered for a modification’s price will be a percentage of the price of the cabinet it is attached to. 9. Select the location of the modification code for a cabinet from the Locator column for each modification. Selecting Item, indicates that the modification designation should be added as an additional line item, under the cabinet code on all printouts. Selecting Prefix, indicates that the modification code should be added as a prefix to the cabinet code and the price combined with the cabinet price. Selecting Suffix, indicates that the modification code should be added as a suffix to the cabinet code and the price combined with the cabinet price. Selecting Replace, indicates that the modification code should replace the cabinet code and the price combined with the cabinet price. 10. Enter the modification order codes in each of the cabinet line columns. 11. After entering modifications, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 12. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 5 - 28 Creating Modification Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the Modification grid. 7. Select the Categories command from the Edit menu. 8. Select the New button from the Category dialog. 9. Enter a category name. 10. Select the OK button. 11. Continue this process for each category you wish to create. 12. If sub-categories are desired, select a category name and the Sub Cats button from the Category dialog. 13. Select the New button from the Sub Categories dialog. 14. Enter a sub-category name. 15. Select the OK button. Organizing Modifications using Categories 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the Modification grid. 7. Select categories and sub-categories for each modification in the Category and Sub Category columns. 8. After entering categories and sub-categories for all modifications, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 9. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 5 - 29 Entering Modification Pricing 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Modification radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the Modification grid. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The next screen displays a grid with the line code names of each modification in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cell where the door style intersects with the modification name, and enter a price for that modification with that door style. By entering a negative number in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that the modification is not available for this door style. 11. Continue this process for each modification under each door style. 12. After entering the modification prices, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 13. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Entering Filler Sizes Cabinet fillers are entered separately from the cabinets in the catalog. Fillers are priced by the program looking in the following Filler grid for the matching filler size or the next largest filler size. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Fillers radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the Filler grid. 7. Enter the various widths and heights of fillers available from the manufacturer under the Width and Height columns. 8. Enter the filler order codes in each of the cabinet line columns. 9. After entering fillers, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 10. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. 5 - 30 Entering Filler Prices 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Fillers radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next screen displays the Filler grid. 7. Select a cell in the line that you will be entering prices for. 8. Select the Prices command from the Edit menu. 9. The next screen displays a grid with the line code names of each filler in the left column. Across the top of the grid are the door names for the selected cabinet line. 10. Click on a blank cell where the door style intersects with the filler name and enter a price for that filler with that door style. By entering a negative number in a cell, the program will display N/A. This tells the program that the filler is not available for this door style. 11. Continue this process for each filler under each door style. 12. After entering the filler prices, select the Close button from the Main toolbar. 13. When prompted to Save Changes, select the Yes button. Proposal Wording Bid Wording is the contractual text used by the program to print on a proposal for a customer. Separate wording can be used on both the top and bottom portion of the proposal. 1. From the File menu select Setup. 2. From the Setup menu select Pricing. 3. Select a manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. 4. Select the Bid Wording radio button. 5. Select the Edit button. 6. The next dialog is divided into two parts - Upper Text Lines and Lower Text Lines. 7. Click on the Upper Text Lines text box and type in the wording as you want it to appear at the top of your bid. 8. Click on the Lower Text Lines text box and type in the wording as you want it to appear at the bottom of your bid. 9. Select the OK button. 5 - 31 Backing up a Cabinet Catalog When you have finished entering your catalog, make a back-up copy of the catalog on a disk and keep them in a safe place. 1. Select the Utilities command from the File menu. 2. Select the Backup command from the Utilities menu. 3. Select the Catalogs radio button. 4. Select the drive that will accept the files. 5. Select the Backup button. 6. Select a cabinet catalog from the list. 7. Select the OK button. 8. Insert a disk in the prompted drive. 9. Select the OK button. 10. Label the disk(s) when finished. 5 - 32 Chapter 6 Appendix Glossary Active Window The window in which you work is the active window. The active window receives the next command or action. Applied Finished Ends An applied finished end is a panel that is placed on a cabinet end after the cabinet is built. In most cases it will be applied to the finished end of a run of cabinets when the cabinets are installed at the job site. This allows the end to be scribed to the wall to compensate for any wall irregularities. Back Up To make a duplicate of a file or a group of files, assuring that the original version of the file is protected should something happen to it. Break Point A point where a line or edge has been broken into two or more segments. Cancel A command button used to close a dialog box without making changes to the information. The Esc key also closes a dialog box. Cascade Windows A command that diagonally stacks windows so that the title bars show. Catalog An electronic form of a manufacturer's paper catalog. Any collection of designed cabinets or appliances can be saved in the program to a catalog for future retrieval. Check Box A square box in a dialog box that can be toggled on or off. Check boxes usually set several options. Click To quickly press and release the left mouse button. Combo Box A term used by Windows-compatible software to refer to a dialog box that provides a listing of available choices. The entire list will either be shown or accessible by using the down arrow on the right end of the box. New choices may be entered in a Combo Box. It is a combination of a Text Box and a List Box. Command A word or phrase usually found in a menu that opens a dialog box, enters a mode, or carries out an action. 6-1 Command Button A term used by Windows-compatible software to refer to a dialog box control that causes an action to occur. The action depends on the definition of the button. Help, OK, Cancel, Edit, and New are all examples of command buttons. Control Menu A menu that is common to all windows. The Control Menu is used to resize, move, minimize, maximize, or close a window. The box located in the upper left corner of a window that opens the Control Menu. Control Menu Box The box located in the upper left corner of a window that opens the Control menu. Control Panel A Windows program tool containing commands for installing printers, printer ports, fonts, and other program options. The Control Panel icon is usually located on the Main window of the Program Manager. Cursor A bar or bracket showing the entry point for placing text. Default The preset options built into the program. Use the Preference command in the Setup menu to change many of the program’s default settings. Deselect To move the pointer away from a selected image and click the left mouse button so that the surrounding handles disappear. Dialog Box A window that appears when the program needs information from you before it can carry out an action. Direction Keys The arrow keys (up, down, right, or left). Dithering Dithering is a process of placing different color dots next to each other in a pattern to simulate a color. Disabled An option or command that appears in gray type and is not available. Door Mullion A door mullion is a mullion or stile that is placed between a pair of doors without a partition separating the cabinet into sections or openings. Double Click To rapidly press and release the left mouse button twice without moving the mouse. DPI DPI stands for Dots Per Inch. The number of dots (pixels) per inch on the display or printing device. 6-2 Drag To point to an image with the mouse and press and hold the left mouse button, and move the mouse so that the image moves across the screen. Filler A finished material part used to hold cabinets away from walls or to fill openings. Flush A reference to two adjacent surfaces that are even or in the same plane. Frame and Panel Doors and Drawers A five or more piece door or drawer where an outside frame is typically constructed with a panel inset in the middle. A square raised panel door is a good example. Font A specific set of characters in a specific typeface design. General Protection Faults General Protection Faults, Application Errors and system lockups generally indicate memory problems. These problems can include memory shortages, memory conflicts, and sometimes corrupted files. Unless an error or lockup becomes predictable, it is often difficult to pinpoint the exact cause of the problem. Grid A series of horizontal and vertical dots that criss-cross the drawing area. You can snap CAD lines to the grid for exact placement. Handles Square boxes that appear on the corners and sides of an image when clicked on with the mouse for editing. Handles are used to move or resize an image. Hatch Patterns A fill pattern composed of spaced lines occurring at regular intervals. Hint Lines An on-line message that appears at the bottom of the window that provides information about a feature. Hourglass Cursor The pointer changes to an hourglass symbol to indicate that the program is performing an operation, such as saving a file. When the cursor returns to a pointer, you can continue working. Icon A small graphic symbol that represents a command. Increments An amount by which cabinet width is increased. Stock cabinets are often supplied in 3-inch increments. Integral Cabinet A custom cabinet made up of more than one section or opening in width. Joint A junction of two pieces of wood or veneer. 6-3 Laminated Finished Ends A laminated finished end is a piece of wood veneer or plastic laminate that is glued to a cabinet side to make it a finished end. Landscape The position of a design on paper. Landscape orientation displays a page taller than it is wide when viewing the printed document upright. Lap A type of joint that is composed of two pieces overlapping each other. List Box A dialog box option containing a list of names. Maximize Box The Maximize Box is located in the upper right corner of each window. It is used for enlarging the window to fill the screen. The face around the window can also be used to resize the window. Menu A list of commands organized under a title on the Menu Bar. For example, the Help menu is a list of commands for on-line help. Menu Bar The bar at the top of a window containing menu titles. Minimize Box The Minimize Box is located in the upper right corner of each window. It is used to reduce the size of the window. The face around the window can also be used to resize the window. Modular Cabinet A cabinet made up of only one section or opening in width. Modular cabinets are often referred to as stock cabinets. Molding A decorative strip of wood that often goes around the top of upper wall cabinets, toe kicks, base boards, etc. Mullion Any vertical face frame part located between outside stiles. Opening Width The opening width is the opening distance between stiles and mullions. Option Button A term used by Windows-compatible software to refer to a dialog box control that works in groups to allow the user to select one option from a set of options. Only one option may be selected within each group. Output Device Any device that accepts a printed document. For example, a printer, plotter, or Fax/Modem. Page Orientation The position of a design on paper. Portrait (vertical) orientation displays a page taller than it is wide. Landscape (Horizontal) orientation displays a page wider than it is tall. 6-4 Paneled Finished Ends A paneled finished end is like a raised panel door that takes the place of the finished end, and is built as an integral part of the cabinet box. Paper Size The physical size of paper in the printing device. Parallel Two straight lines at the same angle that do not intersect. Parameter Adjustment All parameters with the word adjustment will subtract from the part size any value that is entered. A minus sign before a value will always add to the length of a part. Partition Any vertical member found on the interior of cabinets between cabinet sides. Partitions are usually located behind face frame mullions to separate cabinet sections. Path The drive and directory in which the computer is told to search for specific files. Perpendicular Two straight lines that intersect at 90 degrees. Perspective A technique of realistically representing a three-dimensional object on a flat surface. Pointer The graphic object located on the screen that is moved with the mouse. Pop-Up Menu A menu of specific commands for a selected object that is available by pressing the right mouse button. Portrait The position of a design on paper. Portrait orientation displays a page wider than it is tall when viewing the printed document upright. Polygon A closed shape or symbol made of straight lines such as a square, triangle, or star. Press To press and hold down the mouse button momentarily. Print Area The area on your physical paper size that can be printed on by your printing device. Print Spooler A Windows accessory that creates a print file before printing begins. This allows you to continue with a project while the printer is printing. Rails Any horizontal face frame parts or any horizontal part used to make a frame on a frame and panel door or drawer. 6-5 Refresh To redraw the current window. This lets you clear the screen of unwanted fragments that can result from manipulating a design. Return Cabinet A return cabinet is a standard base, upper, or pantry cabinet that contains a blanked off area on the face of the cabinet on either side. This cabinet is placed in a corner of a room and used to accept a cabinet butting into it from the adjacent wall. It is also often referred to as a blind cabinet, blank corner cabinet, square corner cabinet. Resolution A measurement of data for monitors (expressed as pixels per square inch) and printers (dots per square inch). RGB RGB stands for red, green, and blue. Changing the red, green, and blue values allows you to display different colors from the color spectrum. Right-Click Feature A right-click is a single press and release of the right mouse button that causes an Instant Options Menu to appear. Screen Fonts Fonts specially created to appear correctly on the screen. Scribe A part of the cabinet that rests next to the wall or ceiling that is shaped to conform to its irregular shape. Scroll To move a visible portion of the drawing area within a window. Scroll Arrows The arrows at the right side and bottom of a window that allow you to move the display vertically and horizontally across the window. Scroll Bars The bars at the right side and bottom of a window that allow you to move the display vertically and horizontally across the window. Select To choose an image, command, button, or icon with the left mouse button. A selected cabinet displays handles. Shortcut Keys A key, or keys used in conjunction with the Alt, Ctrl, or Shift keys that executes a command without selecting it from a menu. Shrink to Fit Reduces a view to fit the current window size. Slab Doors and Drawers A one piece door that is typically banded with either solid or veneer material. 6-6 Soffit A boxed-down area of the ceiling that is usually found directly above upper wall cabinets. Split-Level Cabinet A base cabinet that has more than one counter height. A reception desk is a good example of a split-level cabinet. Stiles A vertical face frame part located on the ends of cabinets, or a vertical part used to make a frame on a frame and panel door or drawer. Stock Cabinet A catalog or inventory of available pre-made or standard cabinets. Submenu A submenu opens when you choose a command from a menu with an arrow opposite it. Submenus provide additional commands that are related to the desired task you want to accomplish. Text Block A blinking vertical bar or bracket that indicates where to begin entering or editing text. Tile Window A command that places windows side by side, or top to bottom so that all windows show on the screen at one time. Title Bar The bar across the top of a window that contains the window, program, or file name. Toe Kick A material placed and inset into the front bottom of a cabinet to accommodate your feet when standing close to the cabinet. It is sometimes referred to as a toe board. Toggle Alternately turning a function on or off. Toolbars Toolbars contain pictorial buttons that give you quick mouse access to many commands in the program. Trim A finishing material, such as molding applied around cabinets, doors, windows, ceilings, etc. True Type Font An outline font that displays correctly and prints on almost all printers. Window A rectangular area on the screen that displays the program. A window can contain several different drawings windows within its work area. 6-7 Program .INI File The program uses an initialization file on startup that reflects the users PREFERENCES. This file typically is in the directory where the main program files are located (by default this would be \CABWARE), and would normally be called DESIGN.INI. This file is read upon entry into the program and updated every time you exit the program. [Startup] Maximized=Yes RuntimeVersion=COMMERCIAL Runtime Style=EURO LastRoom=C:\CABWARE\ CWFRAME\ JOBS\JANU.A01 XYLoc=6;6;450;450 Starts the program in a Maximized window. Specifies Authorized Version of Cabnetware. Specifies Authorized Style of Cabnetware. Indicates the last room saved. (ANU job, Room 1). Suppress Hint=No Indicates the location of the non-maximized window. Referenced from the upper left (in pixels). Shows the Quick Start screen upon entry to the program. [Password] Checkboxes=0000000 Password= Indicates whether a feature is password protected. (1 is on). User defined password. [Path Names] Parameters=C:\CABWARE\ CWFRAME\PARMS Objects=C:\CABWARE\ CWFRAME\3DOBJECT Appliances=C:\CABWARE\ CWFRAME\APPL Cabinets=C:\CABWARE\ CWFRAME Jobs=C:\CABWARE\CWFRAME\ JOBS Graphics=C:\CABWARE\ CWFRAME\GRAPHICS Help=C:\CABWARE\CWFRAME\ HELP Optimizer Program=C:\CABWARE\ CWOPTMZR.EXE C:\CABWARE\CWOPTMZR.INI CNC Center Program= C:\CABWARE\CNC.EXE CNCAPP.INI Labels=C:\PROGRA~1\AVERY~1 Label Program=C:\PROGRA~1 \AVERY~1\LPWIN32.EXE Textures=C:\CABWARE\ TEXTURES Share=C:\CABWARE\SHARE DXF Style=0 DXF Export= DXF Filename= Render Program= Editor Program=Write.exe DOS path to parameters. DOS path to 3D-Objects. DOS path to Appliances. DOS path to Catalog location. DOS path to location of Jobs. DOS path to location of User Graphics. DOS path to Help files. Panel Optimization program. And the .INI file that is read when the Optimization program starts. CNC Center program and the .INI file that is read when the CNC program starts. Label program location File that starts the Label program. DOS path to the Texture files. DOS path to shared files (profiles etc.) Style of DXF Export file (0=Visual Reality, 1= AutoCAD) DOS path where DXF file is exported. (Default is \\\JOBS). Preferred DXF file name. (Jobname01.DXF is the default). Program used for rendering the DXF output. (Optional) Program used to edit Quotes/Proposals-Cutlists. 6-8 Form Editor Program=Edit.com Slide Show= Program used to edit the Order Form. Location of slide show files. [User Info] Checkboxes=111111111 Line1= Line2= Line3= Line4= Line5= Line6= Line7= Line8= Line9= Indicates which User Info checkbox is checked. (1 is on). User response to ‘Company Name’ line. User response to ‘Address1’ line. User response to ‘Address2’ line. User response to ‘Address3 line’. User response to ‘Phone (Voice)’ line. User response to ‘Phone (Cellular)’ line. User response to ‘Phone (Home Phone)’ line. User response to ‘Phone (Fax)’ line. User response to ‘Contact’ line. [Display Options] Checkboxes=1001001110111101 11 Report=None Thumbnails=1111000011100101 1Counter Options=11110 Layout Options=1 [General] Radiobuttons=101010101010 Fraction=3 System Holes=0 Backup Drive=A Enable Pricing Import Export=1 Enable Set Door Counts=1 Room Backups=1 Num Backup Changes=1 Num Backup Levels=5 Indicates which display check boxes are checked. (1 is on). Indicates which report display is checked. Indicates which Thumbnails are on/off. Indicates which Counter top display options are checked. Enables the cabinet placement options, Bump Left/Right. (Late 4.24 Ver 12-8-98) Indicates which radio button is picked in ‘General’. (1 is on). Indicates the rounding off fractional setting chosen. (3=1/16). 32mm system hole option. (Reserved for EuroVer in metric.). Indicates the floppy disk drive selected for backups. Allows import/export of pricing file for spreadsheet use. Allows Door Counts to be automatically done in pricing setup. Turns the Auto backup feature on / off. Writes out a backup file after this many modifications. Writes out this many backup files. [Scales and Dimensions] Floor/Elevation=0.020830 Cross Section=0.041670 Detail=0.250000 Dim Height=0.093800 Dim Spacing=1.500000 Pointer Style=3 Metric=0 [Multi Draw] Pertains to Layout Mode. (Screen and Printing). Indicates the scale of the views when printed. (1/4”: 1’ =.25 ÷ 12 = 0.02083). Indicates the scale of a cross section when printed. Indicates the scale of a detail when printed. Indicates the size of dimensions when printed. Separation factor between rows of dimension lines. Indicates choice of dimension pointer style. (3=Arrow). Indicates choice of metric or imperial measurements. Pertains to Multi Draw Mode. 6-9 Floor/Elevation=0.020830 Cross Section=0.041670 Detail=0.250000 Dim Height=0.093800 Dim Spacing=1.500000 Pointer Style=3 Metric=0 Page Width=8.500000 Page Height=11.000000 Top Margin=0.500000 Bottom Margin=0.500000 Left Margin=0.500000 Right Margin=0.500000 Landscape=1 Print Border=1 Title Box=.5 Cutlist] Checkboxes=00000000000 Rows/Cols=Rows Fractions/Decimals=Fractions LCD=B,D,E,F Optimizer=100 Corner Base Backs Butting=R,0.75 Corner Upper Backs Butting=L,0.75 Swap Special Backs=1 Flip PNA Units=Y [Estimator] Wording Flags=111 Indicates the scale of the views when printed (to scale). Indicates the scale of a cross section when printed. Indicates the scale of a detail when printed. Indicates the size of dimensions when printed. Separation factor between rows of dimension lines. Indicates choice of dimension pointer style. (3=Arrow) Indicates choice of metric or imperial measurements. Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper width. Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper height. Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper top margin. Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper bottom margin. Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper left margin. Indicates chosen Multi Draw output paper right margin. Indicates output print orientation (1=Landscape). Indicates choice to print a border that frames Multi Draw page. Multiplier for default size. (Default =12”) Pertains to Cutlist versions only. Indicates what groups to print on cutlist. (1 is on). Indicates style of door / drawer cutlist printout. Indicates choice of dimension display. Creates ASCII file of various cutlist information (B=‘Parts File’) Creates .PNA file instead of .PNL (for Cutrite). Adjustment for corner cabinet backs. (Right back deducts.75”). Adjustment for corner cabinet backs. (Left back adds .75”). Re-orients special cab. Backs 90 degrees. (For CNC). Swaps units when cutlist is in inches and desired optimizer input is metric (or vice versa) Detail Level=High Proposal Wording=Es.txt Price By Lines/DoorStyles=Room Change Order Wording=Esch.txt Pertains to Estimating reports. Indicates whether specific wording will print on reports. (1 is on). Indicates which information fields print on reports. (1 is on). Indicates choice of metric or imperial pricing units. Indicates chosen pricing factors. (1 is on). Indicates if you want Room Information printed on the Quote and Proposal. Indicates Job Costing detail level. Indicates text file to insert on the Proposal. Indicates the Order form cabinet listing method (Designer). Indicates text file to insert on the Change Order. [Fonts] Dimension Font=Arial Report Font=Courier New Multidraw Dimension Font=Arial Cad Font=Courier New Default Cad Font Height=.125 Cutlist Print Font=MS LineDraw Cutlist Print Font Height=7 Pertains to Font selections. Indicates chosen Dimension font. Indicates chosen Report font. Indicates chosen Dimension font used in Multi Draw. Indicates chosen CAD font. Indicates the default CAD font size. Indicates the Cutlist Print Font Indicates the Cutlist Print Font Height (point size) Printing Flags=1111111111 Metric=0 Price Factors=111 Room Information=1 6-10 Cutlist Dimension Height=7 Cutlist Pint Lines Page=80 Normal Print Font=Courier New Normal Print Font Height=12 Normal Print Lines Page=60 Condensed Print Font=Courier New Condensed Print Font Height=8 Condensed Print Lines Page=80 No OEM Charset Available=0 Cutlist Left Margin=0 Cutlist Top Margin=0 Condensed Top Margin=0 Condensed Left Margin=0 Normal Top Margin=0 Normal Left Margin=0 Indicates the dimension height showing on Individual cutlist. Indicates the number of lines printed on Master / Batched Cutlist. Indicates the Font used on the Proposal. Indicates the font height used on the Proposal. (point size) Indicate the number of lines per page on the Proposal. Indicates the font used on the bid / job report Indicates the font height used on the bid / job report (point size) Indicates the number of lines per page used on the bid / job report. Concerns Order Form. 0=Uses resident character set of printer, 1=allows foreign character sets; 2=Draws symbols. Inches to shift left margin on cutlist. Inches to shift top margin on cutlist. Inches to shift top margin on bid/job report. Inches to shift left margin on bid/job report. Inches to shift top margin on the proposal. Inches to shift left margin on the proposal. [Wall Layout] Wall Style=0 Wall Thickness=4.500000 Wall Height=96.000000 Wall Radius=100.000000 Wall Arc Angle=90.000000 Wall Window Width=48.000000 Wall Window Bottom=42.000000 Wall Window Size=36.000000 Wall Door Width=36.000000 Wall Door Size=80.000000 Wall Start Snap Distance=10.00000 Pertains to Wall Layout Mode. Indicates floor plan wall pattern (Hatch etc.) (0 = Standard). Specifies default wall thickness. Specifies default wall height. Specifies default wall radius when doing radius walls. Specifies default wall arc when doing radius walls. Specifies default window width. Specifies default window placement above the floor. Specifies default window height. Specifies default passage door width. Specifies default passage door height. Specifies distance at which walls will snap if connecting. [Tool Boxes] View Tools=1,1,0,0,0,alLeft,32,228 Wall Tools=1,1,32,0,0,alLeft,32,172 Appliance Tools= 0,2,901,175,0,alNone,40,447 Cabinet Tools= 0,2,0,0,0,alBottom,536,32 CAD Tools= 1,2,0,0,0,alBottom,732,32 Closet Tools=0,3,0,0,0,alNone,1,-1 Speed Bar=1,0,0,0,0,alTop,482,32 Pertains to visibility and placement of toolboxes. (‘0’ indicates a toolbox is not showing; “1” is visible). (,‘2’ indicates the number of columns of display). (,,’100’ indicates ‘X’ placement in pixels from left). (,,,‘75’ indicates ‘Y’ placement in pixels from top). alLeft,alRight etc. = aligned left, right etc [Miscellaneous] Fit Views=1 Indicates whether the view expands/contracts to fit a window. (Speed bar = main tool bar) 6-11 Angle Increment=15.000000 Length Increment=1.000000 Fine Tune Pixels=3 Select Object Border=7 Zoom In Factor=1.200000 Zoom Out Factor=0.800000 Max Snap Distance=24.000000 Counter Snap Pixels=10 Default Fill Mode=Fill Fast Snap Hold Pixels=10 Height Increment Start= Cab Dialog=353,228 [CAD Preferences] Cursor Type=2 Fill Type=1 Angle Increment=15.000000 Length Increment=1.000000 Snap Grid Increment=1.000000 On Snap Grid=0 On Angle Increments=0 On Length Increments=0 Erase Any Line=0 Enable 3D=0 Vertical Mirror=0 Horizontal Mirror=0 Use Custom Color=0 Hatch Spacing=1.000000 Cad Color=0 Fill Pattern= [Grid Preferences] FloorplanElevation Grid=0,1,12.000000 Counter Top Grid=0,1,12.000000 Multidraw Grid=0,1,12.000000 ItemAppliance Grid=0,1,1.000000 Cross Section Grid=0,1,1.000000 Molding Grid=0,1,0.250000 Symbol Grid=0,1,1.000000 Detail Grid=0,1,0.250000 Flooring Grid=0,1,1.000000 Handle Grid=0,1,0.250000 3D Object Grid=0,1,1.000000 Door/End Panel Grid=0,1,1.000000 Window Door Grid=0,1,12.000000 Constrains the wall layout to specific angles. Incremental size used when laying out non-fine tuned walls. Adjusts the mouse travel when using the center button. Outline size around a selected item. Multiplier for the Zoom up when a click is used. Multiplier for the Zoom out when a click is used. Distance used when referencing the cursor with respect to a wall on the floor plan view. Distance used when highlighting a counter top point or line. Preferred cabinet placement mode. Allows snap to ‘hold’ a distance before losing focus. Upper cabinet increment starting value. Placement of Catalog Cab. Selection dialog after positioning. Pertains to User CAD Preferences. Indicates selected CAD cursor style. (2 = X shape). Indicates selected CAD fill style. (1 = solid fill). Indicates the angle CAD lines will adhere to. Indicate the length increment CAD lines adhere to. Indicates the grid CAD lines adhere to. Indicates if Snap Grid is selected or not. Indicates if CAD lines will be on selected angles or not. Indicates if length increments are used when CAD lines are drawn. Enables the erase of any line or only CAD lines. Enables CAD features for 3-D views. Enables Vertical Mirror when drawing. Enables Horizontal Mirror when drawing. Allows the use of a custom color when drawing. Sets the spacing on a selected hatch fill. Indicates the custom color selected in CAD. Indicates the Bitmap fill pattern selected in CAD. Pertains to Grid sizing and styling in various views. (“0” turns off the display of the grid). (“1” indicates the style of grid. 1= dashed). (“12.00” indicates the grid spacing) (Grids are available in most areas of the program where the user needs to reference CAD lines and other features). Mechanical Symbols CAD grid. (Designer and CabnetWorks only). Details CAD grid. (CabnetWorks only). Flooring CAD grid. Handle CAD grid. 3-D Object CAD grid. Door/End Panel CAD grid. Window/Passage Door CAD grid. [Print Options] Color Fill=N Pertains to printer selections. Indicates if views print in color. 6-12 Print Window=Y Print Bitmap=Y To Scale=N Print DPI=150 Use MemoryDC=2 [Options] Ambient Light=0.50 Cosine Delta=0.06 Gamma=2.50 Special Fill Mode=Y Indicates if you are printing the ‘window’. (Usually a zoomed up view). Indicates if you a doing a ‘Quick Print’. Indicates if you are printing to scale. Last selected print quality. Print Resolution multiplier. 2=default. More is less. Overall amount of ambient lighting. (0.50=default). Rate of change in the ambient light over angular change. (0.06=default). A numerical representation of contrast. Lets you enhance midtones and shadow detail without washing out highlights. (2.50=default). Allows fast filling of modular cabinets with increasing sizes based on the current modular increment setting in the Layout parameters. Helpful when creating Catalogs. [Tip] TimeStamp=Thu Jul 03 1997 FilePos=1635 Pertains to User tips on the start up screen Date of user tip text file. Last position in the user tip text file. [Dash Lines] Screen Length=7 Screen Gap=2 Print Length=7 Print Gap=3 Plot Length=7 Plot Gap=3 Pertains to display and printing of dashed lines. Length of dashed line segments (in pixels) on screen. Gap between dashed line segments on screen. Printed length of dashed line. Gap between printed line segments. Length of plotted dashed line segment. Gap between plotted dashed line segments. 6-13 Microsoft Access Database When a proposal, quote, or order form is run in The Designer program, all information available for the job, room and cabinets are written into a Microsoft Access database format. Popular programs such as reporting, accounting, inventory, and MRS systems can use this information. The following is a diagram of the database format: Job Info Job Info_1 Job ID Job Number Job Name Job PO Number Job Account Name Job Terms Job Order Date Job Delivery Date Job Sales Person Dealer Company Name Dealer Address1 Dealer Address 2 Dealer Address 3 Dealer Phone Voice Dealer Phone Fax Dealer Phone Cell Dealer Phone Home Dealer Contact Name Customer Name Customer Address 1 Customer Address 2 Customer Phone Customer Fax Customer Contact Designer Name Designer Address 1 Designer Address 2 Designer Phone Designer Fax Designer Contact Contractor Name Contractor Address 1 Contractor Address 2 Contractor Phone Contractor Fax Contractor Contact Ship to Name Ship To Address 1 Ship To Address 2 Ship To Phone Ship To Directions Contract Text Contract Terms Job Notes Itemized Prices Tax1 Tax2 Tax3 Room Totals Grand Totals Job ID Job Number Job Name Job PO Number Job Account Name Job Terms Job Order Date Job Delivery Date Job Sales Person Dealer Company Name Dealer Address1 Dealer Address 2 Dealer Address 3 Dealer Phone Voice Dealer Phone Fax Dealer Phone Cell Dealer Phone Home Dealer Contact Name Customer Name Customer Address 1 Customer Address 2 Customer Phone Customer Fax Customer Contact Designer Name Designer Address 1 Designer Address 2 Designer Phone Designer Fax Designer Contact Contractor Name Contractor Address 1 Contractor Address 2 Contractor Phone Contractor Fax Contractor Contact Ship to Name Ship To Address 1 Ship To Address 2 Ship To Phone Ship To Directions Contract Text Contract Terms Job Notes Itemized Prices Tax1 Tax2 Tax3 Room Totals Grand Totals 6-14 Room Info Room ID Room Name Room Quantity Room Cabinet Count Room Accessory Count Base Door Style Name Upper Door Style Name Door Color Door Outside Edge Door Inside Edge Door Panel Profile Room Molding Type Manufacturer Cabinet Line Counter Top Type Counter Top Color Cabinet Wood Species Cabinet Exterior Color Cabinet Interior Color Cabinet Edge Banding Room Notes Cabinet Info Room ID Cabinet ID Quantity Style Long Name Short Name Cabinet Hinge ID Cabinet Slide ID Cabinet Pull ID Cabinet Shelf Count Cabinet Rollout Count Cabinet Weight Cabinet Volume Cabinet Height Cabinet Depth Cabinet Width Cabinet Finished Sides Cabinet Door Hinging Door Drawer ID Unique Door Style Cabinet Box Price Cabinet Total Price Cabinet Price Line ID Prices Info Job ID Profit Percent Overhead Percent Multiplier Percent Tax 1 Name Tax 1 Percent Tax 2 Name Tax 2 Percent Tax 3 Name Tax 3 Percent Line Info Line ID Line Name Frame or Frameless Manufacturer ID Manufacturer Info Manufacturer Name Address 1 Address 2 Phone # Fax # Contact Person Door Drawer Style Info Door Drawer ID Door Drawer Name Door Color Door Edge Door Wood Species Door Unit Price Drawer Color Drawer Edge Drawer Wood Species Drawer Unit Price Line ID Door Drawer Details Room ID Cabinet ID Door Drawer ID Door Quantity Drawer Quantity Accessory Info Accessory ID Door Drawer ID Long Name Short Name Unit Price Pricing Method Category Sub Category Accessory Details Room ID Cabinet ID Accessory ID Quantity Room / Cabinet Generic / Line Modification Info Modification ID Long Name Short Name Category Sub Category Pricing Method Unit Price Locator Line ID Door Drawer ID OrdrFrm Markups / Discounts Proposal Markups / Discounts Room ID Description Percent Subtotal Only (Y/N) Hidden Price Catalog Cabinets Custom Cabinets Manufacturer Accessories Generic Accessories Modifications Fillers Profit Overhead Total Price Job ID Description Percent Subtotal Only (Y/N) Hidden Price Catalog Cabinets Custom Cabinets Manufacturer Accessories Generic Accessories Modifications Fillers Profit Overhead Total Price Hardware Info Hardware ID Unit Price Category Room ID Description Combination 1 Price Combination 2 Price Combination 3 Price Combination 4 Price Quote Markups / Discounts Job ID Description Percent Combination 1 Price Combination 2 Price Combination 3 Price Combination 4 Price Quote Cab & Acc Prices OrdrFrm Price Prompts Proposal Price Prompts Room ID Description Amount Profit Overhead Tax1 Tax2 Tax3 Room ID Description Amount Profit Overhead Tax1 Tax2 Tax3 Room ID Description Quantity Combination 1 Price Combination 2 Price Combination 3 Price Combination 4 Price Quote Combinations Room ID Combination 1 Combination 2 Combination 3 Combination 4 Modification Details Modification ID Room ID Cabinet ID Quantity Quote Preferences OrdrFrm Text Prompts Proposal Preferences Room ID Answer1 Answer2 Answer3 Answer4 Answer5 Answer6 Answer7 Answer . . . Answer 45 Job ID Room ID Description Amount 6-15 Quote Price Prompts Job ID Description Combination 1 Price Combination 2 Price Combination 3 Price Combination 4 Price Proposal / Quote Taxes Quote Price Prompts_1 Job ID Tax Name Combination 1 Amount Combination 2 Amount Combination 3 Amount Combination 4 Amount Job ID Description Combination 1 Price Combination 2 Price Combination 3 Price Combination 4 Price Common Questions Why am I losing faces on my perspectives? In almost all cases this is caused by cabinets, counter tops, or any other items in your room design overlapping or crossing each other. Overlapping and crossing items in a room design can produce unexpected results. When an item or object crosses another item, the computer needs to determine which face is in front of the other and often makes mistakes. This is true of all 3-D programs. Why do I get General Protection Fault errors? General Protection Faults, Application Errors and system lockups generally indicate memory problems. These problems can include memory shortages, memory conflicts, and sometimes corrupted files. Unless an error or lockup becomes predictable, it is often difficult to pinpoint the exact cause of the problem. The following lists a number of steps that should be followed when dealing with random and predictable system problems. If the problem can be re-created, then follow the steps one at a time in order to determine which step cures the problem. After any GPF, application error or lockup • Save files that are currently open, if possible. • Exit from all applications including Windows. • Ensure that the system meets the program’s minimum requirements. • Reboot the system • Run Scandisk. • Check for virus using a Virus Checking Program. • Disable or uninstall alternative window shells (i.e., Norton Desktop, dashboard, Central Points PCTools for Windows.) • Turn off all TSR's (i.e., screen savers, disk cache, displayers, mouse watchers, etc.) • Change video to the standard Windows VGA driver (256 colors 640x480 resolution). Other graphic cards using comparable VGA resolutions may be accessing different memory addresses and may be causing a memory problem (Video or GPF related). • Reinstall the program. • If none of these steps resolve the problem, please contact Technical Support for further assistance. 6-16 Why is my mouse not working under Windows? If your mouse is not working under Windows or in our program, it could be because of one of the following reasons: • If you are using a serial mouse, make sure that you are using either COM1 or COM2. You cannot use COM3 or COM4 with a mouse in Windows. Check to see which COM port your mouse is plugged into. Also make sure Windows is set up using the Ports option in the Control Panel. • Check the hardware interrupt (IRQ) that the mouse port is using and determine whether there is another device set to use the same IRQ. If there is an IRQ conflict with the COM or BUS port the mouse is connected to, the mouse will not work. The mouse pointer won’t move. If the mouse pointer won’t move it could be for one of the following reasons: • If the mouse pointer appears on the screen but doesn’t move, choose the Windows Setup icon in the Main group to display a list of Windows settings. Make sure that the mouse you are using is listed. If you have the wrong mouse selected, choose the correct mouse from the list. • If you have the correct mouse selected and the mouse pointer still doesn’t move, see whether there is an IRQ conflict between your mouse port and another device. The mouse pointer is jumping around the screen. If the mouse pointer is jumping around the screen and not moving smoothly, you might have one of the following problems: • Your mouse needs to be cleaned so that the ball or wheel moves freely. • You have a hardware interrupt conflict. You need to set up the mouse so that it isn’t using the same IRQ settings being used by another device. Why is my printer not printing? When a printer is not printing, the problem is often mechanical. For example, the printer could be off-line, turned off, or disconnected. The following are some other things to check: • Is the printer turned on? • Is the printer on-line? • Do you have paper in the printer? • Does your printer need a new ribbon or ink cartridge? • If you are using a switch box, do you have the switch in the proper position? • Do you have the correct cables for your printer and are they connected properly? For example, if you are using a Hewlett Packard plotter, you need a special Hewlett Packard plotter cable. If you think there is a cable problem, try another cable. • Do you have the right printer selected in your application for the printer you are using? • Have you selected the right printer port in your application that matches the port your printer is using? Check also your Control Panel in Windows to see if the printer and port are configured properly. 6-17 Why is the printer only printing part of a page? If the printer is only printing part of a page, check the following: • The most common cause of this is insufficient memory in the printer. We would recommend that you put more memory in your printer. If you are printing graphics, try lowering the print resolution. • Make sure you are choosing the proper paper size for the paper you have loaded in your printer. • Make sure you have selected the correct memory settings in the printer dialog. If you have select more memory than the printer has, you will only get a partial page. Why is the printer printing garbage? If the printer is printing unreadable text or strange characters for graphics, check the following: • Make sure the correct printer driver is installed and selected for your printer. • Make sure the cables are connected properly. It sometimes helps to pull the cable off and reseat the cable. You may also have a faulty printer cable. • The printer’s buffer may contain garbled information. Try turning off the printer, waiting a few minutes and turning it back on again. • If you are using a Serial printer, make sure you have the right baud rate selected for your printer port. Choose the Ports icon on the Control Panel and lower the setting. Why do I get Out of Memory messages? If you receive an Out of Memory message while trying to start the program, check the following: • Close some applications that are not being used. • Make sure there is enough memory on the hard drive if you are using a swap file in Windows. If possible set up a permanent swap file. • If wallpaper is being used in Windows, change the wallpaper setting to None. • Are you running the minimum memory requirements for the program? If not, you may need to add more memory to the computer. Why does my monitor flicker when I run Windows? If you are using a high-resolution video mode (such as 1024 x 768), the screen may appear to flicker because of the rate at which the monitor scans, refreshes, or updates the screen. Using a video driver at a lower-resolution will remove the flickering from the screen. 6-18 Why do my colors look strange? Monitors and printers use a process called dithering to compensate for its inability to display some colors. This process lets you display some colors on a screen or printer that are not actually available. If a color is supported by your graphics adapter or monitor it is displayed as a solid color. If the color is not available, the color is changed to the closest color or dithered color that is available. Dithering becomes pronounced when you are running Windows in 256 colors or less. If you are working with color in the program, it is recommended that you use more than 256 colors, if supported by your graphics card or monitor. Setting your display to a greater number of colors lets you avoid dithered colors. 6-19 Troubleshooting Techniques While working in Cabnetware, you may encounter problems printing, saving files, opening files, etc. Though each individual problem may have a different cause, there are some general steps you can follow in attempting to troubleshoot your problem. In many cases it will save you a call to Technical Support! Can you duplicate the problem? Try performing the same function again. This is the first step in troubleshooting. Occasionally, a temporary memory problem will interrupt a function, and simply trying again will allow you to complete that task. Problems that can't be reproduced are difficult to explain. Continue working, but note details of the circumstances if the problem does occur again. That will enable Technical Support to assist you more effectively if you decide to call. If you can duplicate the problem, it may be file, program or system specific. Proceed to the next step. Is the problem system specific? This step is sometimes appropriate at the beginning of a troubleshooting session and is sometimes left to the end. Before spending a lot of time analyzing the causes of a problem, it is often a good idea to determine if the problems occur only on one system. This is easy to do, if you have access to another computer and can try your function or file here. Or, if the problems are printing related, try using a different printer. If the problems persist on more than one system, zero in on file specific issues. If not, concentrate on the system settings, installation and finally hardware issues. If you do not have access to another system running Cabnetware, proceed to the next step. Is the problem file specific? If you can reproduce the problem, the culprit may be the file itself, the Cabnetware program or something about this particular system. This step attempts to determine if the problem is unique to this file or if it may be caused by a program or system issue. If you are having problems saving, printing or exporting, etc., try opening another file of the same type and perform the same function. If the subsequent file works properly, you are most likely dealing with a file that contains a corrupted item or may be too complex for the particular room you are trying to design. If so, see the notes below on Dealing With Complexity Issues or Dealing With Corrupted Objects or Files. The goal, again, is to determine whether problems are contained in the file or are caused by something else. 6-20 Is the problem software specific? If a problem is reproducible but not limited to just one file, then problems are being caused by the program, other software on the system, drivers, Windows, or by hardware. If it is possible to try the same files and functions on another system, you can determine whether the root of the problem is based on one system as opposed to being software generated. If this test is not possible, try to collect as much information as possible about whether the problem occurs only in the application. You can do this by trying to perform similar functions; i.e., printing, designing, etc. into other Windows applications. If problems appear in other applications, then the cause is at a more basic level than the program. Sometimes video or printer drivers can cause problems. Sometimes there are even problems with a particular Windows setup. Memory Problems The common troubleshooting steps associated with handling memory errors are: 1. Save the file immediately. 2. Exit the application and Windows. 3. Reboot the system. 4. Make sure you have 100 MB of free disk space to accommodate future .TMP file creation. Temporary Files Windows and many Windows applications, including Cabnetware, create temporary files. Sometimes these temporary files can become damaged or they are not deleted when they should be. This often occurs if you reboot or turn off your computer without properly exiting Windows. You should routinely delete Windows and Cabnetware temporary files to ensure that the files do not become a problem. 1. Select the Programs command from the Start button. 2. Select the Windows Explorer command from the Programs menu. 3. Double-click the Windows folder to open it. 4. Double-click the Temp folder within the Windows folder to open it. 5. Delete all files in the Temp folder. Disabling TSRs and other Memory-Resident Programs If you suspect problems with TSRs or memory-resident programs such as screen savers and virus checkers, you may want to consider optimizing your Windows setup by removing them. Also remove all TSRs from your AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. If following the above steps does not allow you to resolve the problem you are encountering, you may wish to contact Technical Support. 6-21 Improving System Performance Here are a number of considerations for improving the performance of Cabnetware: • Upgrading to a faster microprocessor will enhance the performance of Cabnetware. A Pentium processor is faster than a 486, while a 486 is faster than a 386. • The microprocessor’s clock speed is important; i.e., a Pentium -300 will run Cabnetware more quickly than a Pentium -200. • Increase your system’s memory. • Ensure that you have at least 100 megabytes of free disk space on the drive where Window *.TMP files will be created. • Replace your hard drive with a new hard drive that has a faster access speed. A 10millisecond drive is faster than an 18-millisecond drive. • Ensure that you have 300 megabytes of free disk space on the drive where you store your program files. • Defragment ("clean up") your hard disk by running a disk defragmentation program. • Set up Windows for 32-bit file and hard drive access. • Increase your video card’s memory. You may want to consider an accelerated video card. We unfortunately cannot make recommendations on any hardware. 6-22 Support Services Technical Support Cabnetware recognizes that support needs vary from user to user, and we offer you a wide range of choices when you need answers to your technical questions and problems in using your software. If you have a question about your program’s features and functions, first look in the manual or consult your On-line Help. You can also find late-breaking update and technical information by double-clicking the Readme Icon in the Cabnetware program group. If you are still having difficulty finding the answer you are looking for, you can speak to a Technical Support Representative by dialing the following number: Voice (530) 666-6647 8:00am to 4:30pm Pacific Time Monday - Friday (not including Holidays) Before You Call Before calling Technical Support, please have the following information documented and available in front of you. It will assist the Technical Support Representative in helping you with your problem more quickly and efficiently: • A brief description of the problem including the exact text of any error messages received, and the steps used to recreate it. • Type of computer, monitor and video card (display adapter) you are using. • Type of pointing device in use (i.e., mouse, tablet). • Type of printer that you are using to print files. • The version of Cabnetware on your computer. • The DOS version on your computer. • The Microsoft Windows version on your computer. • A list of any changes you made to your computer, Windows setup, or Cabnetware setup prior to this problem. • A list of any programs loaded into RAM (i.e., TSR's). • The contents of the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. You must be a registered user to access Cabnetware’s Support Services. Fax Support Technical Support also maintains a fax system for you to send questions or comments. If you have a fax machine, you have access to this service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Fax (530) 666-4474 6-23 Email Support Technical Support has an email address for you to send questions or comments. If you have email, you have access to this service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. [email protected] Website Support Technical Support has a web page containing common support questions. If you are on the Internet, you have access to this service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. www.cabnetware.com Local Dealer Support Cabnetware has a network of Authorized Dealers. Each dealer is a trained professional with your Cabnetware product. Your local dealer will be glad to help you with any additional training required. Customer Service Support Customer Service Representatives can answer questions about products, pricing, and updates. They can also issue replacement disks and manuals. If you are leasing your program from Cabnetware, Customer Service will take care of all leasing payments and the updating of your lease key. Voice (530) 666-6647 8:00am to 4:30pm Pacific Time Monday - Friday (not including Holidays) Wish List You can write, call, or fax Cabnetware at anytime with a list of features or improvements that you would like to see added to the program. Your comments and recommendations have made Cabnetware the #1 software in the industry today. Attention: Customer Support 1240B Commerce Ave. Woodland, CA 95776 Voice (530) 666-6647 8:00am to 4:30pm Pacific Time Monday - Friday (not including Holidays) Fax (530) 666-4474 24 Hours a Day Please note that we receive a large number of suggestions and comments regarding Cabnetware software and are unable to respond directly to each one. However, be assured that your 6-24 recommendations, ideas, and remarks are recorded and help shape future versions of the program. Support Services Technical Support Planit Solutions recognizes that support needs vary from user to user, and we offer you a wide range of choices when you need answers to your technical questions and problems in using your software. If you have a question about your program’s features and functions, first look in the manual or consult your On-Line help. If you are still having difficulty finding the answer you are looking for, you can speak to a Technical Support Representative by dialing the following number: Voice (866) 675-6551 8:00am to 4:30pm Pacific Time Monday - Friday (not including Holidays) Before You Call Before calling Technical Support, please have the following information documented and available in front of you. It will assist the Technical Support Representative in helping you with your problem more quickly and efficiently: • A brief description of the problem including the exact text of any error messages received, and the steps used to recreate it. • Type of computer, monitor and video card (display adapter) you are using. • Type of pointing device in use (i.e., mouse, tablet). • Type of printer that you are using to print files. • The version of Cabinetware on your computer. • The DOS version on your computer. • The Microsoft Windows version on your computer. • A list of any changes you made to your computer, Windows setup, or Cabnetware setup prior to this problem. • A list of any programs loaded into RAM (i.e., TSR's). • The contents of the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. You must be a registered user to access Planit Solutions’ Support Services. Fax Support Technical Support also maintains a fax system for you to send questions or comments. If you have a fax machine, you have access to this service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Fax (530) 666-4474 Email Support Technical Support has an email address for you to send questions or comments. If you have email, you have access to this service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 6-25 [email protected] Website Support Technical Support has a webpage containing common support questions. If you are on the Internet, you have access to this service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. www.planitsolutions.com Local Dealer Support Planit Solutions has a network of Authorized Dealers. Each dealer is a trained professional with your Planit Solutions product. Your local dealer will be glad to help you with any additional training required. Customer Service Support Customer Service Representatives can answer questions about products, pricing, and updates. They can also issue replacement disks and manuals. If you are leasing your program from Planit Solutions, Customer Service will take care of all leasing payments and the updating of your lease key. Voice (800) 280-6932 8:00am to 4:30pm Central Time Monday - Friday (not including Holidays) Wish List You can write, call, or fax Plant at anytime with a list of features or improvements that you would like to see added to the program. Your comments and recommendations have made Planit the #1 software in the industry today. Attention: Customer Support 1240B Commerce Ave. Woodland, CA 95776 Voice (866) 675-6551 8:00am to 5:00pm Pacific Time Monday - Friday (not including Holidays) Fax (530) 666-4474 24 Hours a Day Please note that we receive a large number of suggestions and comments regarding Planit products and are unable to respond directly to each one. However, be assured that your recommendations, ideas, and remarks are recorded and help shape future versions of the program. 6-26 Worksheet for a Typical Drawer Bank Frame Cabinets Top thickness ......................:_____ Top rail.................................:_____ Drawer No. 1 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 1..................:_____ Drawer No. 2 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 2..................:_____ Drawer No. 3 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 3..................:_____ Drawer No. 4 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 4..................:_____ Drawer No. 5 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 5..................:_____ Drawer No. 6 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 6..................:_____ Drawer No. 7 opening..........:_____ Drawer rail No. 7..................:_____ Last Drawer opening ...........:_____ Last Drawer rail ...................:_____ Toe kick ...............................:_____ Total of the above ................:_____ Overall Height of Cabinet ....:_____ Frameless Cabinets Top thickness ......................:_____ Top rail exposure.................:_____ Drawer No. 1 height.............:_____ Drawer rail No. 1 gap...........:_____ Drawer No. 2 height.............:_____ Drawer rail No. 2 gap...........:_____ Drawer No. 3 height.............:_____ Drawer rail No. 3 gap...........:_____ Drawer No. 4 height.............:_____ Drawer rail No. 4 gap...........:_____ Drawer No. 5 height.............:_____ Drawer rail No. 5 gap...........:_____ Drawer No. 6 height.............:_____ Drawer rail No. 6 gap...........:_____ Drawer No. 7 height.............:_____ Drawer rail No. 7 gap...........:_____ Last Drawer height ..............:_____ Bottom exposure .................:_____ Toe kick ...............................:_____ Total of the above ................:_____ Overall Height of Cabinet ....:_____ Note: For a typical drawer bank to work, the "Total of the above" and "Overall Height of Cabinet" must be equal. 6-27 Preference and Parameter Worksheets Preferences GENERAL PREFERENCES Dimensions: (0) Fractions (1) Decimals ________________________________________________________________ Round to Nearest __________________________________________________________________________________ Parameters: (0) Inches (1) Millimeters _________________________________________________________________ Appliances: (0) Inches (1) Millimeters__________________________________________________________________ Room Design: (0) Inches (1) Millimeters________________________________________________________________ PATH PREFERENCES Parameters Path ___________________________________________________________________________________ 3D Object Path ____________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Catalog Path _____________________________________________________________________________ Cabinet Catalog Path _______________________________________________________________________________ Jobs Path ________________________________________________________________________________________ User Graphics Path_________________________________________________________________________________ Plotter Type_______________________________________________________________________________________ Plotter Port: (0) Parallel (1) Com1 (2) Com2 ____________________________________________________________ Printer Type ______________________________________________________________________________________ Printer Port: (0) Parallel (1) Com1 (2) Com2 ____________________________________________________________ USER INFORMATION PREFERENCES Contact __________________________________________________________________________________________ Company Name ___________________________________________________________________________________ Address__________________________________________________________________________________________ Phone(Voice) _____________________________________________________________________________________ Phone(FAX) ______________________________________________________________________________________ Phone(Cellular) ____________________________________________________________________________________ Phone(Home) _____________________________________________________________________________________ Color Postscript Printer (0) No (1) Yes _________________________________________________________________ 6-28 SCALES AND DIMENSIONS PREFERENCES Floor Plan/Elevation Scale ___________________________________________________________________________ Detail Scale_______________________________________________________________________________________ Dimension Font____________________________________________________________________________________ Dimension Height __________________________________________________________________________________ Dimension Spacing _________________________________________________________________________________ Dimension Pointer Style _____________________________________________________________________________ DISPLAY PREFERENCES Display All Cabinet Dimensions: (0) No (1) Yes __________________________________________________________ Display Section Width Dimensions: (0) No (1) Yes________________________________________________________ Display Section Height Dimensions: (0) No (1) Yes _______________________________________________________ Display Appliance Center Line Dimensions: (0) No (1) Yes _________________________________________________ Display Filler Dimensions: (0) No (1) Yes _______________________________________________________________ Display Stile Dimensions: (0) No (1) Yes _______________________________________________________________ Display Counter Tops: (0) No (1) Yes __________________________________________________________________ Display 3D Objects: (0) No (1) Yes ____________________________________________________________________ Display CAD Text: (0) No (1) Yes _____________________________________________________________________ Display Mechanical Symbols (0) No (1) Yes ____________________________________________________________ CAD Line Weight: (0) No (1) Yes _____________________________________________________________________ Display Cabinet Information: (0) No (1) Yes _____________________________________________________________ Display Shelves: (0) No (1) Yes ______________________________________________________________________ Display Color Fill on Elevations: (0) No (1) Yes __________________________________________________________ Display Wood Grain: (0) No (1) Yes ___________________________________________________________________ Display Door Designs: (0) No (1) Yes __________________________________________________________________ Display Door Overlaps: (0) No (1) Yes _________________________________________________________________ Display Door Hinge Indication: (0) No (1) Yes ___________________________________________________________ Display Long Names: (0) No (1) Yes __________________________________________________________________ Display Door Hinge Indication: (0) No (1) Yes ___________________________________________________________ No Report: (0) No (1) Yes ___________________________________________________________________________ Installation Reports: (0) No (1) Yes____________________________________________________________________ Cabinet Reports: (0) No (1) Yes ______________________________________________________________________ 6-29 MULTI-DRAW PREFERENCES Floor Plan/Elevation Scale ___________________________________________________________________________ Detail Scale_______________________________________________________________________________________ Dimension Font____________________________________________________________________________________ Dimension Height __________________________________________________________________________________ Dimension Spacing _________________________________________________________________________________ Dimension Pointer Style _____________________________________________________________________________ Page Size ________________________________________________________________________________________ NOTES: 6-30 Counter Top Parameters Top Description____________________________________________________________________________________ Top Thickness_____________________________________________________________________________________ Front Edge Thickness _______________________________________________________________________________ Counter Overhang at Front of Cabinet __________________________________________________________________ Back Splash Height_________________________________________________________________________________ Counter Overhang at Finished End ____________________________________________________________________ Radius on Finished End _____________________________________________________________________________ Bar Overhang on Back Face of Peninsula/Island __________________________________________________________ Radius on Peninsula/Island Overhang __________________________________________________________________ NOTES: 6-31 Frame Layout Parameters (0) Integral (1) Custom Modular (2) Library Modular ______________________________________________________ Parameters: (0) English (1) Metric ____________________________________________________________________ Modular Increments ________________________________________________________________________________ Modular End Adjustment: (0) Filler (1) Cabinet___________________________________________________________ Wall Height _______________________________________________________________________________________ Distance Door Opening to Cabinet _____________________________________________________________________ Distance Wall End to Cabinet _________________________________________________________________________ Distance Window Opening to Cabinet __________________________________________________________________ Distance Base Return Pulled from Wall _________________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance Base Return Pulled from Wall _________________________________________________________ Distance Upper Return Pulled from Wall ________________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance Upper Return Pulled from Wall_________________________________________________________ Soffit Overhang ____________________________________________________________________________________ Soffit Height over Upper _____________________________________________________________________________ Distance Upper Pulled from Ceiling/Soffit________________________________________________________________ Soffit Height over FTOC _____________________________________________________________________________ Distance Pantries and Special Cabinets Pulled from Ceiling/Soffit ____________________________________________ NOTES: 6-32 Frameless Layout Parameters (0) Integral (1) Custom Modular (2) Library Modular ______________________________________________________ Parameters: (0) English (1) Metric ____________________________________________________________________ Modular Increments ________________________________________________________________________________ Modular End Adjustment: (0) Filler (1) Cabinet___________________________________________________________ Wall Height _______________________________________________________________________________________ Distance Door Opening to Cabinet _____________________________________________________________________ Distance Wall End to Cabinet _________________________________________________________________________ Distance Window Opening to Cabinet __________________________________________________________________ Distance Base Return Pulled from Wall _________________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance Base Return Pulled from Wall _________________________________________________________ Distance Upper Return Pulled from Wall ________________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance Upper Return Pulled from Wall_________________________________________________________ Distance Cabinet Pulled from Wall _____________________________________________________________________ Soffit Overhang ____________________________________________________________________________________ Soffit Height over Upper _____________________________________________________________________________ Distance Upper Pulled from Ceiling/Soffit________________________________________________________________ Soffit Height over FTOC _____________________________________________________________________________ Distance Pantries and Special Cabinets Pulled from Ceiling/Soffit ____________________________________________ Distance Base Pulled from Return _____________________________________________________________________ Distance Upper Pulled from Return ____________________________________________________________________ NOTES: 6-33 Frame Cabinet Parameters Right Partition: (0) No (1) Center (2) Flush Left (3) Flush Right _____________________________________________ Ignore Library Cabinet Wall/Finished Distinctions: (0) No (1) Yes ____________________________________________ UPPERS Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Section Type: (0) Open (1) Door(s) ___________________________________________________________________ Doors: (0) Pair (1) Pair/mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right ______________________________________________ Optimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Maximum Section/Module Width ______________________________________________________________________ Minimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 1 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 2 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 3 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 4 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Number of Fixed Shelves ____________________________________________________________________________ Number of Adjustable Shelves ________________________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance from Floor to Upper _________________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance from Floor to Hood Top ______________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance Floor to Upper over Sink _____________________________________________________________ Height Increment (Standard)__________________________________________________________________________ Access Door Opening Height _________________________________________________________________________ Access Door Opening Width__________________________________________________________________________ BASES Section Type: (0) Open (1) Door (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer bank (4) Desk __________________________________ Door: (0) Pair (1) Pair/Mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right _______________________________________________ Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Height ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Toe Kick Height____________________________________________________________________________________ Toe Kick Depth ____________________________________________________________________________________ Toe Kick: (0) None (1) Attached (2) Detached (3) No Notch [Finished] (4) No Notch [All] ________________________ Toe Kick Butt to Wall End (0) No (1) Yes _______________________________________________________________ Front Toe Kick Finished End Adjustment ________________________________________________________________ Optimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Maximum Section/Module Width ______________________________________________________________________ 6-34 Minimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 1 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 2 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 3 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 4 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Number of Pull-outs ________________________________________________________________________________ Number of Fixed Shelves ____________________________________________________________________________ Number of Adjustable Shelves ________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer over Door __________________________________________________________________________ Number of Drawers in Bank __________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 1 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 2 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 3 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 4 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 5 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 6 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 7 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 8 ______________________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 1: (1) Single (2) Double (3) False (4) Double False_____________________________________________ Drawer No. 2: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 3: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 4: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 5: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 6: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 7: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 8: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Access Door Opening Height _________________________________________________________________________ Access Door Opening Width__________________________________________________________________________ PANTRY CABINETS Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Height of Bottom Section ____________________________________________________________________________ Number of Fixed Shelves in Upper Section ______________________________________________________________ Number of Adjustable Shelves in Upper Section __________________________________________________________ Number of Pull Outs in Bottom Section _________________________________________________________________ Number of Fixed Shelves in Bottom Section _____________________________________________________________ 6-35 Number of Adjustable Shelves in Bottom Section _________________________________________________________ SPLIT-LEVEL CABINETS Overall Height _____________________________________________________________________________________ Upper Section Depth________________________________________________________________________________ Type: (0) Open (1) Door (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer Bank ________________________________________________ CLOSET COMPONENTS Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Drawer Side Length ________________________________________________________________________________ Distance Rod from Wall _____________________________________________________________________________ DESK SECTIONS Desk Drawer: (0) None (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________ Rail Under Desk Drawer: (0) No (1) Yes________________________________________________________________ Rail Width Under Desk Drawer ________________________________________________________________________ Bottom Below Desk Drawer: (0) No (1) Yes _____________________________________________________________ Extend Back Across Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes ________________________________________________________ Break Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes ___________________________________________________________________ FINISHED ENDS Finished End Type: (0) Normal (1) Paneled _____________________________________________________________ Base Cabinet Ends to Appliances: (0) Normal (1) Paneled _________________________________________________ FACE FRAME SIZES Face Frame Thickness ______________________________________________________________________________ Rail Width ________________________________________________________________________________________ Mullion Width _____________________________________________________________________________________ Mullion Width Between Pair of Doors ___________________________________________________________________ Finished Stile Width ________________________________________________________________________________ Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Wall) ______________________________________________________________________ Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Cabinetl)___________________________________________________________________ Wall Stile Width (Cabinet to Appliancel) _________________________________________________________________ Cutting Board Rail Width_____________________________________________________________________________ Recessed Section Stile Width_________________________________________________________________________ Recessed Section Top Rail Width _____________________________________________________________________ Recessed Section Set Stiles Width ____________________________________________________________________ 6-36 Base Top Rail Width ________________________________________________________________________________ Upper Top Rail Width _______________________________________________________________________________ Base Bottom Rail Width _____________________________________________________________________________ Upper Bottom Rail Width ____________________________________________________________________________ Upper Return Stile Width ____________________________________________________________________________ Upper Corner Stile Width ____________________________________________________________________________ Base Return Stile Width _____________________________________________________________________________ Base Corner Stile Width _____________________________________________________________________________ Round Base Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes ____________________________________________________________ Round Upper Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes____________________________________________________________ Base Return Panel Width ____________________________________________________________________________ Upper Return Panel Width ___________________________________________________________________________ Top Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken ___________________________________________________________________ Middle Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken_________________________________________________________________ Bottom Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken ________________________________________________________________ SCRIBES Base Scribe_______________________________________________________________________________________ Peninsula Base Return Scribe ________________________________________________________________________ Upper Scribe ______________________________________________________________________________________ Upper Return Scribe ________________________________________________________________________________ NOTES: 6-37 Frameless Cabinet Parameters Interior Material Thickness ___________________________________________________________________________ Exterior Material Thickness___________________________________________________________________________ Ignore Library Cabinet Wall/Finished Distinctions: (0) No (1) Yes ____________________________________________ UPPERS Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Section Type: (0) Open (1) Door(s) ___________________________________________________________________ Doors: (0) Pair (1) Pair/mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right ______________________________________________ Optimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Maximum Section/Module Width ______________________________________________________________________ Minimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 1 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 2 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 3 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 4 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Number of Fixed Shelves ____________________________________________________________________________ Number of Adjustable Shelves ________________________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance from Floor to Upper _________________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance from Floor to Hood Top ______________________________________________________________ Minimum Distance Floor to Upper over Sink _____________________________________________________________ Height Increment (Standard)__________________________________________________________________________ Access Door Opening Height _________________________________________________________________________ Access Door Opening Width__________________________________________________________________________ BASES Section Type: (0) Open (1) Door (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer bank (4) Desk __________________________________ Door: (0) Pair (1) Pair/Mullion (2) Hinge Left (3) Hinge Right _______________________________________________ Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Height ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Toe Kick Height____________________________________________________________________________________ Toe Kick Depth ____________________________________________________________________________________ Toe Kick: (0) None (1) Attached (2) Detached (3) No Notch [Finished] (4) No Notch [All] ________________________ Toe Kick Butt to Wall End (0) No (1) Yes _______________________________________________________________ Front Toe Kick Finished End Adjustment ________________________________________________________________ Optimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ 6-38 Maximum Section/Module Width ______________________________________________________________________ Minimum Section/Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 1 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 2 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 3 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Fill 4 Max Library Module Width _______________________________________________________________________ Number of Pull-outs ________________________________________________________________________________ Number of Fixed Shelves ____________________________________________________________________________ Number of Adjustable Shelves ________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer over Door __________________________________________________________________________ Number of Drawers in Bank __________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 1 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 2 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 3 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 4 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 5 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 6 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 7 ______________________________________________________________________________ Height of Drawer No. 8 ______________________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 1: (1) Single (2) Double (3) False (4) Double False_____________________________________________ Drawer No. 2: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 3: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 4: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 5: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 6: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 7: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Drawer No. 8: (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________________ Access Door Opening Height _________________________________________________________________________ Access Door Opening Width__________________________________________________________________________ PANTRY CABINETS Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Height of Bottom Section ____________________________________________________________________________ Number of Fixed Shelves in Upper Section ______________________________________________________________ Number of Adjustable Shelves in Upper Section __________________________________________________________ Number of Pull Outs in Bottom Section _________________________________________________________________ 6-39 Number of Fixed Shelves in Bottom Section _____________________________________________________________ Number of Adjustable Shelves in Bottom Section _________________________________________________________ SPLIT-LEVEL CABINETS Overall Height _____________________________________________________________________________________ Upper Section Depth________________________________________________________________________________ Type: (0) Open (1) Door (2) Drawer/Door (3) Drawer Bank ________________________________________________ CLOSET COMPONENTS Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________________ Drawer Side Length ________________________________________________________________________________ Distance Rod from Wall _____________________________________________________________________________ DESK SECTIONS Desk Drawer: (0) None (1) Single (2) Double ___________________________________________________________ Bottom below Desk Drawer (0) No (1) Yes ______________________________________________________________ Extend Back Across Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes ________________________________________________________ Break Desk Section: (0) No (1) Yes ___________________________________________________________________ FINISHED ENDS Finished End Type: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Applied ___________________________________________________ Base Cabinet Ends Next to Appliances: (0) Normal (1) Paneled (2) Applied ___________________________________ Upper Cabinet Ends next to Hood/Refer: (0) Normal (1) Applied, Full Height (2) Applied, Half Height________________ APPLIED ENDS Applied Finished End Type (0) Square (1) Radius (2) Clipped __________________________________________________ Applied Finished End Upper Top Adjustment _______________________________________________________________ Applied Finished End Upper Bottom Adjustment_____________________________________________________________ Applied Finished End Base Top Adjustment ________________________________________________________________ Applied Finished End Base Bottom Adjustment _____________________________________________________________ Applied Finished Radius _______________________________________________________________________________ Applied Finished End Depth Adjustment ___________________________________________________________________ FACE FRAME SIZES Mullion Width Between Pair of Doors ___________________________________________________________________ Cutting Board Rail Width_____________________________________________________________________________ Top Rail in Base Cabinets (0) No (1) Yes_______________________________________________________________ Top Rail/Top Stretcher Thickness______________________________________________________________________ 6-40 Round Base Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes ____________________________________________________________ Round Upper Corner Cabinet: (0) No (1) Yes____________________________________________________________ Base Return Panel Width ____________________________________________________________________________ Base Return Construction (0/1) _______________________________________________________________________ Upper Return Panel Width ___________________________________________________________________________ Upper Return Construction (0/1)_______________________________________________________________________ EURO FACE FRAMES Face Frame Thickness ______________________________________________________________________________ Rail Width ________________________________________________________________________________________ Mullion Width _____________________________________________________________________________________ Mullion Width Between Pair of Doors ___________________________________________________________________ Finish Stile Width __________________________________________________________________________________ Wall Stile Width____________________________________________________________________________________ Base Top Rail Width ________________________________________________________________________________ Upper Top Rail Width _______________________________________________________________________________ Base Bottom Rail Width _____________________________________________________________________________ Upper Bottom Rail Width ____________________________________________________________________________ Top Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken ___________________________________________________________________ Middle Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken _________________________________________________________________ Bottom Rail: (0) Continuous (1) Broken _________________________________________________________________ Face Frame Mortis and Tenon Depth ___________________________________________________________________ NOTES: 6-41 Door/Drawer Parameters Door and Panel Thickness ___________________________________________________________________________ UPPERS, PANTRIES AND SPECIAL CABINET DOOR OVERLAPS Overlap of Top Rail _________________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Intermediate Rails _________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Bottom Rail ______________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Finished End _____________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Wall End ________________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Partition _________________________________________________________________________________ BASE DOOR OVERLAPS Overlap of Top Rail _________________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Intermediate Rails _________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Bottom Rail ______________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Finished End _____________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Wall End ________________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Partition _________________________________________________________________________________ DRAWER FRONT OVERLAPS Overlap of Top Rail _________________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Intermediate Rails _________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Bottom Rail ______________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Partitions ________________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Finished End _____________________________________________________________________________ Overlap of Wall End ________________________________________________________________________________ End Panel Frame Sizes Base Top Rail Width ________________________________________________________________________________ Base Bottom Rail Width _____________________________________________________________________________ Base Front Stile Width ______________________________________________________________________________ Base Back Stile Width ______________________________________________________________________________ Base Middle Rail/Mullion Width _______________________________________________________________________ Upper Top Rail Width _______________________________________________________________________________ Upper Bottom Rail Width ____________________________________________________________________________ Upper Front Stile Width______________________________________________________________________________ Upper Back Stile Width ______________________________________________________________________________ 6-42 Upper Middle Rail/Mullion Width_______________________________________________________________________ Pantry and Special Cabinet Top Rail Width ______________________________________________________________ Pantry and Special Cabinet Bottom Rail Width____________________________________________________________ Pantry and Special Cabinet Front Stile Width_____________________________________________________________ Pantry and Special Cabinet Back Stile Width _____________________________________________________________ Pantry and Special Cabinet Middle Rail/Mullion Width ______________________________________________________ NOTES: 6-43 Appliance Parameters REFRIGERATOR Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Height ____________________________________________________________________________________ REFER BOX Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Height ____________________________________________________________________________________ Cabinet Depth ____________________________________________________________________________________ Side on: (0) Left (1) Right (2) Both____________________________________________________________________ UNDERCOUNTER REFER Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ WALL OVEN Cutout Width ______________________________________________________________________________________ Cutout Height _____________________________________________________________________________________ Distance from Floor to Oven __________________________________________________________________________ Cabinet Depth _____________________________________________________________________________________ UNDERCOUNTER OVEN Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ 6-44 FREE STANDING RANGE Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ DROP IN RANGE Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ Bottom Rail Width __________________________________________________________________________________ COOK TOP Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ HOOD Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ MICROWAVE HOOD Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ DISHWASHER Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ 6-45 COMPACTOR Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ SINK Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ WASHER Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ DRYER Appliance Width ___________________________________________________________________________________ Opening Width ____________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Depth ___________________________________________________________________________________ Appliance Height___________________________________________________________________________________ 6-46
